BSS Feature Description

Chapter 1 BSS Solution .................................................................
1-1
1.1 GSM/GPRS System ...............................................................................

1.1.1 GSM System ..................................................................................
1.1.2 GPRS System ................................................................................
1.2 BSS System features .............................................................................
1.3 BSC ........................................................................................................
1.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................
1.3.2 Features .........................................................................................
1.4 PCU ........................................................................................................
1.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................
1.4.2 Features .........................................................................................
1.5 BTS Series .............................................................................................
1.5.1 BTS30 ............................................................................................
1.5.2 BTS312 ..........................................................................................
1.5.3 BTS30A..........................................................................................
1.5.4 BTS3001C .....................................................................................
1.6 Operation & Maintenance .......................................................................
1.6.1 Operation & Maintenance of BTS ..................................................
1.6.2 Operation & Maintenance of BTS ..................................................
1.6.3 Traffic statistics console .................................................................
1.6.4 Dynamic Data Configuration Management ....................................
1.6.5 LMT ................................................................................................
1.6.6 OMC ...............................................................................................
1.6.7 Telnet terminal ...............................................................................
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-5
1-5
1-7
1-9
1-9
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-13
1-16
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-21
1-23
1-24
1-27
1-27
1-28
Chapter 2 BSS Functions ..............................................................
2-1
2.1 Basic Functions ......................................................................................

2.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.1.2 Channel..........................................................................................
2.1.3 System Information ........................................................................
2.1.4 Idle Mode Behavior ........................................................................
2.1.5 PLMN Selection .............................................................................
2.1.6 Cell Selection and Reselection ......................................................
2.1.7 Location updating...........................................................................
2.1.8 Access ...........................................................................................
2.1.9 Paging ............................................................................................
2.1.10 Immediate assignment .................................................................
2.1.11 Assignment ..................................................................................
2.1.12 Authentication ..............................................................................
2.1.13 Ciphering ......................................................................................
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-9
2-15
2-17
2-18
2-23
2-31
2-32
2-34
2-43
2-44
2-48
2.1.14 DTX ..............................................................................................

2.1.15 Frequency hopping ......................................................................
2.2 Extended Functions ................................................................................
2.2.1 Handover .......................................................................................
2.2.2 Power Control ................................................................................
2.2.3 Extended Cell.................................................................................
2.2.4 IUO .................................................................................................
2.2.5 Satellite Transfer ............................................................................
2.2.6 Diversity Receiving ........................................................................
2.2.7 Aggressive Frequency Reuse Pattern ...........................................
2.2.8 Multiband Network .........................................................................
2.2.9 Carrier Mutual-assistance ..............................................................
2.2.10 Cell Broadcast..............................................................................
2.2.11 Radio Channel Allocation .............................................................
2.3 GPRS Function ......................................................................................
2.3.1 Supported Packet System Information ..........................................
2.3.2 Supported GPRS MS Modes .........................................................
2.3.3 Supported RLC Modes ..................................................................
2.3.4 Supported Channel Coding Scheme .............................................
2.3.5 Supported Network Control Modes ................................................
2.3.6 Supported Network Operation Mode .............................................
2.3.7 Supported QoS ..............................................................................
2.3.8 Supported Assignment ...................................................................
2.3.9 Supported Paging ..........................................................................
2.3.10 Timing Advance ...........................................................................
2.3.11 Measurement Report ...................................................................
2.3.12 Supported Flow Control ...............................................................
2.3.13 Supported Dynamic Handover between TCH and PDCH............
2.3.14 Supported Packet Access Function .............................................
2-51
2-54
2-59
2-59
2-84
2-102
2-105
2-114
2-117
2-118
2-123
2-135
2-137
2-139
2-143
2-143
2-147
2-149
2-149
2-154
2-154
2-155
2-156
2-157
2-158
2-158
2-159
2-160
2-160
Chapter 3 Interface Description ....................................................
3-1
3.1 A Interface ..............................................................................................

3.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.1.2 Protocols on the A-Interface ..........................................................
3.1.3 A-Interface Management at BSS Side ...........................................
3.2 Um Interface ...........................................................................................
3.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.2.2 Layer 1 - Physical Layer ................................................................
3.2.3 Layer 2 - Data Link Layer...............................................................
3.2.4 L3 ...................................................................................................
3.3 Abis interface..........................................................................................
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-11
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-28
3-31
3-36
3.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................

3.3.2 Protocols on the Abis Interface ......................................................
3.3.3 Characteristics of Abis Interface ....................................................
3.4 Gb interface ............................................................................................
3.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.4.2 Protocols on the Gb Interface ........................................................
3.4.3 Characteristics of Gb Interface ......................................................
3.5 G-Abis Interface .....................................................................................
3.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.5.2 Interface Features ..........................................................................
3.5.3 Physical Layer/Transmission Media ..............................................
3.5.4 G-TRAU Frame Structure ..............................................................
3.5.5 G-Abis Characteristics ...................................................................
3.6 Pb Interface ............................................................................................
3.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.6.2 Internal Structure of Pb Interface ...................................................
3.6.3 Pb Interface Management ..............................................................
3.6.4 Characteristics of Huawei Pb Interface ..........................................
3.7 Operation & Maintenance Interface ........................................................
3.7.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.7.2 Feature ...........................................................................................
3-36
3-41
3-48
3-53
3-53
3-54
3-56
3-57
3-57
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-61
3-61
3-62
3-63
3-66
3-67
3-67
3-68
Appendix A Abbreviations ............................................................
A-1
HUAWEI
1. BSS Solution
2. BSS Function Description
3. BSS Interfaces
M900/M1800 Base Station Subsystem

Feature Description
V300R002

Feature Description
Manual Version
T2-030259-20021107-C-4.00
Product Version
V300R002
BOM
31020759
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company
headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
2002 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, SBS,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,
M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, NETENGINE, Musa, OptiX, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia,

VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, C&C08 iNET, iBill and infox are trademarks of Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort
has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the
contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document
don't constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual

Contents
The manual consists of 3 chapters that brief the solution, function, interfaces of BSS.
Chapter 1 is a brief introduction of the BSS solution that contains the networking of
BSS, the network element of BSS, the characteristic of BSS.

Chapter 2 introduces in detail the feature of BSS, contains basic feature, extended
feature, and GPRS feature.

Chapter 3 introduces all interfaces of BSS.
Target Readers
The manual is intended for the following readers:
z
Marketing staff
Installation engineers & technicians
Operation & maintenance personnel
Conventions
This document uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention
Description
Arial
Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow
Warnings, cautions, notes and tips are in Arial Narrow.
Terminal Display
Terminal Display is in Courier New; message input by the user
via the terminal is in boldface.
II. Command conventions

Convention
Description
italic font
Command arguments for which you supply values are in italics.
[]
Elements in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is
selected.
III. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in this document to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the

operation.
Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description.
Feature Description
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 BSS Solution.....................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 GSM/GPRS System ...........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 GSM System ..........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 GPRS System ........................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 BSS System features .........................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 BSC ....................................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.2 Features .................................................................................................................................................1-7
1.4 PCU....................................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.2 Features ...............................................................................................................................................1-10
1.5 BTS Series .......................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.5.1 BTS30 .................................................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.5.2 BTS312 ................................................................................................................................................1-13
1.5.3 BTS30A................................................................................................................................................1-16
1.5.4 BTS3001C............................................................................................................................................1-18
1.6 Operation & Maintenance.................................................................................................................................1-19
1.6.1 Operation & Maintenance of BTS.........................................................................................................1-19
1.6.2 Operation & Maintenance of BTS.........................................................................................................1-21
1.6.3 Traffic statistics console .......................................................................................................................1-23
1.6.4 Dynamic Data Configuration Management ..........................................................................................1-24
1.6.5 LMT ......................................................................................................................................................1-27
1.6.6 OMC.....................................................................................................................................................1-27
1.6.7 Telnet terminal......................................................................................................................................1-28
Chapter 2 BSS Functions ..................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Basic Functions ..................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Channel..................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 System Information ................................................................................................................................2-9
2.1.4 Idle Mode Behavior ..............................................................................................................................2-15
2.1.5 PLMN Selection....................................................................................................................................2-17
2.1.6 Cell Selection and Reselection.............................................................................................................2-18
2.1.7 Location updating.................................................................................................................................2-23
2.1.8 Access..................................................................................................................................................2-31
2.1.9 Paging ..................................................................................................................................................2-32
2.1.10 Immediate assignment .......................................................................................................................2-34
2.1.11 Assignment.........................................................................................................................................2-43
2.1.12 Authentication.....................................................................................................................................2-44
2.1.13 Ciphering............................................................................................................................................2-48
2.1.14 DTX ....................................................................................................................................................2-51
2.1.15 Frequency hopping.............................................................................................................................2-54
03C-1611-20020430-400
Feature Description
Table of Contents
2.2 Extended Functions..........................................................................................................................................2-59

2.2.1 Handover..............................................................................................................................................2-59
2.2.2 Power Control.......................................................................................................................................2-84
2.2.3 Extended Cell.....................................................................................................................................2-102
2.2.4 IUO.....................................................................................................................................................2-105
2.2.5 Satellite Transfer ................................................................................................................................ 2-114
2.2.6 Diversity Receiving............................................................................................................................. 2-117
2.2.7 Aggressive Frequency Reuse Pattern................................................................................................ 2-118
2.2.8 Multiband Network..............................................................................................................................2-123
2.2.9 Carrier Mutual-assistance ..................................................................................................................2-135
2.2.10 Cell Broadcast..................................................................................................................................2-137
2.2.11 Radio Channel Allocation .................................................................................................................2-139
2.3 GPRS Function...............................................................................................................................................2-143
2.3.1 Supported Packet System Information...............................................................................................2-143
2.3.2 Supported GPRS MS Modes .............................................................................................................2-147
2.3.3 Supported RLC Modes.......................................................................................................................2-149
2.3.4 Supported Channel Coding Scheme..................................................................................................2-149
2.3.5 Supported Network Control Modes ....................................................................................................2-154
2.3.6 Supported Network Operation Mode..................................................................................................2-154
2.3.7 Supported QoS...................................................................................................................................2-155
2.3.8 Supported Assignment.......................................................................................................................2-156
2.3.9 Supported Paging...............................................................................................................................2-157
2.3.10 Timing Advance................................................................................................................................2-158
2.3.11 Measurement Report........................................................................................................................2-158
2.3.12 Supported Flow Control....................................................................................................................2-159
2.3.13 Supported Dynamic Handover between TCH and PDCH................................................................2-160
2.3.14 Supported Packet Access Function .................................................................................................2-160
Chapter 3 Interface Description.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 A Interface ..........................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Protocols on the A-Interface...................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.3 A-Interface Management at BSS Side ................................................................................................. 3-11
3.2 Um Interface.....................................................................................................................................................3-20
3.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................3-20
3.2.2 Layer 1 - Physical Layer.......................................................................................................................3-21
3.2.3 Layer 2 - Data Link Layer.....................................................................................................................3-28
3.2.4 L3 .........................................................................................................................................................3-31
3.3 Abis interface....................................................................................................................................................3-36
3.3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................3-36
3.3.2 Protocols on the Abis Interface ............................................................................................................3-41
3.3.3 Characteristics of Abis Interface...........................................................................................................3-48
3.4 Gb interface......................................................................................................................................................3-53
3.4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................3-53
3.4.2 Protocols on the Gb Interface...............................................................................................................3-54
3.4.3 Characteristics of Gb Interface.............................................................................................................3-56
3.5 G-Abis Interface................................................................................................................................................3-57
03C-1611-20020430-400
ii
Feature Description
Table of Contents
3.5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................3-57

3.5.2 Interface Features ................................................................................................................................3-57
3.5.3 Physical Layer/Transmission Media.....................................................................................................3-58
3.5.4 G-TRAU Frame Structure.....................................................................................................................3-59
3.5.5 G-Abis Characteristics..........................................................................................................................3-60
3.6 Pb Interface ......................................................................................................................................................3-61
3.6.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................3-61
3.6.2 Internal Structure of Pb Interface .........................................................................................................3-62
3.6.3 Pb Interface Management....................................................................................................................3-63
3.6.4 Characteristics of Huawei Pb Interface ................................................................................................3-66
3.7 Operation & Maintenance Interface..................................................................................................................3-67
3.7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................3-67
3.7.2 Feature.................................................................................................................................................3-68
03C-1611-20020430-400
iii
Feature Description
Chapter 1 BSS Solution

1.1 GSM/GPRS System
Huawei's GSM/GPRS mobile communication series cover all products in the network
(except for MS). The comprehensive mobile communication solution includes the
network construction at service layer, transport layer and supporting layer, etc.
Huawei provides the best sustainable network solution and integrated system solution
adaptable to different wireless environment according to the size, capacity, coverage
and investment scope of the mobile network, satisfying the carriers' different
requirements on products and services. GSM/GPRS network is illustrated in
Figure 1-1.
GSM/GPRS BSS
Um
GSM NSS
R/S
MSC
BTS
BSC
LMT
PCU
LMT
GPRS NSS
SGSN
LAN/WAN
OMC Server OMC W S

OMC WS
GSM/GPRS OMC
Telnet Terminal
GSM/GPRS OMS
Figure 1-1 Huawei GSM/GPRS network
1.1.1 GSM System

M900/M1800 GSM serial products include the Mobile Switching System (MSC/VLR
and HLR/AUC/EIR), mobile Base Station System (BSC and BTS), operation and
maintenance center (OMC), GMSC, TMSC and SMC. VLR is integrated in MSC as a
built-in device. HLR is the equipment with functions of AUC and EIR integrated. OMC
1-1
Feature Description
implements centralized management and unified maintenance for the entire network
via LAN or WAN. Besides Huawei also provides Short Message Center (SMC). The
SMC introduced here is integrated with Voice Mailbox (VM).
M900/M1800 GSM system is in complete conformity with ETSI GSM standard,
supporting the service and function defined in Phase 1, Phase 2 and Phase 2+. It
includes indoor/outdoor macro BTS and integrated mini BTS. It also supports different
antenna feeder systems such as dual band and dual polarization antenna and spaced
antenna.All equipment support the two bands of GSM900/1800
M900/M1800 GSM provides services including:
z
Voice, G3 fax, data service and various supplementary services to satisfy the
basic needs of mobile subscribers.
CAMEL Phase 2 mobile intelligent service combines the technologies of GSM

and intelligent network, upgrading the mobile communication network with
advanced technologies.
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) provides high-speed packet data service
for the user. It is an important step for the smooth upgrading from GSM to 3G,
which to the best extent protects the investment.
Other new services, such as Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers (CCBS),

Explicit Call Transfer (ECT), Support Optimized Route (SOR), Call Deflection
(CD) and Unstructured Supplementary Service Data, make up the new profit
maker for the carriers.
1.1.2 GPRS System

Huawei GPRS is realized by adding GPRS Supporting Node and Packet Control Unit
as well as the corresponding software to the GSM network.The major NEs include
Service GPRS Supporting Node (SGSN), Gateway GPRS Supporting Node (GGSN),
GSN Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC-G), border gateway, charging gateway,
PCU, BSC, BTS, DNS and fire wall, etc.
The theoretical maximum access speed of GPRS is 171.2 kbit/s, which is desirable for
the high-speed mobile data service access. Its open system structure supports smooth
capacity expansion. The standardized interface guarantees the equipment capacity,
and supports QoS feature and the dynamic allocation of radio resources. In addition,
the flexible networking and configuration function can save a great amount of initial
investment of GPRS system for the carriers.
M900/M1800 GPRS is able to provide various packet services such as mobile internet
access, e-business (e.g. e-bank, e-currency, etc.), group management, remote
control/test, service reservation system (e.g. hotel, theater, flight, etc.) and services
base on group-call (e.g. stock information broadcasting), etc.
1-2
Feature Description
The high-speed mobile packet data service of GPRS effectively prolongs the life cycle
of GSM improves the utilization of radio resources and paves the way for the
emergence of 3G mobile communication. Huawei GPRS supports the smooth
upgrading to 3G system, which is important in protecting the investment of the
carriers.
1.2 BSS System features

BSS is designed mainly to connect the Mobile Station (MS) to the Mobile Switching
Center (MSC) of the GSM network or the Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN). BSS
also shares part of mobility management such as handover management.
BSS is the subsystem in GSM/GPRS related to the concepts of radio cells. BSS
communicates with MS through Um interface and handles radio link management and
connection through it. On the other side BSS communicates with MSC and SGSN
through A- and Gb interfaces respectively.
Figure 1-2 illustrates Huawei BSS solution. BSS includes BSC, PCU, serial BTSs and
O&M system.
SDH
BSC
MS
MSC
MS
PCU
SGSN
BSS
MS
Integrated mini BTS
Indoor BTS
Outdoor BTS
Figure 1-2 Huawei BSS solution

Supporting M900 BTS and M1800 BTS as well as M900/M1800 integrated BTS
and dual-band MS access.
1-3
Feature Description
Currently, Huawei GSM supports not only PDH, SDH, HDSL, microwave transmission,
but also satellite transmission, providing a comprehensive and completely compatible
solution.
Huawei M900/M1800 BSS provides complete GSM/GPRS solution with following
salient features.
I. Serial BTSs which support seamless coverage

z
A complete range of BSS products offers flexible networking and easy installation
with seamless coverage supported. As regards capacity, the selection ranges
from the integrated small BTS supporting one TRX, to macro cell supporting 12
TRXs. As regards usage environment, there is the indoor macro cell BTS,
outdoor macro cell BTS, integrated small BTS and the mobilized BTS applicable
to movable site.
Huawei BSS employs the layered cellular architecture to boost the coverage and
service quality of the system.
Supporting 900MHz, 1800MHz and mixed 900MHz/1800MHz GSM frequency

bands.
II. Flexible networking

z
There are multiple transmission modes supported between BTS and BSC: E1,
SDH, PON, HDSL, microwave and satellite, etc.
There are multiple transmission networking modes between BTS and BSC: star
networking, chain networking, tree networking and hybrid networking.
The tree networking between PCU and BSC is supported.
The SMUX interface provides 4:1 link multiplexing (one 64kbit/s TS transmits 4
information channels) and the Abis interface provides a variety of multiplexing
modes like 10:1, 12:1 and 15:1 (TRX: E1) and increases the transmission link
utilization.
III. Multiple services supported

z
A variety of services is provided: point-to-point short message service, cell

broadcast short message service, data services and fax services of various kinds
in addition to common voice services. Except for the voice services, these
services can be both based on circuit switching and on packet switching (GPRS).
Easy upgrading from GSM to GPRS network. To deliver GPRS services based
on the M900/M1800 BSS, simply update the software of the original BTS and
BSC and then add PCU.
1-4
Feature Description
IV. Powerful and easy maintenance function:

z
The operation & maintenance of the BSS is performed through centralized OMC
system and a consistent operation & maintenance interface, which makes
operation and maintenance easier and simpler.
Development-oriented architecture is adopted. All entities support downloading

software, which simplifies the upgrading.
The OMC provides friendly user interface for easier operation.
The system supports dynamic data configuration, online data modification and
online capacity expansion.
V. Stable and reliable performance

z
Huawei BSS reduces the power consumption by supporting uplink power control,
DRX (paging discontinuous reception) technology and VAD/DTX (voice activity
detection/discontinuous transmission) technology.
High reliability: key components (e.g. main processor, switching network and BS
interface equipment) operate in 1+1 hot backup and common parts runs with N+1
protection.
Self-check and switchover features enhances the system performance.
High availability of the system is ensured by using the excellent overload /

congestion control algorithm and fault recovery strategy.
The leading-edge handover, power control and channel allocation algorithms

make the system performance outstanding.
BCCH carrier frequency mutual-assistance, baseband frequency hopping &

carrier frequency mutual-assistance and LAPD link mutual-assistance empower
the system with a fault-prevention capability.
Supporting 120 km extended cell.
1.3 BSC
1.3.1 Overview
With the use of switching, photoelectric, micro-electronic, computer and radio
technologies, Huawei M900/M1800 BSC drives the mobile communication network to
evolve towards digitalization, integration, intelligence and personalization. Based on an
open network platform, it integrates an array of cutting-edge technologies in switching,
transmission and radio management, and supports all the services delivered by
GSM900 and GSM1800.
M900/M1800 BSC mainly performs radio resources management, BTS management,
power control, handover control, traffic statistics, etc. It plays a pivotal role in radio
access and network optimization.
1-5
Feature Description
The M900/M1800 BSC, whose system structure is shown in Figure 1-3, is comprised
of the following five modules:
I. Administration Module/ Communication Module

AM/CM is a centre for speech channel switching and information exchange in the BSC.
It implements the communication between various BMs.
II. Basic Module

This module is mainly responsible for call processing, signaling processing, radio
resources management, radio link management, and circuit maintenance, etc.
III. TransCoder & Sub-Multiplexer

TCSM implements the transcending / rate adaptation and sub-multiplexing functions.
IV. Cell Broadcast Database (CDB)

CDB is a traffic-processing centre, supports the broadcast short message service.
V. Back Administration Module (BAM)

The BAM frame is a bridge between BSC and OMC. The latter performs the operation
& maintenance of the BSC via OMC.
1-6
Feature Description
AM/CM
BM
BTS
Abisinterface
BIE
GOPT
GFBI
GMEM
GMC2
CDB
GNET
BIE
GNOD
GLAP
/LPN7
TCSM
GMPU
GALM
Ater-interface
E3M
PCU Pb-interface
BITS
OMC-R
ext.CBC
OMC
interface
(LAN/WAN)
ext.CBC
interface
(LAN/WAN/X.25)
GCTN
GCKS
GSNT
BAM
GMEM
CDB ... GMEM GMCCM GMCCS
GMEM
GALM
Figure 1-3 BSC structure

To communicate with BTS, MSC and PCU in the GSM/GPRS system, M900/M1800
BSC offers three external interfaces: A-interface, Abis interface and Pb interface.
A-interface is a standard open interface. Pb and Abis interfaces are self developed
interfaces. Complying respectively with ETSI GSM 08.08, ETSI GSM 04.08 & ETSI
GSM 08.58, Huawei Pb interface protocol, and compatible with the specifications of
GSM Phase 1 and GSM Phase 2, the three interfaces provide GSM Phase 2 +
functions like GPRS.
1.3.2 Features
The performance and features of the M900/M1800 BSC are:
z
Standard A-interface ensures the interconnection and interworking with the

equipment of other manufacturers.
M900/M1800 BSC can be expanded smoothly from 1 BM to 8 BMs.
Each BM can provide 8 A-sub interfaces or Pb interfaces, 64 Abis interfaces, 8

SS7 signaling ports and 192 LAPD ports at the most.
1-7
Feature Description
z
One BM can control 128 TRXs (transceiver) at the most, the switching matrix
is4K 4K.
At most 1024 Cell or 1024 TRX can be managed.
SMUX (sub-multiplexer) enables the multiplexing of terrestrial lines between MSC

and BSC, and saves the investments on terrestrial lines. Each SMUX enables the
4:1 line multiplexing.
Base station Interface Equipment (BIE) enables the 15:1 line multiplexing.
Supporting star, chain and tree networking topologies of BTS.
Transmission on the Abis interface can be implemented through terrestrial,

satellite, microwave or optical fiber.
Supporting a maximum traffic of 6400Erl
Max. BHCA: 800K
Strong system processing capability. In full configuration and normal traffic model,
GMPU load <25%. The processing capacity for future services is reserved.
Powerful processing capability and support of high traffic load.
High reliability
GMPUs in hot backup mode.
The switching network and BIE use the 1+1 backup mode.
SMUX uses the N+1 backup mode, where N is the total number of SMUX cards
in the system.
LAPD uses the N+1 backup mode.
Traffic adjustment: Optimized channel allocation mode enables the adaptive

adjustment of the network according to the changes of cell traffic loads and radio
environment.
Priority queuing function: The queuing of multiple priority levels for paging and
channel allocation satisfies the requirements of different subscribers.
Handover
function
supports
synchronous,
asynchronous
and
dual-band
handovers.
z
Multi-level traffic control mechanisms are provided on A- and Abis interfaces.
Resource verification and TRX cooperation mechanism: auto-fault clearing and

auto-protection, which is intended for system normal operation.
Centralized OMC: Centralized network management is responsible for real-time

management and control of the BSC & BTS, and provides detail interface tracing,
radio resources configuration, and traffic statistics.
Supporting GSM900 BTS and GSM1800 BTS as well as M900/M1800 integrated

BTS and dual-band MS access.
Synchronization mode uses active/standby synchronization mode.
Reasonable and flexible allocation of functions among modules based on a

multi-level distributed and group-CPU control.
1-8
Feature Description
z
High integration, superb engineering and high reliability using state-of-the-art

large scale integrated circuits (ASIC/EPLD/FPGA).
Low power consumption, only 3300W are required for maximum configuration.
Light & compact architecture, i.e. less room space is occupied.
The system supports dynamic data configuration, online data modification and
system expansion.
BCCH radio carrier mutual assistance, baseband FH radio carrier mutual

assistance and LAPD link mutual assistance ensure reliable system running.
Supporting GPRS packet services.
1.4 PCU
1.4.1 Overview
Packet Control Unit (PCU) is a device introduced by BSS to support the GPRS.
M900/M1800 PCU is fully designed according to GPRS standard protocols. It is
responsible for
z
Packet radio resource management functions.
Packet call control function.
Transmission of data packet on Um interface and Gb interface.
Providing Gb, G-Abis and Pb interfaces.
Based on a modular structure, M900/M1800 PCU is made up of several superimposed

PCU frames. The hardware structure of PCU is quite simple, as shown in Figure 1-4. It
consists of three modules:
z
POMU (Packet O&M Unit) module, responsible for the operation & maintenance
of the whole PCU frame.
RPPU (Radio Packet Processing Unit) module, which delivers all the traffic
handling functions of PCU and supports operation & maintenance.
HSC (Hot Swappable Control) module, a pure hardware module used for the hot
backup function.
1-9
Feature Description
1+1
1+1
BSC
RPPU
RPPU
SGSN
BSC
RPPU
RPPU
RPPU
SGSN
.
.
.
.
.
.
RPPU
RPPU
BSC
POMU
HSC
LAN Switch
WS
SGSN
OMC Server
PCU
Figure 1-4 PCU hardware architecture
1.4.2 Features
M900/M1800 PCU owns the following performance and features:
z
Modularized structure and smooth expansion of the network.
Large capacity and strong processing capability.
Preprocessing of measurement.
Uplink power control.
Excellent G-Abis interface solution, supports Um port synchronization. Support of

CS-3 and CS-4 upgrading.
CS (Coding Scheme) dynamic adjustment algorithm.
Dynamic conversion of PDCH (Packet Data Channel).
Flexible networking modes.
1.5 BTS Series

The BTS is the radio equipment serving one cell, which will be distributed over the
whole radio service area.
Based on customers current and future requirements, Huawei has developed a series
of BTS products including indoor and outdoor products so that network deployment
and coverage become very easy.
1-10
Feature Description
Huawei BTS series include BTS30, BTS312, BTS30A and BTS3001C, etc. Among
them, BTS30 and BTS312 are the indoor BTS, while BTS30A is the outdoor BTS, and
BTS3001C is the integrated small BTS.
1.5.1 BTS30
BTS30 adopts modular structure, i.e. all circuits (including baseband processing part,
RF part, power amplifier and power supply) that take care of one carrier are integrated
in one plug-in TRX module. This greatly simplifies system configuration and facilitates
installation, maintenance and expansion, as well as introduction of new hardware.
BTS30 cabinet is a 19-inch standard cabinet based on IEC297 standards, with
dimensions 1600 mm % 600 mm % 450 mm (H % W % D).
I. Features and functions

BTS30 is capable of the following features and functions.
1)
Performance characteristics.
Supporting GSM900 and GSM1800 TRXs in the same cabinet.
The maximum output power of 900MHz and 1900MHz amplifiers is 40W.
Build-in transmission equipment (supporting E1, SDH, PON, etc.) saves carriers
investment in transmission equipment.
Supporting various networking modes, including star, tree, chain and mixed
topologies.
One cabinet provides up to 8 E1 interfaces.
15 TRXs share one E1 for transmission on the Abis interface (15:1)
Supporting large capacity flexible configurations: Omni cell: 1~18 TRXs, 2-sectors:
1/1~18/18 TRXs, 3-sectors: 1/1/1~18/18/18 TRXs.
Low power consumption (max. power consumption of a cabinet is 1200W) and

light weight (a cabinet in full configuration weighs about 180kg).
Build-in power supply system, 220VAC/-48VDC/24VDC power supplies available.
Centralized power supply to cabinets, and distributed supply to various modules,

which enhances system reliability.
Modular structure, which facilitates installation, maintenance and capacity

expansion.
2)
Functions
Supporting both 900MHz and 1800MHz dual-band systems
Supporting Phase 1 / Phase 2 / Phase 2+ compatible LAPDm protocol.
Supporting Phase 1 / Phase 2 / Phase 2+ compatible system messages and

resources indication.
Providing basic service functions required by the system, including location

update, MTC and MOC.
Supporting synchronous, asynchronous and pre-synchronous handovers.
1-11
Feature Description
z
Supporting short message cell broadcast and point-to-point short message

broadcast.
Calculation of timing advance.
Supporting diversity receiving and soft decision demodulation functions.
Supporting paging queuing.
Supporting data services specified in Phase 2.
Supporting detection of random access collision.
Supporting baseband hopping and RF hopping.
Supporting A5 encryption/decryption.
Supporting GPRS: routing area/location area update, uplink/down link TBF.
Supporting the CS-1/CS-2/CS-3/CS-4 radio channel coding schemes.
Supporting dynamic configuration of basic data.
Supporting dynamic resources management.
Supporting preprocessing of measurement report.
Supporting immediate assignment and paging combination to increase the radio

channels utilization.
Supporting static and dynamic power control of the base station.
Supporting omni and sector cells.
Supporting cell layering, concentric cell and microcell applications.
Internal bus technique facilitates future expansion.
Providing both power supply and battery management functions.
Supporting locked, holdover, fast pull-in, and free-run clock modes.
BTS room environment monitoring function achieves unattended operation.
Use of triplex tower-top amplifier improves the receiving sensitivity.
Supporting bipolarization antennas, reducing antennas in a cell.
RF indices conform to GSM 05.05 specifications.
Supporting 120km extended cell.
II. Technical indices

z
Dimension
H % W % D = 1600 mm % 600 mm % 450 mm
Power supply
220V AC: 150~280 V AC / 45~65Hz,
-48V DC: -40~-60VDC,
24 V DC: 19~29 V DC,
Operational temperature (normal): -5~+45
Operational humidity: 5~85
Weight (fully configured): 180kg
Bearing requirement: 250kg/m2
Power consumption / cabinet Max load: 1200W
1-12
Feature Description
z
Receiving sensitivity:
-110 dBm (GSM900), -109 dBm (GSM1800)
Tx Power: 40W (46 dBm)
1.5.2 BTS312
I. Performance characteristics.
The BTS312 is an indoor macro BTS, featured by large capacity, high integration, and
low power consumption. Single rack can support up to 12 TRXs (radio carriers). It is
designed as a typical all-in-one BTS by taking full consideration of capacity,
configuration, installation, power supply, transmission, and services requirements.
BTS312 features:
1)
Mature technology and reliable RF performance
Large-scale application of Huawei radio base station equipment spawns on the

maturity and stability of the RF technology.
Supporting both RF hopping and base band hopping with excellent performance
in application.
Advanced digital RF technology improves the consistency, massive productivity,

and reliability of the product.
2)
Large capacity & low power consumption

BTS312 supports 24/24/24 configuration. A single rack supports up to 12 TRXs,
consuming 2400W in total, on average each TRX consumes only 200W.
50% floor space needed comparing the regular 6-TRX BTS, thus greatly saving
the equipment room space.
With a low power consumption design, the requirements for power supply and air
conditioners are reduced.
The integrated transmission equipment supports multiple transmission modes,

saving the investment on transmission equipment.
3)
The 15 TRXs on Abis interface share one E1 interface for transmission (15:1)
For example The BTS whose configuration is S(5/5/5) occupies only one E1 at
the Abis interface. This saves tremendously the transmission leasing expenses.
The use of advanced flow control algorithm can accomplish the statistical
multiplexing of the Abis signaling, as a result, it effectively improves the signaling
density.
This technique saves up to 50% transmission links compared to the normal 10:1
or 12:1 multiplexing.
4)
The E-Abis provides powerful anti-error code performance, synchronization

performance and anti-delay capability.
It supports satellite, SDH, E1/T1 and microwave transmission modes.
1-13
Feature Description
E-Abis technology includes the following aspects:

z
The high precision and unique software phase lock technology can solve
problems such as SDH clock phase jitter and satellite transmission clock signals
out-of-sync.
It tolerates a transmission BER of up to 10-4, much higher than the conventional

BER requirements, so it is suitable for the unstable transmission modes like
microwave, xDSL and satellite.
It allows transmission flash interruption, that is, it can tolerate transmission

interruption of less than 2s, which makes it suitable for unstable transmission.
Protection against long transmission delay on the Abis.
5)
Integrated optical transmission equipment

Huawei is the first one in the telecom industry to integrate the SDH, PON
equipment to provide "FTTB (Fiber To The Base station)", accomplishing the
broadband wireless access at one swoop.
6)
Integrated RF components
This technique protects the existing investment and ensures 100% usage of the
old equipment during capacity expansion. The existing antenna system including
the CDU, SCU, antenna, feeder and tower-top amplifier (optional) need not be
replaced during expansion. In the expansion from S(1/1/1) to S(8/8/8) of
broadband combining, each sector needs only one bipolarization antenna.
Modular structure: RF components are integrated in the CDU, which reduces the
line connections and improves system reliability. Installation and maintenance
also becomes easy.
Powerful maintenance functions: including the 2-level standing wave ratio alarm,
low-noise amplifier divider alarm, tower-top amplifier alarm, tower-top amplifier
power supply alarm, etc.
Intelligent CDU: in case of fault with the LNA (Low Noise Amplifier), this unit is
powered off remotely so as to make a LNA bypass and ensure the normal
working of the system. When the antenna incurs different losses, the gain of the
divider unit can be adjusted remotely so as to ensure the sensitivity of the
receiving system.
7)
Reliable power supply system

BTS 312 supports three kinds of input voltages (+24DC, -48DC and 220V AC).
Hot standby, centralized management and distributed power supply improve the
systems security and reliability.
8)
Supporting S (24/24/24) synchronous BTS configuration, completely meeting the

requirement of future development
A cell can hold 24 synchronous TRXs, and the maximum networking capability is
S (24/24/24) (synchronous site). Synchronous inter-cell handover can be
achieved even in the case of S (10/10/10) configuration or higher, thus shortening
1-14
Feature Description
the handover time consumption, shortening the call-drop rate and improving the
operation index of the entire network.
9)
Quick 1-minute startup and easy maintenance.
In case of any fault or failure, system can reload itself automatically without any
delay.
After power failure BTS can automatically resume working quickly when power
supply returns normal.
All software has been pre-installed before shipment from the factory, so there is
no need to load it again from BSC. This facilitates BTS testing and cutover.
Software loading does not interrupt services.
10) Supporting GPRS

II. Functions
z
Supporting Phase 1/Phase 2 compatible LAPDm protocol.
Supporting Phase 1/Phase 2 compatible system messages and resources

indication.

Supporting
synchronous,
asynchronous,
pseudo-synchronous
and
pre-synchronous handovers.
z

broadcast.
Supporting EFR voice coding scheme, which ensures a better voice quality.
Supporting DTX which minimizes interference.
Supporting basic services and functions of GPRS, routing area or location area
update, and uplink/downlink TBF.
Supporting the CS-1/CS-2/CS-3/CS-4 radio channel coding schemes.

1-15
Feature Description
Internal bus technique facilitates expansion.
Supporting locked holdover, fast pull-in, and free-run clock modes.
BTS room environment monitoring function achieves unattended operation.
III. Technical indices

z
Dimension
H % W % D = 1880 mm % 650 mm % 500 mm
Power supply
220V AC: 150~280VAC/45~65Hz;
-48V DC: -40~-60VDC;
24V DC: 19~29VDC.
Operational temperature (normal): -5~+45
Operational humidity: 15%~85%
Weight:
Single cabinet full configuration 330kg
Bearing requirement: 400kg/m2
Power consumption / cabinet Max load: 2400W
-110dBm (GSM900), -109dBm (GSM1800)
Tx Power: 40W (46dBm)
1.5.3 BTS30A
I. System overview
BTS30A is an outdoor BTS of Huawei GSM product series. As outdoor equipment, it is
characterized by excellent protection against wind, sands, rain, sunshine and burglary.
It has minimum requirements for environment. The outdoor/indoor BTS and integrated
small BTS make up the comprehensive solution for the construction of seamless
wireless coverage.
II. Performance characteristics.

z
Supporting GSM900 and GSM1800 modules in the same cabinet.
The maximum output power of 900MHz and 1900MHz amplifiers is 40W.
1-16
Feature Description
z
Build-in transmission equipment (supporting E1, SDH, PON, etc.) saves network
operators investment in transmission equipment.
Supporting various networking modes, including star, tree, chain and mixed
topologies.
One cabinet provides up to 8 E1 interfaces. 15 TRXs share one E1 for

transmission on the Abis interface (15:1)
Embedded power supply system, 220VAC applied.
Centralized power supply to cabinets, and distributed supply to various modules,

which enhances system reliability.
Perfect
environment
monitoring
system
enables
remote
operation
&
maintenance.
z
Powerful temperature regulation increases the systems adaptability to

environment.
Modular structure, which facilitates installation, maintenance and capacity

expansion.
III. Functions
z
Supporting Phase 1 / Phase 2 / Phase 2+ compatible LAPDm protocol.
Supporting Phase 1/Phase 2/ Phase 2+ compatible system messages and

resources indication.

Supporting
synchronous,
asynchronous,
pseudo-synchronous
and
pre-synchronous handovers.
z

broadcast.
Supporting GPRS.

1-17
Feature Description
Supporting cell layering, concentric cell and microcell applications.
Internal bus technique facilitates future expansion.
Supporting locked holdover, fast pull-in, and free-run clock modes.
Unattended operation. Provides BTS room environment monitoring function.
Conforming to IP55 outdoor equipment protection standard.
IV. Technical indices

z
Dimension
-H % W % D = 1800 mm % 1200 mm % 800 mm
-Internal available space = 1075 mm % 1001 mm % 725 mm
Power supply
-220V AC: 150~280 V AC / 45~65 Hz,
Operational temperature: -33 ~+55 (Environmental requirement),
Operational humidity: 5%~100%,
Weight (fully configured): 550 kg,
Power consumption / cabinet: max. 3200W,
-110 dBm (GSM900), -109 dBm (GSM1800)
Tx Power: 40 W (46dBm)
1.5.4 BTS3001C
I. Overview
iSite BTS3001C is highly adaptable to complicated climate and electro-magnetic
environment. It features flexible addressing and easy installation. It is mainly used to
improve the network capacity and to eliminate the blind spot of the macro cell
coverage, thus realizing the continuity of the coverage and lower the cost on
coverage.
In places where the macrocells cannot cover, the microcell base stations can be
installed to improve the network coverage and quality of service.
II. Features
BTS3001C features:
1-18
Feature Description
z
Star networking and chain networking supported. In chain networking, the

maximum serial connection levels are 5 levels,
Wide working temperature (-33~+55). In high temperature environment, the

cooling fins on the inner container will radiate the heat. In low temperature
environment, internal heating device will be started to ensure a suitable working
temperature.
All parts are fixed and little noise will be generated.
BTS22C can be installed on the walls, pillars or towers.
Flexible antenna configuration. Internal directional antenna and external omni /

directional antennas are supported.
Supporting GPRS.
Closed structure in full compliance with IP55 outdoor equipment protection

standard. All operations cannot be done until the locked operation cavity is
opened. The operation cavity at the lower part of the integrated small BTS
provides the maintenance interface and the indicators showing the working
condition of the inner container.
The input voltage range is 150~300 V AC, which makes adaptable to the areas
with highly fluctuating voltage.
1.6 Operation & Maintenance

1.6.1 Operation & Maintenance of BTS
The BTS maintenance module of BSC provides rich BTS maintenance functions.
Through these operations, subscribers can guarantee the highly efficient, stable and
reliable operations of BTSs. The operation costs will be reduced and communication
service quality will be improved.
I. BTS software loading management

Normally a BSC controls multiple BTSs, which are distributed widely with no personnel
on their duty. Some of them are even located at the areas with poor transportation,
such as the mountaintop. There it is very complicated to replace the BTS board
software at the location. As a solution to this problem, BSC supports the function of
remote loading BTS software. It is possible to load all software at OMC. Multiple
software can be loaded at one time, thus realizing the convenient upgrading of the
BTS software.
II. BTS data configuration management

The BTS will be initialized once the data configuration is finished to ensure the normal
operation of the BTS. The functions of online configuration and modification are
supported. During normal running, operation parameters are issued by BSC to BTS.
1-19
Feature Description
The BTS maintenance module in BSC enables the BTS data configuration process
and configures such information as BTS parameters cell parameters, frequency
parameter, channel parameters alarm threshold and BTS software & hardware
configurations. In addition, BSC needs to configure the BTS network structure data to
ensure the BTS functioning in different network topologies.
III. BTS equipment operation management

The BTS management module of M900/M1800 BSC helps the subscribers to check
the status of BTS equipment and objects. It also provides necessary maintenance
measures. BTS maintenance is object-oriented. These objects include BTS, cells, BT
(Baseband Transceiver), RC (TRX), channels, and boards.
IV. BTS test management

To enable the long-term, continuous and stable operation of the system, the use of
testing and diagnosis functions are necessary for the maintenance of the whole
system. M900/M1800 BSC provides powerful test and diagnosis function for BTS
maintenance.
BTS maintenance module of BSC provides powerful test and diagnosis function.
During normal running, BTS boards execute self-check instantly, and generate the
alarms automatically or perform switchover in case of serious fault or abnormality. On
the other hand, test tasks can be initiated from the BTS maintenance console.
V. BTS alarm management

BTS alarm management of M900/M1800 BSC is another function of BTS maintenance
management. If any abnormality or fault occurs during BTS running, BTS boards will
instantly report and inform the fault-handling program to handle it. At the same time,
various alarm messages and signals will be generated in the alarm system. Whenever
the alarm is generated, the alarm processing module shall send the fault message
reported from BTS to the maintenance and operation terminal. The alarm will also be
sent to the alarm box through the alarm box interface board. Alarm box generates the
sound and light indications to inform the maintenance personnel about the alarm. The
alarm sent to the maintenance and operation terminal will be displayed on the terminal
and also stored in the hard disk to be queried.
VI. TRX mutual-assistance management

1)
In case of BCCH fault in a cell, another TRX in the cell can be started to provide
service in place of the TRX where the original BCCH is located. Meanwhile, the
TRX can be restored by clearing the fault. If the original TRX can not be restored,
service provisioning will be interrupted. If the original TRX can not be restored, it
will quit service provisioning.
1-20
Feature Description
2)
In case of fault with a certain baseband hopping TRX during the normal running
process in a cell, this BTS will report the fault. The baseband frequency hopping
TRX fault processing function will delete the faulty baseband frequency hopping
TRX from the corresponding frequency hopping group so that the other frequency
hopping boards can work normally. After the faulty TRX has been recovered,
frequency hopping will no longer be available.
VII. Support of GPRS service

1)
BSS supports the dynamic conversion between PDCH and TCH. During the
conversion, the property of the related channel will be issued from BSC to BTS.
The dynamic conversion can be activated by BSC, and the conversion threshold
can be set.
2)
The channel connection will be reestablished when the packet channel encoding
mode is changed.
3)
Message transference between PDCH and TCH.
VIII. Other management processing

Other management processes mainly include circuit/channel blocking, active/standby
switchover of GMPU boards, alarm filtering, transfer of idle burst, BTS log report, and
resource check.
IX. BTS Emergency Operations

In the case of power failure, BTS will use the spare storage battery for power supply to
maintain the normal operation of the BTS.
If the BTS is over heated, BSC will automatically stop the power amplifying unit to
avoid damaging BTS.
1.6.2 Operation & Maintenance of BTS

The operation and maintenance system of M900/M1800 BSC is mainly used to
receive the OMC maintenance commands and perform routine maintenance, control
start, tracing & monitoring, overload management and memory operations. It is also
used to return the operation results to OMC.
I. Routine maintenance
The routine maintenance involves software version checking and module status
viewing so as to ensure normal and smooth system running.
1-21
Feature Description
II. Control startup

The control startup function involves circuit control, LAPD link maintenance, immediate
active/standby switchover, hierarchical resetting, board inquiry control, HDLC link
status, BSC system reset, resources check and GLAP software loading.
III. Tracing & monitoring

The maintenance management part of the BSC system features powerful tracing &
monitoring functions, including interface tracing and system performance monitoring.
IV. Memory operations.

The operations in the maintenance management of the BSC system on the memory
include memory inquiry and memory dumping.
V. Overload management
1)
Conventional concept
When the traffic are more than BSS can handle, then the system is called in Overload
State. To avoid such occurrence, overload control mechanism is introduced so that the
system can detect overload timely and take effective measures.
The BSS traffic comes from MS and MSC. Mobility management, call control, radio
frequency management and measurement data processing are the primary traffic at
the MS side. The traffic from the MSC includes call handling, handover request,
resources request/indication and the allocation function.
The overload control mechanism includes traffic detection and preventive mechanisms.
The traffic is monitored in BTS, MSC and BSC. When overload is detected, the
overload message will be sent to the BSC, which will take preventive measures
automatically to reduce the calls. Once the overload is released, the measures will
gradually be cancelled.
2)
BSC processor overloaded
The CPU of the BSC has a limited processing capability. When the traffic of the CPU
crosses a certain level, the CPU may halt and system may be down if no measures
are taken to reduce the traffic. The congestion and overload threshold can be set
through the OMC terminal. When the CPU occupation ratio exceeds the CPU overload
start threshold, the system is congested and it will generate alarms. When the CPU
occupation ratio is lower than the CPU overload threshold, the system is recovered to
the normal state and generates recovery reports. The start and end values of the
congestion are higher than the overload start and end values. The default values of
CPU congestion and overload threshold in M900/M1800 BSC are CPU overload start
1-22
Feature Description
value 90%. CPU overload end value 70%. CPU congestion start value 95%. CPU
congestion end value 80%.
3)
Radio interface overload
The basic strategy to control radio interface overload is to cut down the traffic on the
CCH until overload is released.
-AGCH overloaded
AGCH is a unidirectional downlink channel shared by all the mobiles in the cell. This
channel is used to setup the MS calls. If overload occurs on the AGCH, new calls can
not be accepted and MS will probably access, the adjacent cells and this will
consequently cause deterioration to the system.
After acknowledging the overload status, BSC will start the following preventive
measures:
z
All the affected paging messages of BTS will be discarded.
Notifying to the MSC about the overload messages and points out the cause:
CCCH overload and cell flag.
Phased reduction of service access.
-PCH overloaded
The Paging Channel (PCH) sends the messages to MS in downlink direction. BTS
monitors the load status of PCH. When the threshold is overstepped, BTS will notify
BSC, and BSC starts the following protection measures:
z
The paging message to the overload cells will be discarded.
Notifying to the MSC about the overload messages and points out the cause:
CCCH overload and cell flag.
-RACH overloaded
The Random Access Channel (RACH) is an uplink channel, designed to request
dedicated channels for MS. BTS monitors the load status of RACH. When the
threshold is overstepped, BTS will notify BSC of the overload message. Since the
RACH capacity is no bottleneck, no measures need to be taken.
4)
MSC overloaded
MSC might also undergo overload. In this case, it sends the overload message to BSC,
the reason being CPU overload. BSC will prohibit access by subscribers depending
on the actual situation and MSC will also reduce paging and external handover
(between MSCs).
1.6.3 Traffic statistics console

Traffic statistics is an important function of BSS, which measures and monitors the
whole system and helps to improve and stabilize the network.
1-23
Feature Description
The traffic statistics module receives the performance measurement tasks from the
OMC traffic statistics console and dispatches them in a unified way. It informs
corresponding module to start/stop measurement and collects the measurement
results to send to the OMC traffic statistics console.
The traffic statistics module routinely monitors the key resources of the system
including CPU, message queue, Abis interface receive/transmit queue, and CCB list. It
regularly monitors the traffic levels of cells and system flow levels to provide
appropriate controls over other application modules. In additionit monitors the radio
network quality, radio resource, connection, and handover quality.
1.6.4 Dynamic Data Configuration Management

Dynamic data configuration is also called online data configuration, that is,
modifications of system configuration data and system attribute data can be done
without resetting the BSC. This is very important for smooth expansion of the system
capacity and network planning & optimization. If a BSC is in operation and a user
wants to modify its data, reset of BSC means interruption of BSC and its BTS services.
Dynamic data configuration facilitates the implementation of data modification and
minimizes the impact on the current service.
I. Operation method
OMC data management console provides a dynamic data configuration mode. This
mode adopts wizard interface which realizes step by step dynamic data modification.
The system handles data validity, consistency, integrity, and tolerance check
automatically, which simplifies the process of dynamic data configuration and greatly
improves the efficiency and security of dynamic data configuration.
II. Functions
1)
Sites addition/removal: This function can add (or delete) the sites in various
networking modes, and even the cells, TRXs, and BTS boards. This function
does not affect other working sites and the circuit-based and packet-based
services that have been set up.
2)
Cells addition/removal: This function can add (or delete) the GSM900 and
GSM1800 cells, and even the TRXs and BTS boards. This function does not
affect other working cells or the circuit-based and packet-based services that
have been set up.
3)
TRXs addition/removal: This function can add (or delete) the GSM900 and
GSM1800 TRXs, and corresponding BTS boards. This function does not affect
other working TRXs or the circuit-based or packet-based services that have been
set up. It adds anti-collision mechanism to the fault handling function for BCCH
1-24
Feature Description
mutual-assistance and baseband hopping TRX to ensure that there is no

negative impact even if the TRXs are switched over.
4)
BTS boards addition/removal: This function can add (or delete) most boards at
the BTS side.
5)
Modification of cell system information: It is possible to modify the system

message to be sent to the cell. This function can modify TRX static power level,
saturation threshold and DC bias voltage threshold.
6)
Modification of handover parameters: After the modification, handover can be

performed based on the new parameters. This function does not affect the normal
working of the cell and the established circuit-based and packet based services.
7)
Modification of cell power control parameters: It has no effect on the

established circuit service and packet service. It is possible to optimize the
network by modifying the handover parameter and power control parameter to
improve the session quality.
8)
Configure the BIE data at site side: When adding/deleting the cascading sites,
as well as their cells and TRXs, it is used to modify the multi-point connection
data between the sites of upper and lower level.
9)
Modification of BS color code and network color code: This function does not
affect the normal working of other cells and the established circuit-based and
packet-based services.
10) Modification of cell state: Through this function a user can change the cell state
from equipped to unequipped state and vice versa. It is similar to the cell
addition/removal function except that the originally configured data does not need
to be configured. This function does not affect the normal working of other cells
and the established circuit-based and packet-based services.
11) Modification of cell attributes: It is possible to modify the thresholds of
interference band, saturation threshold and DC offset threshold. This will not
affect the normal working of this cell or the established circuit-based and
packet-based services.
12) Modification of cell alarm threshold: This function does not affect the normal
working of the cell and the established circuit-based and packet based services.
13) Modification of carrier frequencies: This function can modify the frequencies of
the GSM900 and GSM1800 TRXs. Modifying the TRX frequencies of non-active
BCCH of non-baseband hopping cell will not affect the calls already set up, but
will affects the packet-based service.
14) Modification of cell's frequency hopping attributes: The software of the BSC
supports timeslot hopping and can dynamically modify the hopping parameters of
various channels in the cell, including MA table, MAIO, TSC, and HSN. As for the
RF hopping cell, this function can modify the number of frequencies involved in
hopping. For the baseband hopping cell, the function can modify the frequency
values involved and change the cell from a hopping cell to non-hopping one and
1-25
Feature Description
vice versa. This function does not affect the normal working of other cells and the
established circuit-based and packet-based services.
15) Modification of TRX attributes: This function can modify the static power level,
saturation threshold and DC bias voltage threshold of the TRX. This function can
modify TRX static power level, saturation threshold and DC bias voltage
threshold.
16) Modification of channel types: It is possible to convert any non-BCCH into TCH,
SDCCH into PDCH. It has no effect on the established circuit service. If the
modification of channel type involves the PDCH before and afterwards, this will
affect the packet-based service.
17) Configuration of the antenna feeder uplink TTA and the power attenuation
factor: It is used to dynamically configure the antenna feeder uplink TTA and the
power attenuation factor.
18) Modify the encryption algorithm setting: It is used to dynamically modify the
encryption algorithm of the cell.
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
Configure the base band frequency hopping TRX switchover on failure.

Configure the cell BCCH cooperation.
Screen/de-screen BSC alarm.
Open/close EFR function. It is used to modify the voice version data.
Configure call control data. It is used to dynamically modify the call control
parameter of the cell.
24) Modify the cell broadcast DRX property. Dynamic modification to the DRX
property of a cell is supported.
25) Modify CGI. Dynamic modification to CGI is supported.
26) Modify the visibility of the BIE. The modification to the visibility of the BIE is
supported. The value range of visibility of BIE is Visible/Invisible. After BIE has
changed from "Invisible" to "Visible", it is possible to add more sites to the BIE.
27) Modify BSC interface Phase 1dentifier. The dynamic data configuration to the
BSC interface Phase 1dentifier is supported. BSC interface Phase 1dentifier
includes A interface Phase 1dentifier, Abis interface Phase 1dentifier and Um
interface Phase 1dentifier.
28) Configure cell's effective frequency. Adding/deleting the effective frequency
allocated to cells are supported.
29) Configure channel management data. It is used to modify the channel
management parameter of the cells.
30) Modify the visibility of GLAP. The modification to the visibility of GLAP is
supported. The value range of GLAP includes Visible/Invisible. After GLAP has
changed from "Invisible" to "Visible", it is possible to allocate more LAPD link on
GLAP.
31) Modify external cell description data.
1-26
Feature Description
III. Dynamic data configuration reliability

In addition to the reliability check mechanisms provided by the OMC the BTSM
provides such mechanisms as timed retransmission, added response, and alarming so
that data can be configured correctly and completely in the BTS. In case of BTS
maintenance link fault, the dynamic data configuration commands to the BTS can not
be sent, this will cause inconsistency between the data at the site and that in the BSC,
which will affect the working quality of the system. At this time, the BTSM will
periodically re-send dynamic data commands to the BTS and send alarms to the OMC
LMT can perform local maintenance on BSC, BTS or PCU, while the OMC and Telnet
terminal are mainly used to perform remote maintenance on the BSS. Huawei OMC
includes OMC-R and OMC-S, which manage respectively BSS and NSS. They can be
provided either separately or along with BSS and NSS. When Huawei BSS and NSS
are used at the same time, only a suite of OMC is required. OMC connects to BSS via
the LAN or WAN.
1.6.5 LMT
LMT is a desktop or portable PC providing local maintenance operations. The LMTs for
BSC, PCU and BTS are identical and run the WINDOWS 95 or WINDOWS 98. The
only difference is the application software for operation and maintenance. PCU runs
Telnet or the Hyper Terminal simulator program while the local maintenance program
on the BSC and BTS is the one with a graphic interface offered by Huawei.
1.6.6 OMC
I. Operational function
OMC conducts the operation & maintenance of the GSM network and effective
management of network capacity and coverage area expansion. For instance, a user
can expand the channel capacity and adjusts the initial coverage range based on the
actual needs.
OMC can optimize the utilization of the resources based on the network resources
data acquired and decide whether to carry out capacity expansion.
Network planning plays a pivotal role in the construction and development of the
network. Network planning tools interact with OMC to acquire the network resources
information via OMC, make analysis of these data, and revise the network plan. The
implementation of this revised plan or expansion can be implemented through OMC
easily.
1-27
Feature Description
A user can send commands and view the responses through WS. It involves network
configuration data management and network real-time feedback data management.
The former is the prerequisite for ensuring the normal operation of the network and the
latter contains some measurement results for network planning and optimization.
II. OMC platform

Huawei OMC includes OMC Sever and WS. OMC Server runs on Unix operating
system and the WS runs on Windows.
OMC Sever connects to the WS through LAN and the OMC system communicates
with BSS through LAN or WAN.
The capacity of OMC depends on the number of connected network elements, system
hardware and the number of connected subscribers. Both OMC Server and WS can
be upgraded based on the requirements.
1.6.7 Telnet terminal

A Telnet terminal is a command line terminal mainly used for the operation and
maintenance of PCU.
1-28
Feature Description
Chapter 2 BSS Functions

BSS is a bridge between MS and NSS, which performs mainly the management of radio
links and conversion of radio links and wire links. It is responsible for the communication
of MS. BSS system functions can be divided into basic functions, extended functions and
GPRS functions.
2.1 Basic Functions

2.1.1 Overview
Figure 2-1 illustrates the GSM Protocol.
MS
L3
L2
L1
MSC
BSC
BTS
CM
CM
MM
MM
RR
RR
RR
LAPDm
Sign.
Layer1
BTSM
BTSM
LAPDm LAPD
Sign.
Sign.
Layer1 Layer1
LAPD
Sign.
Layer1
Um
Abis
BSSMAP
B BSSMAP
SCCP
SCCP
MTP
MTP
MS: Mobile Station

BTS: Base Transceiver Station
BSC: Base Station Controller
RR: Radio Resource Management
MSC: Mobile services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre
MTP: Message Transfer Part (MTP)
SCCP: Signaling Connection Control Part
LAPD: Link Access Procedure on the D channel
MM: Mobility Management
LAPDm: Link Access Procedure on the Dm channel
CM: Connection Management
BSSMAP: Base Station Subsystem Management Application Part
BTSM: Base Transceiver Station Site Management
Figure 2-1 GSM protocol stack

According to GSM 04.07, the functions of BSS on layer 3 and related sub-layers on the
radio interface (Um) are classified into:
1)
2)
3)
RR: Radio Resource Management

CM: Communication Management
Where the functions on the MM and CM sub-layers are supported by the DTAP between
A- and Um interfaces. The functions of RR sub-layer that include the maintenance and
2-1
Feature Description
release of radio resources are mainly carried out by BSS. There are corresponding
communication management protocol for A interface and Abis interface to realize the air
interface between GSM network and MS. The other functions of BSS are also essential
for establishing communication between the GSM network and MS.
The functions (RR) that BSS involves are mainly as follows:
z
Radio channel management
Channel coding/decoding
Transcoding & Rate Adaptation
Full-rate & half-rate coding of speech and enhanced full-rate coding
Encryption/Decryption
Frequency hopping
Antenna Diversity
RF Power control and handover management
2.1.2 Channel
I. Types of Radio Channels
According to GSM/GPRS specifications, the radio channels fall into two major categories,
which are Traffic Channel and Control Channel. A traffic channel s further divided into
Speech Traffic Channel, Circuit Data Traffic Channel and Packet Data Traffic Channel,
while the Control Channel is subdivided into Broadcast Channel, Common Control
Channel and Dedicated Control Channel.
Logical
channel
CCH
TCH
DCCH
BCCH
CCCH
SDCCH
Downlink
SCH
FCCH
BCCH
(BCCH1) (BCCH2) (BCCH3)
PCH
ACCH
Uplink
AGCH
RACH
SACCH
FACCH
Downlink
Downlink/Uplink
Figure 2-2 GSM/GPRS channel classification

2-2
Feature Description
Figure 2-2 illustrates the logical channels. Below is the introduction.
II. Traffic Channel

1)
Speech traffic channels

In the latest GSM 05.02, the speech traffic channels are divided into:
TCH/FS: full rate traffic channel for speech.
TCH/HS: half rate traffic channel for speech.
TCH/EFS: enhanced full rate traffic channel for speech.
TCH/AFS: adaptive full rate traffic channel for speech.
TCH/AHS: adaptive half rate traffic channel for speech.
Huawei BSS currently supports two types of traffic channels for speech: TCH/FS and
TCH/EFS.
2)
Circuit data traffic channel

In the most updated GSM 05. 02, the circuit data traffic channels are divided into:
TCH/F9.6: full rate traffic channel for 9.6 kbit/s user data.
TCH/H4.8: half rate traffic channel for 4.8 kbit/s user data.
TCH/H2.4: half rate traffic channel for 2.4 kbit/s user data.
TCH/F14.4: full rate traffic channel for 14. 4 kbit/s user data.
E-TCH/F28.8: enhanced circuit switched full rate traffic channel for 28.8 kbit/s user
data.
data.
data.
Huawei BSS currently supports TCH/F14.4, TCH/F9.6, TCH/F4.8 and TCH/F2.4.
3)
Packet Data Traffic Channel
There are two rates for the PDTCH:

PDTCH: full-rate PDTCH. With GMSK modulation it can carry packet data whose
momentary rates are 0~22.8 kbit/s, while PDTCH with an 8PSK modulation system can
carry packet data whose momentary rates are 0~69.6 kbit/s.
PDTCH is a one-way channel and categorized by the direction as:
z
PDTCH/D: downlink PDTCH, for MS terminated packet transmission.
PDTCH/U: uplink PDTCH, for MS originated packet transmission.
2-3
Feature Description
III. Broadcast Channel (BCH)

BCH is used to transmit broadcast messages to the MS in down link direction. It includes
the following logical channels:
1)
FCCH (Frequency Correction Channel): This channel is responsible for

transferring the frequency correction signals to the MS so that the MS can be
adjusted to the corresponding frequency.
2)
SCH (Synchronization Channel): This channel is responsible for transmission of

the frame synchronization number (TDMA frame number) and the Base Station
Identity Code (BSIC) to the MS.
3)
BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel): This channel transmits the information

common to all cells, such as Location Area Identity (LAI), cell maximum allowable
output power, BCCH carrier frequency of the adjacent cells, and packet service
system parameters.
4)
PBCCH (Packet Broadcast Control Channel): This channel transfers the

messages related to packet services.
5)
Cell Broadcast Channel (CBCH): This channel is used for the cell broadcast short
message services. It uses the same physical channels as SDCCH.
The channels introduced above are downlink channels.
IV. Common Control Channel (CCCH)

CCCH are classified into the following four channels:
1)
Paging Channel (PCH): Downlink channel. MS tunes to and receives the

information from this channel to check for any call from MSC at regular intervals.
2)
Random Access Channel (RACH): Uplink channel, through which an MS accesses

the network and requests for allocating SDCCH.
3)
Access Grant Channel (AGCH): Through which the network notifies the MS about
the allocation of the dedicated channel.
4)
NCH (Notification Channel): Downlink channel used for Voice Group Call Service
(VGCS) and Voice Broadcast Service (VBS).
V. Packet Common Control Channel (PCCCH)

PCCH includes the following four channels:
1)
PPCH (Packet Paging Channel): Downlink packet paging channel. MS tunes to

the PPCH channel at a regular interval to check if there is any call from SGSN.
2)
PRACH (Packet Random Access Channel): Uplink packet random access

channel. MS requests to access the network via the PRACH channel.
3)
PAGCH (Packet Access Grant Channel): Downlink channel. The network notifies
the MS of the allocation of the packet data traffic channels via the PAGCH channel.
4)
PNCH (Packet Notification Channel): Downlink channel, designed for

point-to-multipoint multicast call.
2-4
Feature Description
Huawei BSS supports PPCH, PRACH and PAGCH.
VI. Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH)

DCCH consists of the following channels:
1)
SACCH (Slow Associated Control Channel): Associated with the SDCCH or

TCH. This channel is designed for MS to send received signal quality and signal
intensity of adjacent BTSs to the network, and meanwhile receives the system
information including transmission power, power adjustment and timing advance.
SACCH can be further divided into:

z
SACCH/TF: SACCH associated with TCH/F.
SACCH/TH: SACCH associated with TCH/H.
SACCH/C8: SACCH associated with SDCCH/8.
SACCH/C4: SACCH associated with SDCCH/4.
SACCH/M: SACCH associated with TCH/F for multi-TS configuration.
2)
FACCH (Fast Associated Control Channel): FACCH implements transmission

by occupying a part on TCH, mostly for transmitting handover command.
FACCH can be further divided into:

z
FACCH/F: FACCH associated with TCH/F;
FACCH/H: FACCH associated with TCH/H.
3)
SDCCH (Standalone Dedicated Control Channel): it serves to transmit the

signaling such as short message information, location updating information, etc.
between the MS and the network, prior to the call setup.
SDCCH/8SDCCH/8
SDCCH/4SDCCH/4
VII. Packet Dedicated Control Channel

1)
PACCH (Packet Associated Control Channel): Downlink channel serving to

transmit the signaling, including response messages and power control messages,
to the MS. PACCH can also transmit the resources allocation and re-allocation
messages. PACCH shares the resource with the PDTCH currently allocated to MS.
When MS is in transmission mode, SGSN can page the MS via PACCH to initiate
CS service.
2)
PTCCH/U (Packet Timing Advance Control Channel Uplink): PTCCH/U sends

the timing advance by way of random access burst when the MS operates in a
transmission mode.
3)
PTCCH/D (Packet Timing Advance Control Channel Downlink): PTCCH/D is

designed to send transmission timing advance to several MSs. One PTCCH/D
corresponds to several PTCCH/Us.
2-5
Feature Description
VIII. Radio channel management

Radio channel management involves the management of diverse radio channels in the
GSM/GPRS. This process occurs in the phase of connection setup, maintenance,
modification and release.
IX. Radio channel combination

As per the logical channel types as listed above, a user can configure the following
channel combinations in the M900/M1800 BSS.
z
TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/TF
SDCCH/8+SACCH/C8
FCCH+SCCH+BCCH+CCCH
FCCH+SCCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4+SACCH/C4
BCCH+CCCH
BCCH+CBCH
SDCCH+CBCH
PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
X. Traffic channel management

BSS is in charge of all the configured traffic channels. When a call is established, MSC
sends the channel type, channel code and other parameters regarding the call to BSS,
which chooses a traffic channel based on the messages. BSS also assumes the task for
the measurement and release of these traffic channels.
XI. Dedicated control channel management

BSS manages all the available dedicated control channels. After MS has sends a
random access request via RACH or PRACH, BSS will allocate a DCCH for the MS.
Besides, BSS is also responsible for monitoring and releasing the link of DCCH.
XII. Broadcast channel and common control channel management

The management of the available broadcast channels and common control channels by
the BSS involves DRX management, paging message dispatching, AGCH and PAGCH
control, RACH and PRACH control, and BCCH message broadcast.
XIII. Terrestrial channel management

The management of terrestrial channels between BSS and MSC is to keep the terrestrial
circuit states at BSS and MSC consistent so that an idle circuit can be available when
2-6
Feature Description
MSC makes a call (assign circuit) and when MS performs handover (assign terrestrial
circuit). This is to ensure the success for the call and the handover.
Procedures included in the A-interface circuit resource management are Circuit
Block/Unblock, Circuit Group Block/Unblock, Unequipped Circuit, and Reset Circuit.
General principles of the circuit control includes:
z
Circuit management message is normally initiated by BSC. While resetting circuit

can be initiated either by MSC or BSC,
MSC can only block or unblock its circuits without affecting the circuits at the BSS
side.
The BSS can not change the circuit state that has been changed at the local end of
the MSC. For circuits blocked on the maintenance console at MSC side, the BSS
has no authority to unblock or reset the circuit.
XIV. Channel Coding & Decoding

The messages are encoded/decoded before being transmitted on the radio channel to
avoid radio channel interference. There are various coding and interleaving methods for
different logical channels (speech, data and signaling). For a detailed description of the
coding methods for various channels, please refer to the specifications GSM 05. 03.
XV. Transcoding & Rate Adaptation

Transcoding (TC) and Rate Adaptation provides an interface between the standard 64
kbit/s transmission at NSS side and the lower rate transmission at BSS side.
The conventional voice-coding mode is PCM with a rate of 64 kbit/s. It is widely applied
to PSTN. Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) is used for normal speech in PLMN, at a rate of
64 kbit/s whereas in GSM, RPE-LTP or CELP coding with much lower rate (16 kbit/s) is
used due to the limitation of radio channel resources. To further improve the voice quality,
EFR (Enhanced Full Rate) is introduced. To implement EFR, newly designed algorithms
are used but it does not affect the coding rate on the Um interface. When adopting EFR,
the compression algorithm for the MS and Transcoder & Rate Adaptor Unit (TRAU) must
be modified.
Generally, 3.6 kbit/s and 6 kbit/s data rates on the Um interface are arranged for the 8
kbit/s or 16 kbit/s channel (for transmission either on the full-rate channel or the half-rate
channel), while the 12 kbit/s rate is for the 16 kbit/s channel.
If a PSTN subscriber wants to call an MS, rate adaptation must be performed for the
voice. The TRAU is introduced to complete this function. When the BTS and the TRAU
are physically detached, these conversions will be especially important. A detailed
description of the conversions on the interfaces is given in the related GSM
specifications.
2-7
Feature Description
Since the rate of each channel of existing terrestrial lines is 64 kbit/s, it is a waste if one
channel is used to carry one 16 kbit/s GSM channel. To save terrestrial line resources,
sub-multiplexer (SMUX) is used between MSC and BSC to multiplex 4 % 16 kbit/s
channels to transmit four speech channels over one terrestrial channel.
In general, TRAU and SMUX are integrated in one unit called TCSM, i. e., it handles both
rate conversion and multiplexing.
Table 2-1 introduces the full-rate coding/decoding process and enhanced full-rate
coding/decoding process.
Table 2-1 Voice coding comparison
FR (Full Rate)
Algorithm
Coding
Process
Decoding
Process
EFR (Enhanced Full Rate)
RPE-LTP algorithm (regular impulse

excitation-long term prediction)
TRAU converts the voice signal received from
MSC into frames in the format of 20 ms/fr. A
frame of voice data contains 160 PCM sampling
points, making up 1280 bit. The output
parameters after encoding are 260 bit, making up
the 320 bit TRAU frame together with the
synchronous header and control parameter.
Decoding is a reverse process of coding. After
TRAU receives the TRAU frames sent from the
BSC, it restores them into speech data by
applying decoding algorithm before sending them
to MSC.
ACELP algorithm (arithmetic code book excitation

linear prediction)
TRAU converts the voice signal received from MSC
into frames in the format of 20 ms/fr. A frame of voice
data contains 160 PCM sampling points, making up
1280 bit. The output parameters after encoding are
244 bit, making up the 320 bit TRAU frame together
with the synchronous header and control parameter.
Decoding is a reverse process of coding. After TRAU
receives the TRAU frames sent from the BSC, it
restores them into speech data by applying decoding
algorithm before sending them to MSC.
In the occasion of MS-MS session, the TRAU coding / encoding can be omitted. As the
coding / encoding process will degrade the voice quality, it is possible to improve the
voice quality by removing TRAU coding/decoding with Tandem Free Operation (TFO).
TFO is implemented by FTC via in-band signaling to reduce the primary coding/decoding
during MS-MS session and improve the voice quality.
To set up TFO status, the following should be realized: Both parties of the session should
subscribe to the same service (i.e. both to FR or EFR service). The FTCs seized by the
two MSs should support TFO function. There should be no other equipment that is
capable of changing the PCM signal on the PCM link between the FTCs of the MSs, i.e.,
it should be a direct link, because TFO message and frame are transmitted with the low
bit of the PCM sampling value. If these conditions are not satisfied, FTC will perform the
normal coding/decoding.
TFO features:
Realized in the occasion of MS-MS session;
TFO can improve the voice quality of both FR and EFR, especially the former with the
MOS can be improved by 0.5 points (totally 5 points).
2-8
Feature Description
2.1.3 System Information

I. Overview
System information contains the major wireless network parameter on the air interface,
including network identifier parameter, cell selection parameter, system control
parameter and network function parameter. By receiving system information, MS can be
properly accessed and perform network selection so that it can make full use of the
services and cooperate with network.
There are two modes for the transmission of system information: broadcast message
and channel associated message.
In idle mode, MS communicates with the network via the broadcasting of system
information. The network sends system information to MS so that MS knows its current
position and the service type available. Some parameters can also control the cell
reselection of MS.
When MS is establishing calls, the communication between network equipment is
realized with the channel associated system information. Network equipment sends
some contents in the channel-associated message to MS so as to control the behaviors
such as transmission, power control and handover of MS.
The broadcast system information is closely related to the channel-associated message.
The content in the broadcast system information can overlap with that in the channel
associated message. While the content in the channel associated message can be
inconsistent with that in the broadcast system information, because the channel
associated message has the effect on only one MS, while the broadcast system
information affects all MSs in idle mode.
II. Types and content of system information

There are totally 13 types: 1, 2, 2bis, 2ter, 3, 4, 5, 5bis, 5ter, 6, 7, 8 and 9. Among them, 1,
2, 2bis, 2ter, 3, 4, 7, 8 and 9 are broadcast information transmitted via BCCH under idle
mode; 5, 5bis, 5ter and 6 are channel associated information transmitted via SACCH in
active mode.
Type 1: Cell channel description + RACH control information (optional)
Cell channel description: all frequencies used by this cell, including BCCH frequencies
and FH frequency to provide the frequency reference for MS Frequency Hopping (FH).
RACH control information: parameters such as maximum times of retransmission (MAX
RETRANS), number of transmission timeslots (TX Integer), Cell Bar Access, bit allowed
for call reestablishment (RE), bit allowed for emergency call (EC) and access restricted
2-9
Feature Description
user level (AC). These parameters are used to control the behavior of MS in the initial
access.
Type 2: Adjacent cell BCCH frequency description + Network color code allowed +
RACH control information (mandatory)
Adjacent cell BCCH frequency description: the BCCH frequency used by the adjacent
cell.
Network color code allowed: NCC allowed for the MS test on the BCCH carrier in the cell.
Type 2bis: Adjacent extended cell BCCH frequencies description + RACH control
information (optional)
Extended adjacent cell BCCH frequency description: the number of frequencies
described in the frequency allocation table in system information type 2 is limited,
therefore system information type 2bis contains the information of other frequencies in
BA1 which are in the same frequency segment as system information type 2.
RACH control information: contains the maximum times of parameter retransmission
(MAX RETRANS), number of retransmission timeslot (TX Integer), Cell Bar Access, bit
allowed for call reestablishment (RE), Restricted user level, bit allowed for emergency
call (EC) to control the MS behavior during initial access.
Type 2ter: Attached multi-frequency information + extended cell BCCH frequency
description 2 (optional)
Attached multi-frequency information: Number of the multi-frame measurement needed.
Extended adjacent cell BCCH frequency description 2: describes the extended
frequency allocation table of the adjacent cell (part of BA1 table). The frequency
contained in this information is located at the different frequency segment as the current
cell. Therefore, only the multiband MS can read this information. The single-band GSM
900 of GSM 1800 MS will skip this information.
Type 3:Cell ID + LAI + control channel description + cell option + cell selection parameter
+ RACH control information (mandatory)
Cell ID: identifier of the current cell.
LAI: location area identifier of the current cell.
Control channel description: contains the MS attach/detach allowed indication (ATT,
Attach-Detach Allowed), number of blocks reserved for AGCH (BS AG BLKS RES),
common control channel configuration (CCCH CONF), number of 51 TDMA multi-frames
reserved for the same paging group in the paging information (BA PA MFRMS) and the
interval of periodic location update.
Cell option: includes the power control indication (PWRC), discontinuous transmission
(DTX) and radio link timeout value (Radio Link Timeout).
2-10
Feature Description
Cell selection parameter: includes the cell reselection hysteresis value, maximum Tx
power level allowed for MS access to the cell (MS TXPWR MAX CCH) and minimum
access level allowed for MS to access system (RXLEV Access MIN).
System information type 3 rest bytes: cell reselection parameter information and type 3
MS control information.
Type 4: LAI + cell selection parameter + RACH control information + CBCH description +
CBCH dynamic allocation information (mandatory)
LAI: the location area identifier of the current cell.
Cell selection parameter: includes the cell reselection hysteresis value, maximum Tx
power level allowed for MS access to the cell (MS TXPWR MAX CCH) and minimum
access level allowed for MS to access system (RxLEV Access MIN).
CBCH description: includes the channel type and TDMA offset (which type of dedicated
channel combination), timeslot No. (TN), training sequence code (TSC), FH channel
indication (H), mobile allocation index offset (MAIO), FH serial No. (HSN) and absolute
RF channel No. (ARFCN).
CBCH mobile allocation information: the relation between the sequence of frequencies
used for FH and cell channel description.
System information types 4 rest bytes: cell reselection parameter.
Type 5: Adjacent cell BCCH frequency description (mandatory)
Adjacent cell BCCH frequency description: the BCCH frequency used by the adjacent
cell. Comparing with system information type 2, the difference is that MS can get the
frequencies described in system information type 5 in active mode, and report the related
information of the adjacent cell in the measurement report as the reference of handover.
Similarly, the GSM900 MS in Phase 1 recognizes only the adjacent cell frequencies
described in system information type 5 and ignore those contained in 5bis and 5ter.
Type 5bis: Extended adjacent cell BCCH frequency description (optional)
Extended adjacent cell BCCH frequency description: the number of frequencies
described in the frequency allocation table in system information type 5 is limited,
2-11
Feature Description
therefore system information 5bis contains the information of other frequencies in BA2
which are in the same frequency segment as system information 5.
Type 5ter: Attached multi-frequency information + extended cell BCCH frequency
description 2 (optional)
Attached multi-frequency information: Number of the multi-frame measurement needed.
Extended adjacent cell BCCH frequency description 2: describes the extended
frequency allocation table of the adjacent cell (part of BA2 table). The frequency
contained in this information is located at the different frequency segment as the current
cell. Therefore, only the multiband MS can read this information. The single-band GSM
900 of GSM 1800 MS will skip this information.
Type 6: Cell ID + LAI + cell option (mandatory)
Cell ID: identifier of the current cell.
LAI: the location area identifier of the current cell.
Cell option: includes the power control indication (PWRC), discontinuous transmission
(DTX) and radio link timeout value (Radio Link Timeout).
Type 7: Cell reselection parameter
Cell reselection parameter: includes cell reselection indication (PI), Cell Bar Qualify
(CBQ), Cell Reselect Offset (CRO), Temporary Offset (TO) and Penalty Time (PT).
Type 8: Cell reselection parameter
Cell reselection parameter: includes cell reselection indication (PI), Cell Bar Qualify
(CBQ), Cell Reselect Offset (CRO), Temporary Offset (TO) and Penalty Time (PT).
Type 9: RACH control information + broadcast channel parameter
(MAX RETRANS), number of retransmission timeslot (Tx Integer), Cell Bar Access, bit
Broadcast channel parameter
III. Meaning and function of wireless network parameter

1)
Network identification parameters
Network identification parameters include CGI and BSIC.

CGI consists of LAI and CI. LAI is composed of MCC, MNC and LAC. System
information type 3,4 and 6 include all or part of CGI information. MS decodes the system
information to get the CGI. MS decides whether to connect to the network in this cell
2-12
Feature Description
according to the MCC and MNC indicated by CGI. It is also used to check whether the
current location area has changed so as to initialize the location updating process.
MCC, consisting of three decimal digits, is allocated worldwide in unified way. MNC,
consisting of two decimal digits, is allocated by the country in unified way. LAC and CI,
both consisting of 2 bytes, are arranged by GSM carrier in unified way. Note that the
value range of CI is 0X0001~0XFFFE, while 0X0000 and 0XFFFF are reserved.
BSIC identifies the local color code of each BTS in the GSM system. In GSM system,
frequencies are multiplexed to different extents according to the different requirements in
network plan. MS differentiates two cells' same frequency with their BSICs. Therefore, it
is necessary to guarantee the uniqueness of BSICs of the cells using the same BCCH
carrier frequency.
BSIC is transmitted on the SCH of each cell. It consists of NCC (3 bits) and BCC (3 bits).
Note that the TSC described in system information type 4 is the BCC of the current cell.
2)
System control parameter
System control parameter is transmitted to MS with system information via air interface
by BTS. It serves to keep contact between MS and BTS. Besides, these parameters
have the direct effect on the service bearing and signaling flow of various part of system.
Therefore, reasonable setting of these parameters is important in maintaining of the
normal operation of GSM system.
IMSI attach and detach allowed (ATT) is used to notify MS whether the local cell allows
IMSI attach/detach process. It is transmitted in control channel description in the system
information type 3. ATT has 1 bit. "0" stands for IMSI attach/detach process not allowed,
and "1" stands for the process allowed.
CCCH CONF decides the integration mode of the CCCH in the cell. It is transmitted in
the control channel description in the system information type 3. CCCH CONF is a 3 bit
code. For details, see Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 CCCH code meaning
CCCH
CONF
000
001
010
100
110
Others
Meaning
CCCH uses a basic physical channel which is not shared with SDCCH.
CCCH uses a basic physical channel which is shared with SDCCH.
CCCH uses two basic physical channels which are not shared with SDCCH.
CCCH uses three basic physical channels which are not shared with
SDCCH.
CCCH uses four basic physical channels which are not shared with SDCCH.
Reserved
2-13
Number of CCCH
information blocks in
BCCH multiframe
9
3
18
27
36
Feature Description
Note:
The CCCH CONF setting of a cell should be in line with the actual setting of the cell's CCCH. It is decided by
the traffic module of the cell.
BS AG BLKS RES is transmitted in the control channel of system information type 3. It is

used together with CCCH CONF to decide the number of information blocks in each
BCCH of the current cell. After setting CCCH CONF, BS AG BLKS RES will be used to
arrange the occupancy ratio between AGCH and PCH on CCCH. It is possible to adjust
this parameter to achieve the bearing balance between AGCH and PCH.
BS PA MFRAMS is transmitted in the control channel description in system information
type 3. It decides how many multiframes making up a cycle of a page sub-channel. This
parameter actually decides how many sub-channels the PCH of a cell will be deviled into.
BS PA MFRAMS is a 3 bit code. The value range is 0~7, respectively meaning that the
number of multi-frame of a paging group cycled on the PCH is 2~9.
Periodic location updating timer (T3212) decides the frequency of periodic location
updating. It is transmitted in the control channel description in system information type 3.
It is an 8-bit code. The value range is 0~255, each unit of which is the duration of six
minutes, and 0 means no location updating.
Cell Channel Description, transmitted in system information type 1, describes the RF
channel No. of the local cell. It is used in frequency hopping. Note that the maximum
number of channels configured in cell channel description is 64.
Neighbor Cells Discretion, transmitted in system information type 2, 2bis, 2ter, 5, 5bis
and 5ter, describes the absolute channel No. of the BCCH TRX of the cell adjacent to the
current cell. Huawei BSS supports at most 32 adjacent cells.
Extension Indication, transmitted in system information type 2 and 5, indicates whether
there are still extended adjacent cells to be transmitted in system information type 2bis
and 5bis. It is a 1-bit code. "0" means that system information type 2 and 5 contains the
complete BA table, and "1" means that type 2 and 5 contains part of BA table.
BA Indication transmitted in system information type 2 and 5. It is a 1-bit code, used for
MS to select the data in BA 2 before or after modification. In another word, if the adjacent
cell relation of the current cell and the BA2 table is changed during a session, the BA
Indication in system information type 5 will be 1 instead of stead of 0. This indicate that
MS perform decoding in the adjacent cell indicated in the system information type 5
again.
Multiband Reporting (MBR), transmitted in system information type 2ter and 5ter. It is a
2-bit code, indicating MS to report adjacent cell information on multiple frequency bands.
It is applicable to multiband MS only. The details are listed below.
2-14
Feature Description
2.1.4 Idle Mode Behavior

I. Overview
A powered on mobile station (MS) that does not have a dedicated channel allocated is
defined as being in idle mode. The purpose of the tasks performed in the idle mode is to
be able to access the system and be reached by the system from any location in the
network.
When a mobile is powered on, it immediately attempts to make contact with a GSM
Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN). The particular PLMN contacted may be selected
either automatically or manually. The MS will look for and select a suitable cell of the
chosen PLMN. It will then tune to the control channel of the cell to receive information
about the available services provided by the PLMN. This selecting is known as
camping on a cell. When an MS is in idle mode it will always try to camp on the best cell
according to a signal level based criterion.
The idle mode behavior is managed by the MS. It can be controlled by parameters which
the MS receives from the base station on the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH). All the
main controlling parameters for idle mode behavior are transmitted on the BCCH carrier
in each cell. When the MS is powered on but neither making nor receiving any calls (idle
mode) there has to be a mechanism that always selects the best cell on which to camp.
Moreover, to be able to access the system from anywhere in the network, regardless of
where the MS was powered off, it has to be able to select a specific GSM base station,
tune to its frequency and listen to the system message informations transmitted in that
cell. It must also be able to register its current location to the network so that the network
knows where to route incoming calls. The PLMN selection mechanism, the cell selection
and reselection algorithms in addition to the location updating procedure are the core of
the idle mode behavior. The purpose is to always ensure that the mobile is camped on
the cell where it has the highest probability of successful communication.
II. Usage
1)
High signal level when accessing the system
The MS will at all times try to obtain the highest possible signal level when accessing the
system. This is achieved by means of the idle mode cell selection and reselection
algorithms. These algorithms will enable the MS to choose the most suitable cell to camp
on, based on signal level. A cell is suitable if certain criteria are satisfied. Camping on the
most suitable cell provides the MS with a high probability of good communication with the
system.
The cell selection and reselection algorithms are governed by parameter settings. Using
these parameters an operator can, on a per cell basis, make a specific cell more or less
attractive to camp on for the MS. This makes it possible for the operator to achieve
2-15
Feature Description
similar behavior for MSs in idle mode as in active mode. Well-designed parameter
settings for cell selection and reselection in idle mode, will make the MS to camp on the
cell that would have been chosen if the MS had been in active mode.
2)
Control of the paging load
In idle mode the MS will notify the network whenever it changes location area by the
location updating procedure. Thus, the network will be kept updated concerning which
location area the MS is presently in. When the system receives an incoming call it knows
in which location area it should page the MS, and does not need to page it throughout the
whole MSC service area. This reduces the load on the system. If the MS does not
respond to the first paging information, then the network can send a second paging
information.
The MS can also, periodically and when powered on or off, notify the network of its
present status by the location updating procedure. This prevents the network from doing
unnecessary paging of MSs that have been powered off or left the coverage area. This
would otherwise cause unnecessary load on the system.
3)
Low idle mode power consumption
In idle mode, the MS only occasionally monitors the system information being
transmitted in the current cell or does measurements on neighboring cells to see if a cell
change should be initiated.
However, most of the time it will be in sleep mode. Hence, the power consumption
during idle mode will be low. This is also referred to as discontinuous reception (DRX).
III. Technical description

While the MS is in idle mode it will continuously make measurements on the
BCCH-carriers of serving and neighboring cells to decide on which cell to camp on. It will
also, if necessary, register its presence in the location area of the chosen cell by
performing a location updating.
The purpose of camping on a cell is threefold:
1)
2)
It enables the MS to receive system information from the PLMN

The MS can initiate a call by accessing the network on the Random Access
Channel (RACH) of the cell on which it is camped,
3)
The PLMN will know the location area of the cell in which the MS is camped (unless
the MS has entered a limited service state) and can therefore page the MS when an
incoming call is received.
The idle mode task can be subdivided into four processes:

z
PLMN selection
Cell selection
Cell reselection
Location updating.
2-16
Feature Description
The relationship between these processes is illustrated in Figure 2-3.

Automatic/Manual
Mode Selection
User Selection
of PLMN
Indication to User
Service
indication
to User
PLMN Selection
PLMN
Selection
PLMN
Available
Cell Selection
New
Location
Area
Initial Cell Selected

Cell Reselectin
Cell & Location

Area Changes
Periodic
Registration
Location Updating
Responses
Location Updating
Figure 2-3 Overall idle mode processes
2.1.5 PLMN Selection

I. Overview
The MS will select a PLMN when it is powered on or upon recovery from a lack of
coverage. It will first try to select and register on the registered PLMN if one exists. If
registration on a PLMN is successful, the MS indicates this PLMN (the registered
PLMN) and is capable of making and receiving calls on it. If there is no registered PLMN,
or if the registered PLMN is unavailable, the MS will try to select another PLMN either
automatically or manually depending on its operating mode, The MS normally operates
on its home PLMN. However, another PLMN may be selected if, for example, the MS
loses coverage. The MS will register on a PLMN if the MS finds a suitable cell to camp on
and if a location-updating request is accepted. Registration has to be successful in order
for the MS to be able to access that network.
However, it does not need to perform location updating if it is in the same location area
belonging to the same PLMN as it was before it entered the inactive state.
2-17
Feature Description
The MS can select and register on another PLMN of its home country than its home
PLMN if national roaming or international roaming is permitted. However, the MS will
then do periodical attempts to return to its home PLMN. This is controlled by a timer. The
interval between attempts is stored in the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM). Only the
service provider is able to set the timer value for return to home PLMN.
There are two modes for PLMN selection; automatic and manual. The automatic mode
utilizes a list of PLMNs in an order of priority whereas the manual mode leaves the
decision to the user and only indicates which PLMNs that are available.
II. Automatic mode

In automatic mode, the MS will select PLMN if available and allowable, in the following
order if no registered PLMN exists or is available:
Home PLMN
1)
Each PLMN that has been stored in the Subscriber Identity
Module (SIM) in priority order

2)
3)
Other PLMNs with received signal level above -85 dBm in random order
All other PLMNs in order of decreasing signal level.
III. Manual mode

In manual mode, the MS will first try to select the registered PLMN or home PLMN (if no
registered PLMN exist). If this registration fails or if the user has initiated a PLMN
reselection the MS will indicate to the user all available PLMNs. The user can then select
a desired PLMN which causes the MS to initiate a registration on this PLMN. If the
selected PLMN is not allowable, an indication to the user to select another PLMN will be
made.
The user can at any time request the MS to initiate reselection and registration onto an
alternative available PLMN. This is done either using automatic or manual mode,
depending on the mode selected by the user.
2.1.6 Cell Selection and Reselection

I. Overview
The purpose of cell selection and reselection is to enable MS to find a most suitable cell
on which MS can reliably decipher the downlink data and maintain a high communication
rate on uplink (so as to realize various telecom services). Once MS has selected a cell as
its serving cell, its communication with the network becomes possible on this cell.
2-18
Feature Description
MS will tune to the BCCH to receive the paging message and the system information
broadcast on BCCH and use the RACH to send access request after it has selected this
cell.
MS implements cell reselection according to the message in BA table in the system
broadcast information from the serving cell. There are two BA tables in GSM network.
One is transmitted in the system information via BCCH. It includes the BCCH carrier
used in a certain physical area for the MS in idle mode to implement cell selection and
reselection. The other one is transmitted in the system information via SACCH. It is used
to indicate the MS in active mode about the BCCH carrier for handover monitoring.
In active mode, MS obtains the information of adjacent cell BCCH frequency through BA
(BCCH). The process will not stop until MS receives the first BA (SACCH) information.
II. Cell selection procedure

When MS is powered on and move from blind spot of coverage to the serving area, it will
search for all available frequencies in the PLMN and select the suitable cell to camp on.
This is the procedure of "cell selection".
Cell selection procedure in the case of no BCCH information in MS
MS first searches the 124 RF channels of GSM 900(if the MS is a multiband one, MS
searches 374 GSM 1800 RF channels), and compares the signal level on the channels
to calculate the average level. The entire measurement procedure lasts 3~5 s, during
which, at least five sampling points will be extracted from different RF channels.
After MS has tuned to the maximum carriers of the receiving level, it will first judge which
one is the BCCH carrier (by searching FCCH burst). If so, MS will attempt to decode
SCH to obtain the BCCH system broadcast information synchronous with this carrier. If
the MS can properly decode BCCH data, and make sure that this cell belongs to the
selected PLMN, parameter C1>0, and this cell has no access barring, MS can camp on
this cell. Otherwise, MS will keep tuning to the next highest carriers until it reaches the
available cell.
If no suitable cells are found after searching 30 RF channels with the highest level, MS
will monitor the level of all channels and search for the BCCH of C>0 and no access
barring. After finding this carrier, MS will camp on this cell without considering its PLMN
ID. In this occasion, only emergency call can be implemented.
Case 1: If the access level of the MS is barred at the cell, the cell selection algorithm will
not be affected, i. e., when the cell satisfies the criterion, MS will still camp on it.
Case 2: If the cell selected by MS belongs to PLMN, but access is barred (parameter
CBA is set as "bar") or algorithm C1<0, MS will use the BA table obtained from this cell to
search for these BCCH carriers.
2-19
Feature Description
Cell selection procedure in the case of BCCH information already stored in MS

If the BCCH carrier information has been stored in MS during the last powering off, MS
will first search the stored BCCH carrier. If MS can decode the BCCH data of the cell, but
cannot camp on it. MS will check the BA table of this cell. If no suitable cells found after all
BCCH carriers have been searched, the previous procedure will be implemented.
C1 is the path loss criterion as the reference of cell selection and reselection. C1 of the
serving cell should be larger than 0. The formula is as follows:
C1 = RxLEV RxLEV _ Access _ MIN MAX ((MS _ TxPWR _ MAX _ CCH P ),0 )
See Table 2-3 for formula explanation.

Table 2-3 Name of powers
Name
RxLEV
RxLEV Access MIN
MS TxPWR MAX CCH
P
Meaning (Unit d Bm)

Average level MS received
Maximum receiving level allowed for MS to access
Maximum transmitting power level allowed for MS to access the system
Maximum output power of MS
C1 algorithm is used during cell selection procedure, as shown in Figure 2-4.
Cell1
Cell2
C1=15
C1=8
Figure 2-4 Cell selection

MS select the suitable cell to camp on according to the priority and C1. The selected cell
is the main serving cell Figure 2-4, MS will select Cell 1 as the main serving cell to if the
priorities are the same.
III. Cell reselection procedure

After MS has selected a serving cell, it will camp on this selected cell and continue the
monitoring on all BCCH carriers configured in the adjacent cell frequency configuration
table indicated in the BCCH system information of the serving cell if the conditions are
not changed greatly.
2-20
Feature Description
When monitoring these BCCH carriers, the measurement of their receiving level should
base on at least the average of 5 sampling points, and the number of measured
sampling points extracted from all BCCHs should be the same. The sampling points
allocated to each carrier should be as even as possible in each measurement period.
The six strongest BCCH carriers should be refreshed at least once per minute.
To lower the power consumption of MS, MS should measure the receiving level of each
carrier in BA table when performing decoding page group. It is possible to obtain some
BCCH frequencies and sample values of receiving level on the BCCH frequency of the
serving cell during the appearance of MS page group.
The MS routine measurement program also includes the measurement of the BCCH
carrier of the current serving cell. MS should attempt to decode all system informations
broadcast on BCCH of the serving cell at least every 30 s. MS should implement
decoding of BCCH data block to the BCCH carriers of the six strongest non-serving cells
at least every 5 min. This data block contains the parameter concerning cell reselection.
After MS has found a new BCCH carrier as one of the strongest carriers, it will decode
the BCCH data of the new carrier within at least 30 sums. MS should check the BSIC of
one of the six strongest carriers within at least 30s to verify that the monitored objective is
the same cell. If BSIC is changed, MS will regard the carrier as a new one, and decode
the BCCH data again. During the process above, MS tries not to interrupt the monitoring
to PCH.
Under the following occasions, the procedure of cell reselection will be initiated. (If C2
algorithm has not been activated, C2 = C1).
MS finds that the C2 value of a cell (in the same location area as the serving cell) has
been larger than that of the serving cell for 5 seconds.
MS finds that the C1 value of a cell (not in the current location area) has been larger than
the sum of the C2 value of the serving cell and the cell selection hysteresis for five
seconds.
The current cell barred.
MS finds the downlink failure: the criterion of downlink signaling failure is based on the
downlink signaling failure counter DSC. If MS has selected a cell, DSC is set as [90/BS
PA MFRMS] round number. BS PA MFRMS is the number of multiframes of the 51 TDMA
frame for the BTS transmission paging information for the MSs of the same paging level.
Therefore, when MS is decoding on the PCH, if succeeded, add 1 to DSC; if failed,
subtract 4 from DSC. When DSC = 0, there is downlink signaling failure.
The value of C1 has been smaller than 0 for 5 s.
During random access, MS fails to register at the retry after maximum retransmission.
Note that after MS reselection and camping on the cell, MS should decode all of the
BCCH data of the new cell to check whether the parameter concerning cell reselection
2-21
Feature Description
has changed. If it is changed, MS will decide whether this change satisfies the criterion of
cell reselection. If the criterion is satisfied, MS will camp on this cell. If MS finds that LAI
has changed, it will initialize location updating.
C2 algorithm is used in cell reselection, as shown in Figure 2-5
Cell1
Cell2
C2=4
C2=18
Figure 2-5 Cell Reselection

MS selects the cell to camp on according to the priority and C1 value. The camped-on
cell becomes the main serving cell. See Figure 2-5. With the same priority, MS will select
Cell 2 as the main serving cell if reselection hysteresis and the reselection time are both
satisfied.
IV. The impact of the network to the MS in idle mode

Network side is responsible for completing system informations broadcast and paging
task for idle MSs in downlink.
System information type 2~4 and the optional type 1, 2bis, 7 and 8 are broadcast
periodically from the network via BCCH. The MSs in idle mode decides whether and how
to access the network according to these information.
MS of GSM 900 supports the band of GSM 900 only. It regards the EXT IND bit
described in adjacent cell in system information type 2 as the standby bit. If the
information sent from the multiband network is received, MS will regard that the
information unit in system information type 2 contains the complete BA table and will
ignore the system information type 2bis.
V. Definition of discontinuous receiving mode (DRX) and PCH

If MS in idle mode has selected its serving cell, it is ready to monitor the paging
information from this cell. To lower the power consumption of MS, the GSM specification
adopts the discontinuous receiving mechanism, i. e., each subscriber (IMSI)
corresponds to a dedicated paging group. Each group corresponds to a paging
sub-channel of the cell. MS recognizes its paging group and the corresponding paging
sub-channel according to the last three digits of the IMSI. MS in idle mode uses its own
2-22
Feature Description
paging sub-channel to receive the paging information (or to monitor the receiving level of
the BCCH carrier of the non-serving cell). MS ignores the information from other paging
sub-channel or even shuts down the power of some hardware to lower its power
consumption during the broadcasting of other paging sub-channels. But MS must
measure the network information task periodically.
The number of the paging sub-channels can be calculated according to the configuration
type and BS AG BLKS RES (how many AGCH blocks for 51 multiframes), BS PA
MFRMS (how many 51 multiframes to make up a cycle of the paging sub-channel).
Common Control Channel (CCCH) includes AGCH and PCH. It is used to transmit the
immediate assign information and paging information. CCCH can be bearded by a
physical channel or shared by multiple physical channels. CCCH can share the same
physical channel with SDCCH. The combination mode of CCCH is decided by the
parameter CCCH CONF. The configuration of CCCH CONF should be consistent with
that of CCCH. For the cell with one TRX, the recommended CCCH configuration is
sharing one physical channel with SDCCH (3 CCCH information blocks in this case).
For some location area with very heavy paging traffic, only one physical timeslot is
insufficient to transmit the paging information. Therefore, the GSM specification allows
configuring extra CCCHs on the TS0, TS2, TS4 and TS6 of the carrier.
2.1.7 Location updating

Location updating is an important task of Mobile Management (MM).
I. Location Area
To locate MS, each GSM PLMN domain is divided into locations areas covering one or
more cells. The location area of each MS is recorded by the network as the location
reference for paging this MS. With the introduction of the concept of location area, the
paging MS can be implemented with a location area instead of all cells controlled by
MSC, thus lowering the paging load. Each location area is assigned with a Location Area
Code (LAC), which is broadcast with the system information via BCCH.
The size of a location area has a great effect on the system. The design of location area
is very important in network planning. If the coverage of a location area is too small, the
location updating of MS will trigger frequently, which will increase the signaling flow of
system. On the other hand, if the coverage of a location area is too large, the load of PCH
and the signaling flow on Abis interface will increase since one single paging information
will be broadcast in all cells of this location area.
Therefore, optimization of location area is a very important task in network planning.
When designing the location areas, it is necessary to lessen the frequency of location
2-23
Feature Description
updating on the basis of no overweigh paging load, so as to avoid waste of network

resource.
II. Location updating

When MS roams from one location area to another, it is to be registered in the new
location area. In other words, once driven by certain needs or finding that the LAI stored
is different from that of the current cell, MS will notify the network to change the stored
location area. The procedure is called location updating.
If the MS in idle mode triggers cell reselection when moving within the same location
area, MS will not notify the network about this change although the serving cell has
changed. If the two cells before and after reselection are not in the same location area,
MS will notify the network about this change. This is "forced register".
According to the labels of location updating in the network, there are three types of
location updating: generic location updating (i.e. inter-location area location updating),
periodic location updating (T3212 timeout) and IMSI attach (MS powered on). Their
specific differences are whether only one VLR is involved in the location updating
process and whether IMSI is used in the process.
III. Generic location updating

Generic location updating is for the purpose of updating the actual MS's location
registered in the network. The information unit of type of location updating in "location
updating" should be indicated as generic location updating.
If the network indicates that the status of MS in VLR is unknown, the generic location
updating will also be initiated as a response to the request of MM connection setup.
1)
Intra-VLR location updating
This is the simplest location updating process, in which, MS does not need to provide its
IMSI. It is implemented within the current VLR, and HLR will not be notified about the
process.
During the initialization process, the access cause indicated in the initialization
information contained in SABM frame sent from MS to the network is Location updating
Request. This information also contains MSTMSI and LAI noted as for generic location
updating. After receiving this information, MSC will send MAP Update Location Area to
VLR. VLR, after receiving this information, will implement the location updating. It will
update the location information of the MS and store the new LAI and then allocate a new
TMSI for MS if necessary (TMSI can also be absent in the TMSI reallocation command.
In this case, MS uses the former TMSI). After receiving TMSI Reallocation Complete
from MS, VLR sends Location updating Accept to MS, and then release the channel to
end the process.
2-24
Feature Description
IV. Inter-VLR location updating

If MS roams to a cell whose LAI is different from the current one, it will send the old LAI
and stored TMSI via MSC to VLR in the process of location updating If TMSI cannot be
identified, MS can also be identified with its IMSI. See Figure 2-6.
D
A
B
MSC
MS
D
PVLR
VLR
HLR
Location Update Request

MAP Update Location Area
MAP Update Location
MAPCancel Location
MAPCancel Location ACK
MAP Insert Subscriber Data

MAP Insert Subscriber Data ACK
MAP Update Location ACK
MAP Update Location Area ACK
Location Update Accept
Figure 2-6 Interfaces and process of inter-VLR location updating
1)
Update with TMSI
If VLR finds that the TMSI is unknown after receiving MAP Update Location Area from
MSC, it will label the "VLR Location Information Acknowledge" as "Unacknowledged" for
the subsequent updating in HLR. If the subscriber has not registered in that VLR, "HLR
Location Information Acknowledge" will be labeled as "Unacknowledged". And then,
according to the address of the previous VLR (PVLR) indicated in TMSI and LAI, VLR
will send MAP Send Identification to PVLR to request for IMSI and authentication
parameter, and as a response PVLR will return the IMSI and authentication parameter to
the new VLR. If the new VLR fails to get the IMSI, it will then sends Identity Request to
MS to request for its IMSI. After receiving IMSI, VLR will send the information of location
updating of MS to HLR. This information contains the identification of MS and other
related information for HLR the query the data and set up the path. If the new MSC/VLR
has the normal service authority, HLR will store the new VLR No., and sends MAP
Cancel Location to HLR. After receiving this information, PVLR will delete all information
2-25
Feature Description
related to this MS, and sends MAP Cancel Location ACK to HLR. The new VLR
continues to handle the processes of authentication, ciphering and TMSI reallocation.
When these processes are done, HLR sends MAP Insert Subscriber Data to VLR to
provide the subscriber information needed, including authentication information. After
receiving the response from VLR, HLR will send Location updating Ark to that VLR.
2)
Update with IMSI
If the identification of the subscriber is IMSI, VLR will check whether this subscriber is
unknown. If so, it will be labeled the "HLR Acknowledge" as "Unacknowledged", and
then initializes HLR updating. If the IMSI is a known one, VLR will check whether the
previous LAI provided in the information from MSC belongs to this VLR. If not, it will label
"HLR Acknowledge" as "Unacknowledged", and then initialize HLR updating.
Authentication is needed in these two cases.
V. IMSI attach process

IMSI attach and detach means to attach a binary mark to the subscriber record in
MSC/VLR. The former one is marked as access granted, and the latter one is marked as
access denied.
IMSI attach and detach is an option of system. If the cell where MS is powered on
supports this function, it will notify its power-on status to the network, i. e. sending the
information of "IMSI Attach" to notify the network about the change of its current status.
When the network receives this indication, it will note down the subscriber status in the
system data so as to initialize the paging process when there is an paging information of
this MS.
If MS finds that the stored LAI is the same as the current LAI when powered on, it will
initialized the process of IMSI attach. The process is almost the same as INTRA VLR
Location Updating. The only difference is that the type of location updating marked in
Location Updating Request is IMSI attach.
VI. Periodic location updating

Periodic location updating is used to periodically notify the network about the
accessibility of MS. MS sends Location Updating Request to the network, in which the
information unit of the type of location updating is periodic location updating.
In the following cases, network will lose contact with MS:
A powered on MS roams to the area beyond network coverage (blind spot). Since the
network is not notified about the current status of MS, it still considers the MS in the
status of IMSI attach.
2-26
Feature Description
1)
When MS is transmitting "IMSI Detach", if there is interference to the radio uplink

path, the network may not be able to decode this information. This means that
system still regards this MS in the IMSI attach status.
2)
In the case of MS power failure, MS cannot notify the network about its current
status, resulting in the loss of contact with the network. If the above cases happen
and the MS is paged, system will still sends the paging information to the location
area where the subscriber registered. This paging will sure end up with paging
timeout, and system resources are wasted.
To tackle this problem, the corresponding measure is taken in GSM system to make the
MS automatically reports its current location information to the network periodically. N
this way, the network can have the timely information of the current location status of MS.
This process is called periodic location updating. BSS sends the period of periodic
location updating (T3212) to all subscribers in the cell with system broadcast system via
the cell's BCCH, so that MS will automatically initialized location updating request to the
network when the timer times out. After cell selection or cell reselection, MS will read
T3212 from the system information of the serving cell, and then activate this timer and
store it in SIM. After that, whenever T3212 times out, MS will automatically initialize
location updating. At NSS side, the network will periodically query the subscribers
marked as IMSI attach in its VLR to mark those without any contact with it witting this
period as implicit power-off in order to avoid paging these MSs and wasting system
resources.
Periodic location updating is an important measure to keep the contact between the
network and MSs, therefore, the more frequent periodic location updating is, the better
overall performance of network can be achieved. However, frequent periodic location
updating has two drawbacks:
Increase of signaling flow which may lower the processing power of MSC/BSC/BTS and
the utilization of radio resources if the situation is serious;
Increase of MS power consumption which will shorten the standby time of the MSs
served by this system. Therefore, the setting of T3212 should be based on the actual
situation.
In the following cases, T3212 will be reset to 0:
When receiving "Location Updating Request" or "Location Updating Refuse",
Ciphering mode complete when receiving the first MM message, or MM connection
being established.
MS responds to its paging, and after which, it receives the first correct L3 message
(excluding RR message).
T3212 timed out.
MS deactivated (equipment powered off or SIM removed).
2-27
Feature Description
When T3212 times out, MS will initialize periodic location updating.

If T3212 times out when MS is in the status of "no available cell", or "service restricted" or
"searching for PLMN, MS will delay location updating will be delayed until these status
changed. If BCCH information indicates periodic location updating not applied, this
process will not be activated. T3212 timeout value is broadcast in the CCH description in
"system information type 3".
In the status of "no available cell", "service restricted" and "searching PLMN", T3212
cannot be changed.
MS, after cell reselection, may find that the T3212 of the new cell is different from the
previous one (sharing the same LAC) or the broadcast T3212 of the current cell is
manually changed). In this case, assumed that "t1" is the new T3212 timeout value and
"t" is the current value of T3212, the timer of MS will be restarted with the value of t mod
t1.
If MS is in the activated status, or it is necessary to change T3212 value, and the timer is
not running, then the new timer will be started with a random number whose value range
is 0~t1 ("t1" is new T3212 timeout value.
The signaling flow of periodic location updating is the same as that of generic location
updating.
VII. Generic location updating (specification)

MS initialize location updating
If there is no RR connection available when initializing location updating, MM sub-layer
of MS will request RR sub-layer to establish RR connection.
MS sends "Location Updating Request" to the network, and start T3210. The information
unit of location updating type in this message will indicate the type of this location
updating. On this occasion, the network can initialize the type querying procedure (e. g.
to get the ciphering capability of MS). If the network cannot obtain the IMSI according to
TMSI and LAI, the network can initialize the identification process. After receiving
"Location Updating Request" from MS, the network will initialize the authentication
process. If it is necessary to reallocate TMSI, the network will initiate the process of
ciphering mode setting.
1)
Attempt counter
To restrict the frequency of location updating attempt, the attempt counter is

recommended in the specification. It is used to count the number of consecutive
unsuccessful location updating. When a location updating failure occurs, the counter will
add one. The attempt counter will be reset in the following cases:
z
MS powered on.
2-28
Feature Description
SIM inserted.
Location update successfully completed, and the service statuses switch from
Attempting to Update.
MS roaming into a new location updating area.
T3212 timeout.
Location update initiated by CM sub-layer.
Attempt counter is used to decide whether to implement another attempt after T3212
timeout.
2)
Location update accepted by the network
If the network accept location updating, it will send "Location Updating Accept" to MS.
When authenticating the validity of security, TMSI reallocation is a part of location
updating process. "Location Updating Accept" contains the TMSI allocated for MS and
the current LAI. In this case the network will initialize T3250.
If the network needs to prolong the RR connection so that MS can initialize MM
connection (e.g. MS sends a request subsequent to "Location Updating Request"), the
network will attach "Continue" to "Location Updating Accept" and initiate T3255. After
receiving "Location Updating Accept", MS stores LAI, terminates T3210, restarts the
attempt counter, and sets the status in SIM as Updated. If what contained in the
message is IMSI, MS will delete the corresponding TMSI stored in SIM. If the message
contains TMSI, MS will store it in the SIM and send "TMSI Reallocation Complete" to the
network. If neither of them can be received, MS will delete the original TMSI stored in
SIM. If the LAI or PLMN identifier in "Location Updating Accept" is one of "Barred series",
all of original input will be deleted. After that, MS will use "Continue" to direct it action. If
this unit exists, and MS has the underway CM service request, it will send "CM Service
Request" to the network.
3)
Location update denied by the network
If location updating is denied, the network will send "Location Updating Denied" to MS.
After receiving this message, MS will terminate T3210, store the reject cause, activate
T3240, enter location denied status and wait for the network to trigger RR connection
release.
a) If the reject cause is IMSI unknown to HLR, invalid MS, invalid ME.
MS will set the location updating status as Roaming not Allowed, and store it in SIM.
Delete TMSI, stored LAI and ciphering SN and regard the SIM as an invalid one until MS
powered off or SIM removed.
b) If the reject cause is : PLMN not allow, location area not allow, international roaming
not allowed in this location area.
MS will delete any LAI, TMSI and ciphering serial key, reset the attempt counter, and set
the update status as "Roaming not Allowed". If MS receives "domestic roaming not
2-29
Feature Description
allowed in this location area", it will return to MM Idle and then implement PLMN
selection instead of cell selection.
Other situations will be treated as abnormal ones.
4)
RR connection release after location updating
After location updating, MS will set T3240, enter "wait for network command phase" and
wait for the release of RR connection.
If MS cannot receive RR connection release command from the network within a period
of time (controlled by T3240), it will terminate RR connection. No matter RR connection
is released by MS or the network, MS will enter "idle status".
5)
Abnormality at MS side
a) Access denial controlled by access level, unable to initiate location updating. MS

camps on the current serving cell, and implements normal cell reselection. Try to initiate
before denial status ends or cell changed.
b) Random access delayed (after receiving Immediate Allocation Denied): unable to
initiate location updating. MS stays in the selected cell and initializes normal cell
selection. When changing, initialize location updating before T3122 timeout.
c) Random access failed: activate T3213. Activate location updating after it times out.
d) RR connection failure: terminate location-updating process.
e) T3210 timeout: terminate location updating process and RR connection.
f) RR released before normal termination: terminate location-updating process.
g) Location update denied caused by other reasons: MS waits for RR connection
release.
For (d) ~ (g) and random access occurring for many times, MS will terminate T3210.
When T3210 times out, RR connection will be canceled, and attempt counter adds 1.
The action afterwards is decided by LAI and the record of the attempt counter:
a) The update status is "Updated", the stored LAI equals to the one received from the
previous cell, and the record of attempt counter is four. MS will maintain the "Updated"
status. The MM idle status after RR connection release is "Normal Service". MS stores
the type of location updating. After RR connection release, T3211 will be activated. After
T3211 timeout, MS will reinitiate location-updating process (adopting the stored type).
b) If the update status is not "Updated", or the stored LAI is different from the one
received from BCCH, or the record in the attempt counter is larger than 4.
After RR connection release, MS will delete LAI, TMSI, ciphering SN in SIM, set the
update status as "Not updated", and enter MM idle sub-status "Attempt update". If the
2-30
Feature Description
record in attempt counter is smaller than four, T3211 stored in MS will be initiated during
RR connection release, otherwise the stored T3212 will be initiated.
6)
Abnormality at NSS side
a) RR connection failure
If the RR connection failure occurs successively when there is a common program, the
network should implement according to the common program description. If RR
connection failure occurs successively and there is no common program, the location
updating process should be terminated.
b) Protocol error
If protocol error exits in "Location Updating Request", the network should return
"Location Updating Denied". The reject cause is
z
Mandatory information unit incorrect
Information unit not exist or unable to be realized
Invalid information unit content
Protocol error, not regulated
When these errors occurs, the network will initialize the process of channel release.
2.1.8 Access
I. Circuit service access
An MS can be either in "active" state or in "idle" state. In idle mode, MS is not allowed to
implement any transmission. In the "dedicated/active" mode, the MS can make effective
transmission to the network through an allocated channel.
In idle mode, MS gives the access cause and analysis of the cause in the 8-bit
information during access request, and gets the channel for access after channel
allocation. If the network cannot select the suitable channel type with limited cause
analysis, it will allocate an SDCCH by default. If there is no available channel during
channel allocation, the network will notify the MS to implement access attempt after a
period of time with the command "Immediate Assign Denied". After the channel
activation via Abis interface, the network sends "Immediate Assign" to MS. After
receiving "Immediate Assign", MS sets up a dedicated channel to the network with
"Setup Indication" and enters active mode. After receiving the setup indication reported
by the MS, BSC analyzes the contents of the setup indication, including the processing
of MS class mark, power control record, and encryption information. Then BSC transmits
the setup indication reported by the MS to MSC.
2-31
Feature Description
II. Packet service access

When no PCCCH is configured in the serving cell, packet service is accessed on the
CCCH. The BSC transfers the packet paging messages coming from the PCU to the MS
on the PCH of the CCCH. The channel request message issued from the MS is
transferred to the BTS via the RACH of the CCCH and then reported via the BTS to the
BSC. If the channel request message is for packet access (corresponding to the MOC),
the BSC will not process it and will transfer it to the PCU. At the same time, the BSC
receives the packet immediate allocation message from the PCU, transfers it to the MS
and completes the packet call access. If mobile channel request message is for Paging
Response (corresponding to the MTC), the BSC will first allocate the DCCH and enter
the active mode. On the reception of EST_IND of RR_INITIALITION_REQ message, the
BSC will transfer it to the PCU. And it will receive the PDCH message of the PCU, and
transfer it to the MS, completing packet call access.
If the MS accesses packet service via the PCCCH, then the packet call process is
transparent to the BSC. After receiving packet paging message, MS will initialize the
process of uplink Temporary Block Flow setup, and then sends the paging response
packet in data form to PCU via the air interface. PCU forwards the packet to SGSN. After
receiving the paging response, SGSN is ready to transmit downlink data.
2.1.9 Paging
Paging means that when a call is routed to the destination office, GSM/GPRS network
initializes the call at the current location area or routing area of the called MS. Packet
paging is mainly implemented at routing area, but location area is available. This is
decided by SGSN. There are two types of paging, i.e. packet paging and circuit paging,
which will be examined respectively below.
I. Packet service paging

When there are downlink data that shall be sent to the MS, SGSN needs to initiate a
packet paging call. The paging request message originated by the SGSN is sent through
Gb interface to PCU, which converts it into the packet paging request of the air interface
(Um interface) before sending. If the PCCCH channel is configured for the BSS system,
the message will be sent on the PPCH directly. If PCCCH is not configured for the
system, PCU will send the message via the Pb interface to the BSC, which sends it on
the PCH.
On receipt of the packet paging message, MS starts access procedure.
II. Circuit service paging

1)
Overview
2-32
Feature Description
When a call reaches the MSC where the subscriber is located, the MSC sends a paging
message to all cells in that location area according to the registered location area of MS.
In the GSM network, the concept of Location Area (LA) is introduced to reduce waste of
resources. A LA contains a small group of cells. An MS belongs to a LA at specific time.
The LA information is stored in VLR from which MSC can query them.
A paging process is completed jointly by MSC, BSC and BTS as follows:
When a call is routed to the serving MSC of the called MS, MSC first figures out the
location area of MS, and then sends the paging message to all BSCs in this location area.
The paging message contains the information that can be used to identify the subscriber
(IMSI or TMSI). BSC determines which BTS to page according to the LA, and
determines the paging channel of the MS according to the IMSI, and sends them to the
BTS. BTS will transmit the paging message of the MS on the specified PCH.
The configuration of the PCH can be changed as the traffic increases or decreases. The
PCH configuration information of each cell must be notified to each MS in the cell. When
the configuration changes, BSC must modify the broadcast messages accordingly so
that the MS in the cell can wait on the specified PCH sub-channel to answer the paging
message.
To enhance the signaling efficiency, a group of paging request combinations, called
paging group, can be sent together. A page is generally sent three times.
When flow control is allowed, the BSC can automatically adjust the configuration of
PAGCH.
If the GPRS/GSM system runs in network operation mode 1 and there exists a Gs
interface, the circuit paging of the GSM service can be sent on the GPRS channel. In
other words, if an MS is GPRS-attached, its circuit paging shall go from MSC to SGSN
and then to PCU through the Gs and Gb interfaces, and PCU will determine on which
channel to transmit the paging.
If the system is configured with PCCCH, the paging message of the circuit will be sent
directly by PCU on the PPCH or PACCH channel. If the MS is already allocated to PDCH,
it shall be sent by priority on the PCCH. If the MS is not allocated to the PDCH, it shall be
sent on the PPCH.
If the system is not configured with PCCCH, PCU transfers the paging message to BSC
through Pb interface, which then transmit the paging message on the PCH.
After receiving the circuit-paging message, MS accesses the RACH and starts the circuit
connection setup process. MS will initiate the GPRS SUSPEND process to suspend the
GPRS services and will not recover the GPRS service till the circuit is released.
2)
Paging mode
The GSM network defines three commonly used paging modes:

2-33
Feature Description
z
Ordinary paging mode: The paging messages are only transmitted on the channel
defined by PCH configuration and IMSI.
Complete paging mode: When a notice is given to an MS group in this mode, it

indicates that the paging messages of this subscriber group might be transmitted on
any PCH at the same time slot. When the PCH configuration is modified
dynamically, this mode can be used to avoid the loss of paging messages.
Spaced paging mode: BSS attaches a group of paging messages to another

paging channel for transmission. This is to avoid temporary overload. In other words,
the MS that receives an ordinary paging on the paging channel N can receive the
paging message on the paging channel N+2.
M900/M1800 BSS supports all the three paging modes: "ordinary" paging mode,
"complete" paging mode and spaced paging mode. Therefore, in PAGCH channel
adjustment due to traffic flow, subscribers in the serving cell will not lose the paging
message. Once a paging message is received by MS, the access allocation and
allocation initialization process is started.
If an MS is GPRS-attached in network operation mode 1, circuit paging to this MS will go
through Gs interface, Gb interface, and Pb interface, and reach the BSC by way of
MSC-SGSN-PCU. Then, there are three possibilities that the paging message will be
transmitted to the MS, which are described according to their priorities.
z
If the MS has been allocated with a PDCH, the message is transmitted on the
PACCH.
If the serving cell has been allocated with a PCCCH, the message is transmitted on
the PPCH.
If the serving cell is not configured with the PCCCH, the message is transmitted on
the PCH.
2.1.10 Immediate assignment

I. Overview
Immediate assignment is for the purpose of establishing the wireless connection, i. e. RR
connection with MS at Um interface. When MS needs to set up a connection, the
immediate assignment process will allocate a channel necessary for the signaling
interaction of establishing this connection. This channel can be either a SDCCH or a
TCH. Huawei BSC supports the immediate assignment of SDCCH and immediate
assignment of TCH at the level of cell.
II. Technology description

1)
Channel request
The process of initialization is actually the process of random access. Whenever MS

needs to set up connection with the network, it has to send a message to the network via
2-34
Feature Description
RACH to request for a signaling channel. The network will decide the type of the channel
to be allocated according to the channel request. This message sent via RACH is called
Channel Request. In this message, there is only 8 bits of meaningful signaling message.
In which, 3 bits are used to the minimum indication of the access cause (in Phase 1, the
cause occupies only 3 bits; in Phase 2, due to concept of half rate, the bit occupied by the
cause is not a fixed, and the maximum one can be 6 bit). Such as emergency call,
location updating, response to paging or caller request, etc. In the case of network
congestion, system can implement different processing (which type of call will be
accepted or denied) to the channel request of different access purposes according to this
rough indication, and allocate the most suitable channels for them. In this indication, due
to the capacity limit of the channel, it is impossible to transmit all information to be
transmitted, such as the specific cause of channel request, subscriber identity and the
feature of mobile equipment (all transmitted in SABM) to the network. The other 5 bits is
the identification code selected by MS at random (for Phase 1 standard). It is not used to
notify the network about the MS's location but to enable the network to identify the
request initialized by different MSs. After that, the network will send "Immediate Assign
Command" (includes the information of the allocated channel) to MS. The identification
code will be returned to MS in this message. MS judges whether the information is for it
by comparing the identification code it sent and the one returned from the network. But it
has only 5 bits, which can be used to differentiate 32 MSs simultaneously. Two MSs
initializing calls simultaneously do not necessarily have the random identification codes
different from each other. To further differentiate MSs initializing calls simultaneously, the
response messages on Um interface are used as another reference. The channel
request message is processed only within BSS.
All MSs with SIMs belong to a level among Level 0~9. The access level is stored in SIM.
MS can also belong to one of the 5 special access levels (Level 11~15). Such level is
also stored in SIM.
In BCCH system information, the information, such as the access levels and special
access levels allowed by the network, and whether all MS or only those of special levels
is allowed to initiate emergency calls, will be broadcast.
If the setup cause requested by MM is not emergency call, then only when MS belongs
to the access level or special access level, can its access be grated. If the setup cause
requested by MM is emergency call, then only when all MSs in the cell are allowed to
initialize emergency call, or belongs to the allowed special access level, can their access
be grated.
Since the network cannot control the access time of MS, the event of two MSs
contending for the same RACH timeslot will inevitably happen in the areas with heavy
traffic. This is called the collision. The collision leads to two results: the network will
receive a burst level from this timeslot obviously higher than the other. In this case, the
network will process the random access request with higher level. The other one is that
the network can receive neither of them due to their mutual interference. With the
2-35
Feature Description
increase of traffic, the possibility of loss of message due to collision will become higher.
This will become the major problem of network capacity. Therefore, it is necessary to
introduce the mechanism of retranslating channel request.
MS figures out that it allowed to transmit "Channel Request" via RACH for at most M + 1
times with the following methods:
z
The timeslot No. Between the assign process and a "Channel Request" (not
including the timeslot containing the information itself) is selected at random from {0,
1 MAC (T, 8)-} with the same probability.
The timeslot No. between the two consecutive "Information Request" of MS is

selected at random from {S, S + 1, , S + T 1} with the same probability.
T is the parameter "Tx integer" broadcast on BCCH; M is "Max Retrans"; the value of S
depends of the configuration of CCCH. See Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 Value of Parameter S
Tx
Non-combined CCCH
Combined CCCH/SDCCH
3, 8, 14, 50
4, 9, 6
5, 10, 20
6, 11, 25
7, 12, 32
55
76
109
163
217
41
52
58
86
115
If the immediate assign command is not received even after Max Retrans, MS will return
to idle mode.
After transmitting initial channel request, MS will activate T3120 and stay on the entire
downlink CCCH (to receive answer) and BCCH.
When T3120 times out while RACH retransmission times has not exceeded "Max
Retrans", MS will retransmit the channel request message containing a new random
reference, and activate T3120 with a new value.
When T3120 times out, and the Max Retrans is reached, MS will activate T3126, and
then wait for a period of time and allow network to give up. If no network response
received after T3126 timeout, MS will give up request attempt and perform cell
reselection.
2)
The allocation of the initial channel
After correctly decoding the Channel Request of MS, BTS will send Channel Required to
BSC via Abis interface. This message contains important attachment information and the
estimation to TA that is important to activating timer advance control. After receiving this
message, BSC will select a corresponding idle channel for MS according to the
judgement to the existing radio resources. However, the availability of the allocated
channel and the related terrestrial resources is to be acknowledged with the response
from BT. This process is realized by sending "Channel Active" from BSC to BTS to query
2-36
Feature Description
the availability of corresponding terrestrial resources (e. g. transmission circuit). This

message indicates all properties needed in activating the channel, including channel
type, working mode, physical feature and initial lead. When the corresponding resources
are ready, BTS will return "Channel Active ACK" as a response to BSC.
a) Immediate assignment
After BSC receive Channel Active ACK from BTS, will send Immediate Assignment or
Extended Immediate Assignment to allocate dedicated signaling channel for MS in the
non-acknowledge mode, via the CCCH for MS receiving Channel Request. Immediate
Assignment contains the assignment information of only one MS, while Extended
Immediate Assignment contains the assignment information of two MSs. BTS can send
Immediate Assignment or Extended Immediate Assignment on any message block of
downlink CCCH. Therefore it is necessary for MS to monitor all information block on
CCCH. The allocated channel type (TCH or SDCCH, channel mode is set as signaling)
is decided by the carrier.
Normally, if there is an idle SDCCH available that can satisfy the access request, BSC
will allocate SDCCH. The process of requesting for SDCCH connection includes location
updating, IMSI detach, supplementary service, short message at non-session status and
services only supported by SDCCH. MS initializes access request, and BSC allocates a
SDCCH for this call. This channel seizes 1/8 sub-timeslots of a timeslot. The signaling
interaction necessary for call establishment is implemented on that channel. The
signaling flow of SDCCH immediate assignment is illustrated in Figure 2-7.
2-37
Feature Description
BTS
MS
Channel Request
MSC
BSC
Channel Required
Channel Active
Channel Active ACK
Immediate Assignment
SDCCH: SABM
SDCCH: UA
Establishment Indication
Complete Layer3 Informaiton
SDCCH: Authentication Request

SDCCH: Authentication Response
SDCCH: Ciphering Mode Command
Encryption Command
SDCCH: Ciphering Mode Complete

SDCCH: Setup
SDCCH: Call Proceed
SDCCH: Assignment Command

TCH: SABM
TCH: UA
TCH: Assignment Complete
TCH: Alert
TCH: Connect
TCH: Connect ACK
Channel Active
Channel ACK
Assignment Command
Ciphering Mode Command
Assignment Request
Assignment Complete
Figure 2-7 Immediate assignment

If TCH has been allocated before immediate assignment, there is no need to reallocate
TCH during the process of assignment. Mode conversion process can be used to
change the function of TCH from signaling transfer to voice transmission. Signaling flow
of TCH immediate assignment is illustrated in Figure 2-8.
2-38
Feature Description

BTS
MS
Channel Request
MSC
BSC
Channel Required
Channel Active
Channel Active ACK
TCH: SABM
TCH: UA
Establishment Indication
Complete Layer3 Informaiton
TCH: Authentication Request

TCH: Authentication Response
TCH: Ciphering Mode Command
Encryption Command
Ciphering Mode Command
TCH: Ciphering Mode Complete

TCH: Setup
TCH: Call Proceed
TCH:
TCH:
Mode Modify
Mode Modify ACK
Channel Mode Modify
Channel Mode Modify ACK
TCH: Alert
TCH: Connect
TCH: Connect ACK
Assignment Request
Assignment Complete
Figure 2-8 Immediate assignment

Messages of immediate assignment or extended immediate assignment contain:
z
Description of assigned channel.
Information field of channel request and abbreviated frame No. of the received
channel request frame (abbreviated frame No. is a frame No. with narrow value
range calculated from the TDMA frame No. received by BTS during channel
request.)
Initial lead; Start time indication (optional).
The random reference and abbreviated frame No. are directly related to the MS channel
request. They are used to reduce the conflict of request among MSs. TA is the initial lead
calculated from equalizing the channel request information received by BTS on RACH.
MS figures out the next initial lead for transmitting according to TA.
After receiving immediate assignment or extended immediate assignment, MS switches
to the channel assigned by the network, sets the channel modes as signaling only and
sends the SABM with information field via the allocated channel to establish the main
signaling link.
2-39
Feature Description
Immediate assignment or extended immediate assignment message, containing the

start time and description of possible alternative channel, can be used to indicate the
frequency change in the process.
If the received immediate assignment or extended immediate assignment message
contains only the description of the channel used after start time, MS will access to the
channel during the time waiting for start. If it misses the time, MS will immediately switch
to this channel after receiving the message.
If the message contains the description of the channel used after indication time as well
as that before the indication time, MS will access the channel after receiving the
message. If MS is ready for access to the channel upon the indicated time, MS will first
access to the channel used before the indication time, and switch to the one after the
indication time when the time comes (new frequency series, MAIO and HSN). If MS is
ready after the specified time it will access the channel after the indication time.
If MS has already sent the channel requests for maximum allowed times RR entity will
start T3126. After T3126 timeout, immediate assignment process will be terminated. If
the random access program is initiated by MM, system indicates failure of random
access to MM.
After sending the first channel request message, MS starts to monitor the system
message on BCCH as well as the CCCH timeslot corresponding to its paging group, i. e.
immediate assignment command may appear in any CCCH message block in 51
multiframe. Therefore it is necessary for MS to monitor the entire CCCH block after
sending channel request, i. e. decode the messages of the entire paging sub-channel for
response from the network.
If the network adopts FH, MS will decode MA with the CA got from BCCH system
message. CA refers to all the frequencies used in the cell (including FH frequencies). MA
refers to all FH frequencies used in the cell.
b) Immediate assignment denied
If there is no available channel for BSC to allocate, the network can send the immediate
assignment denied message in non-acknowledge mode to MS via CCCH. The reject
cause can be MSC traffic closed, radio resources shortage, TA value exceeding limit,
channel activation no response and BSC traffic overload. But system does not specify
the part on downlink CCCH for immediate assignment denied transmission. The
message of immediate assignment denied contains request reference and waiting
indication.
After receiving Immediate Assignment Denied, as the response to one of the last three
channel requests, MS terminates T3120, activates T3122 with the specified value and
returns CCCH idle mode. MS cannot start RR connection attempt until T3122 timeout.
MS is not allowed to initialize another call attempt except for emergency calls until T3122
2-40
Feature Description
timeout. Emergency call attempt can be established in the same cell before T3122
timeout as long as no "Immediate Assignment Denied" of RR emergency attempt
received.
It corresponds to the immediate assignment extension. In order to improve AGCH
efficiency, the format of extended immediate assignment denied is introduced. The
message of extended immediate assignment denied can contain information of rejecting
at most four MSs.
The value of the wait indication information unit (T3122) depends on the cell receiving
this message.
After T3122 timeout, MS will not respond to paging but sends "Channel Request" instead
till MS receives "Paging Request".
c) Signaling channel assignment overlap
The system may have a slow response to the channel request of MS, which results in
request retransmission. In this case, system do not know whether a channel request
message is a retransmitted one, so it may send the immediate assignment command to
the MS for multiple times. MS will use the channel in the first assignment message it
decoded. The others are regarded invalid ones. But according to the specification, MS
should receive the last three network response messages to the channel request. This is
called allocation overlapping. It is possible to cope with CCCH congestion caused by to
many overlapped allocations by reducing the retransmission of MS or shorten T3101.
This measure can avoid the waste of system resources.
3)
Initialization message
After receiving immediate assignment command, MS will decode this message. If the
random identification code and the abbreviated frame No. satisfy the requirement, MS
will tune its transceiver equipment to the specified channel and start to transmit signaling
according to TA specified by BSC and maximum transmitting power (defined in the
parameter "MS TxPWR MAX CCH" in BCCH system broadcast message). The first task
for MS on the allocated SDCCH/TCH is to send a SABM frame to establish
asynchronous balance mode (service access point type: SAPI = 0) so as to establish
signaling message link connection in acknowledge mode. In GSM specification, SABM
has a signaling message, i. e. initialization message. On Um interface, SABM frame is a
message requesting for the establishment of a multiframe response operation mode on
LAPDm. This message contains the L3 service request message. The reason for
different standards about standard HDLC is to guarantee the correctness of MS
receiving. If two MSs send the channel requests with the same message content at the
same (possible in the case of high load), BSS will repines to one of them only. While
these two MSs can both be allocated with the same dedicated channel. To settle this
problem, there should be a mechanism judging such contention. According to the
specification, the cell will send a UA frame (no No. verification) with the content
completely the same as that of SABM frame after the cell has received the SABM frame.
2-41
Feature Description
MS compares it and the SABM information. If the content is completely the same, the
access will proceed. Otherwise, it will give up this channel and repeat the immediate
allocation process. Only when the consistency is guaranteed, will MS stay on the
channel.
According to different request causes, the initialization messages in SABM can be
divided into four types: CM service request (call establishment, short message,
supplementary service management), location updating request (generic location
updating, periodic location updating, IMSI attach), IMSI detach and paging response. All
these messages contain the identity of MS, detailed access cause and Classmark of MS
(used to indicate some key features of MS, such as transmission power level, ciphering
algorithm, short message capability and frequency capability).
Upon receiving SABM frame, BTS will send a message "Establishment Indication" to
BSC. On Abis interface, this message is used to notify LAPDm that the connection has
been established. It is a response to the immediate assignment message. After receiving
the indication message of establishment, BSC will send a L3 service request message
(Complete Layer3 INFO) to MSC. To be specific, this message is Location Updating
Request, CM Service Request, Paging Response and IMSI Detach. This message
contains the SCCP connection request (SCCP CR), cause of CM service request (e.g.
MO call, emergency call, location updating and short message service), ciphering key
sequence No., LAC, CI, physical information of this MS (e.g. transmitting power level,
ciphering algorithm support, pseudo-synchronous capability and short message
capability) and the ID of MS.
Although the MTP connection at An interface has been established before the session,
there should still be a SCCP connection on L2 for each call. This establishment request
message will be transmitted in the SCCP CR message via A interface. If the request is
permitted, the first downlink message at An interface will be contained in the CC frame at
SCCP layer. For SCCP layer, the exchange between CR and CC is the exchange
between original reference address and destination reference addresses. For different
calls, the same SPC may refer to different original addresses and destination addresses.
If SCCP cannot be established, MSC will send the message SCCP Refused. The access
ends at this step. The signaling link between MS and MSC has been established, MSC
at this phase is able to control the transmission feature of the RR management, and BSS
is in the status of monitoring transmission quality and ready for handover.
4)
Phase1 and Phase2 MS
BSC cannot differentiate whether a call is for voice, data or signaling completely
according to MS establishment cause. In the case of Phase 2 MS, BSC can obtain the
access request cause more detailed than that of Phase1 MS. For Phase 2 MS, BSC is
able to recognize the information unit "Channel Needed" in the paging message. This
information unit indicates whether the current channel is for voice/data or signaling. MS
2-42
Feature Description
selects a suitable establishment cause to response according to its own capability.

Huawei BSC supports the information unit "Channel Needed" in the paging message.
III. Data configuration

Huawei BSC controls the function of immediate TCH assignment with the switch of
"Immediate assign TCH. The detailed configuration process, as well as the data table
and parameters involved are listed below:
[Cell/Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter/Modify Cell Call Parameter/Call Control]
Parameter: Immediate Assignment of TCH
Value range: Yes/No
Default: Yes
Description: Whether Immediate Assignment of TCH is permitted in the cell.
If Immediate Assignment of TCH is set as No, this indicates that the function of
immediately assigned TCH is disabled. All call access requests use SDCCH.
If Immediate Assignment of TCH is set as Yes, this indicates that the function of
immediately assigned TCH is enabled. For emergency call and call re-establishment,
BSC will preferentially assign TCH for them. If no idle TCH is available, the BSC assigns
SDCCH for them. For other the channel access request of calls, SDCCH will be
preferentially assigned and then TCH.
2.1.11 Assignment
I. Overview
BSS switches MS to TCH by means of assignment. Normally, the assignment is finished
at the cell where the call is initialized. Huawei BSC supports the function of direct retry,
which can assign MS to other cells.
II. Working principle

After MS initializes service request, BSC will assign the MS to TCH by means of the
assignment process. If BSC figures out that there is idle TCH in the cell where MS
initialized the call, it will assign the MS to that TCH. Huawei BSC provides two algorithms
of channel selection: "Huawei Channel Algorithm I" and "Huawei Channel Algorithm II".
The channel allocation algorithms of Huawei guarantee that the currently allocated
channel is the best one.
2-43
Feature Description
If BSC has already assigned the MS to TCH during immediate assignment, it will not
assign the MS to a new TCH, but to the old one.
If there is no idle TCH in the cell of the MS, the function of directed retry can be used to
assign the MS to other cells with idle TCH and go on with the service. BSC can select the
best cell among the adjacent cells with the measurement reports as the destination cell
in directed retry.

BSC decides whether to use the function of directed retry with the parameter "Directed
retry permitted".
The detailed data table and parameters involved are listed below:
[Cell/Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter/Modify Cell Call Control Parameter/Call
Control]
Parameter: Directed Retry Perm.
Value range: Yes/No
Default: No
Description: Whether directed call retry is permitted.
If parameter Directed Retry Perm is set as No, this indicates that the cell does not
enable function of directed call retry. During assignment, if the current cell has no idle
TCH, the assignment failure is returned. The reason is "No available radio resource".
If this parameter is set as Yes, this indicates that the cell uses the function of directed
call retry. During assignment, if the current cell has no idle TCH, BSC will try to assign
MS to adjacent cells.
2.1.12 Authentication
One of GSM system's advantages comparing with analog system is security system. It
has the following improvements: on access network: AUC authenticates the subscriber;
on radio path: communication information ciphering; EIR identifies the mobile equipment;
IMSI is protected by TMSI; SIM is protected with PIN.
The authentication process is one of the common processes of Mobility Management
(MM) process. The common processes of MM includes authentication process,
identification process, TMSI reallocation process and IMSI detach process initialized by
MS. Other common processes will also be mentioned in this chapter.
2-44
Feature Description
I. Authentication process
1)
Authentication triplet
Authentication and ciphering process is realized with the triplet allocated by the system.
The triplet is generated in the Authentication Center (AUC). After subscribing to GSM
service, each MS will be allocated with a MSISDN and IMSI. IMSI is written to the SIM of
the subscriber with SIM writer. Together with this IMSI, the authentication key Ki uniquely
corresponding to the IMSI is also stored in the SIM and in AUC. In AUC, there is a
pseudo-random code generator used to generate a unpredictable pseudo-random code
RAND (randomly selected from 0~2128-1). The GSM specification also defines the
algorithms of A3, A8 and A5 used in authentication and ciphering process. In AUC,
SRES is generated by processing RAND and Ki with A3, and Kc is generated by
processing RAND and Ki with A8. RAND, Kc and SRES make up the triplet, which will be
transmitted to HLR and be saved in the database of that subscriber. Normally, AUC
transmits five triplets at a time to HLR. HLR can store 10 triplets. When MSC/VLR
requests HLR for triplet, HLR will transmit five triplets to it. MSC/VLR uses one triplet
each time. When there is two triplets left, it will request HLR for triplets again.
Below is the detailed introduction to the process of parameter transference.
2)
Authentication process
There are two purposes for authentication: one is to check whether the identification
provided by MS is effective, and the other is to allocate a new ciphering key for MS.
After the establishment of RR layer between MSC and BSS, the network is able to
decide whether to trigger the authentication process to verify the identification of the
mobile subscriber. Whether to trigger the authentication process depends on Kc at
network side (stored after the previous processing of the MS service) is the same as that
stored in the MS accessing currently. If they are the same, system will skip authentication
and go to ciphering process with Kc stored in MS. Otherwise, Kc has to be calculated
with authentication process.
To enable the ciphering in the case of initializing RR connection without authentication
process, the concept of ciphering key sequence number is introduced. It is called CKSN
in the specification. CKSN is stored in SIM as well as in MSC/VLR together with Kc and
is processed by the network. In the first L3 message (e. g. location updating, CM service
request, paging response, MS will indicate the CKSN to the network. CKSN = 0 means
no Kc allocated. The calculation of Kc is illustrated in Figure 2-9.
2-45
Feature Description
RAND
Ki
A8
Kc
Figure 2-9 Kc calculation

After receiving Complete Layer3 INFO, MSC will send "Process Access Request" to
VLR for authentication and ciphering. VLR will return the message of "Process Access
Accepted". And then, MSC/VLR will send the message Authentication Request to MS
to trigger the authentication process. At the same time, T3260 will be activated.
"Authentication Request" contains a RAND and a CKSN. RAND is 128 bit. MS will send
the message "Run GSM Algorithm" to SIM after receiving this message. A 32-bit SRES
will be generated by processing Ki stored in SIM and this SRES with A3. Meanwhile, a
64-bit Kc is calculated by processing Ki and RAND with A8. MS will store it and CKSN to
the suitable position SIM for the future activation of ciphering transmission.
If RR connection exits, MS should respond to the authentication request message. MS
will sends the SRES to the network with the message Authentication Response. After
receiving "Authentication Response", the network will terminate T3260 and check the
validity of the SRES. Since Ki is stored in VLR or HLR as a subscriber data, the A3 and
A8 will also be carried out to generate a SRES and Kc and store them in VLR. System
compares these two SRESs. If they are the same, the authentication will succeed and
access to network will be grated, see Figure 2-10. And after that MSC proceeds ahead
with the ciphering process. If they are different, authentication failed, and system will
reject the access of the MS. The authentication process ends at this step.
2-46
Feature Description
AUC
RAND
Ki
A3
A3
SRES
Ki
RAND
Equal
SRES
Network
MS
Authentication
succeeded
Figure 2-10 Authentication algorithm

A3 and A8 can be executed either in MSC/VLR or in HLR/AUC. But it will be complicated
for MSC/VLR, but simple for HLR/AUC for it stores Ki. Furthermore, it is a better way to
achieve security and roaming. However, it causes the increase of signaling traffic
between HLR and MSC, for each authentication, HLR/AUC will send RAND, SRES and
Kc to MSC/VLR.
3)
Unsuccessful authentication
If the authentication failed, the network can use the subscriber's identification.
a) MS uses TMSI
If MS uses TMSI, the network can initiate the identification process. If the TMSI does not
correspond to the IMSI, authentication will be restarted.
b) MS uses IMSI
If MS uses IMSI or the network decides not to initiate identification program, then
"Authentication Denied" will be sent to MS. After sending this message, all MM
connection in process will be released, and then the network will initialize the RR
connection release process.
After receiving "Authentication Denied", MS will set the status of SIM as "Roaming
Denied", and delete the existing TMSI, LAI and CKSN, and regards SIM invalid until MS
powered off or SIM removed.
2-47
Feature Description
4)
Abnormality handling during authentication process
a) RR connection failure
If RR connection is detected before receiving "Authentication Response", the network
will release all MM connection and terminate all running MM special process.
b) T3260 timeout
If T3260 timeout, the network will release RR connection. In this case, the network will
terminate the authentication process and all ongoing MM process, releases all MM
connection and initializes RR connection process.
2.1.13 Ciphering
I. Overview
The feature of wireless transmission has a negative effect on the security and interest of
the subscribers. The analog mobile communication has always been the victim of
interception and misappropriation. The digital transmission of GSM guarantees excellent
security. The encryption function deals with the security for information exchange
between MS and BTS, including signaling information and user information.
It is up to the radio resources management to decide whether to adopt the encryption
mode or not. The encryption function is implemented in the BTS to encrypt user data.
The related parameters must be sent to the encryption program. The ciphering key Kc,
generated by AC and stored in the MSC/VLR, is sent to the BTS before encryption starts.
II. Technical description

In order to achieve a general understanding of the encryption/decryption process of
GSM, we will examine it here from three perspectives: TMSI, encryption process and Kc
generation.
1)
TMSI (Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity)
IMSI is the identity for mobile subscriber. Due to the importance of IMSI it is not
transmitted on the radio link repeatedly. VLR allocates a TMSI to the subscriber during
the MS registration. Afterwards TMSI is used in place of IMSI to protect the IMSI for the
sake of subscriber security.
The relation between TMSI and IMSI is not fixed. TMSI is valid only in a VLR area.
2)
Ciphering and deciphering processes
a) Initializing ciphering mode setting

After authentication process, MSC will send "Ciphering Mode Command" to BSC. This
message contains Kc. BSC sends Ciphering Mode Command to MS to indicate whether
2-48
Feature Description
ciphering is necessary, and if needed, which type of dedicated resources are to be

adopted.
b) Ciphering mode setting complete
Once MS receives the valid "Ciphering Mode Command", it will send the Kc stored in
SIM to the mobile equipment. The valid "Ciphering Mode Command" are as follows:
z
"Initialize Ciphering" is indicated when MS is in the status of "Non-ciphering".
"Non-ciphering" is indicated when MS is in the status of "Non-ciphering".
"Non-ciphering" is indicated when MS is in the status of "Ciphering".
MS will regard the "Ciphering Mode Command" of other type received as an incorrect
one. It will respond with "RR Status", and the cause value is "Error: protocol not defined".
After receiving the indication of "Ciphering Mode Command" and the ciphering process,
MS should initiate the Tx and Rx in ciphering mode. After MS has activated the actions of
"Ciphering Mode Command", it will returns "RR Ciphering Mode Complete" to the
network. If the field "Ciphering Response" in the information unit of ciphering response
message "IMEI shall be included", then MS will include its IMEI in "RR Ciphering Mode
Complete".
After receiving "Ciphering Mode Complete", the network will initialize the transmission in
ciphering mode.
BTS and MS carry out the encryption/decryption of the radio path. The process of
encryption and decryption is shown in Figure 2-11.
TDMA
Kc
Kc
A5
TDMA
A5
Data flow
Data flow
Mod 2+1
Mod 2+1
TX
RX
Data not ciphered
Data not ciphered
Figure 2-11 Process of ciphering and deciphering

The algorithm for generating the ciphering code is called A5. Using the Kc consistent in
MS and the network (64 bits) and the current pulse string frame number (22 bits), it
calculates result is the 114-bit ciphering sequence (the data flow in Figure 2-11), which
2-49
Feature Description
then performs "exclusive or" operation together with the burst 114 bit (the data not
ciphered in Figure 2-11). The frame No. code consists of three values (T1, T3 and T2). If
the communication lasts as long as the period of hyper frame (about 3 and half hours),
the ciphering sequence will appear repetitiously.
On uplink and downlink, the network uses the same ciphering sequence. For each burst,
one sequence is used for the ciphering in MS and the deciphering sequence of BTS, the
other one is for the ciphering of BTS and deciphering of MS.
According to the system configuration, MS can decide whether to report the processing
power of MS after Authentication Request. The name of this message is Classmark
Change. Its content is the same as that in the establishment indication, and is more
detailed in the description of ciphering algorithm at MS side. The establishment
indication states whether A5/1, A5/2 and A5/3 are supported, while the Classmark
Change further states whether A5/4~A5/7 are supported. After receiving this message,
the network first response with the message MS PWR CTRL to describe the power
range available for MS and the transmitting power of the TRX corresponding to this MS.
3)
Generation of Kc
RAND generator
RAND
Ki
Ki
A8
A8
Kc
Kc
storing KC
storing KC
MS
NSS
Figure 2-12 Generation of Kc

Ciphering key (Kc) is produced by A8 algorithm as shown in the Figure 2-9. Here Ki is a
user authentication key. After registering in the network, a subscriber obtains the Ki,
which is stored in the authentication centre and the SIM card.
The MS and the network use the same Ki and random number (which is generated by
the network and transmitted to the MS) so that the same Kc can be obtained.
2-50
Feature Description

Condition
MSC support ciphering, all kinds of ciphering algorithm and authentication in service
access procedure.
Huawei BSS supports both A5/1 and A5/2. The data configuration involved is as follows:
1)
BSC [BSC/Modify BSC Interface Phase Flag]

A Interface Version: GSM_Phase_2
Um Interface Version: GSM_Phase_2
Abis Interface Version: GSM_Phase_2
2)
BSC [Cell/Modify Cell's system information/Modify Cell Configuration Data]
Encryption Algorithm SettingEncryption Not Support, A5/1, A5/2

Note:
1) This manual only introduces the related parameters. All data configuration of BSC is realized with auto
data configuration console. For details, see M900/M1800 Base Station Controller Data Configuration
Manual.
2) For the configuration of ciphering algorithm, it is recommended select ciphering option not selected for
BSC. This is because BSC software selects ciphering algorithm from the intersection of algorithms allowed
in MSC data configuration, algorithms allowed in BSC data configuration and algorithms supported by MS. If
the intersection contains multiple algorithms, the one with the largest algorithm No. will be selected. The
meaning of algorithm No.: 1 (No ciphering), 2 (A5/1), 3 (A5/2) 8 (A5/7).
2.1.14 DTX
I. Overview
In the process of communication, only 40% of time of the mobile subscriber is engaged
in session. Most of the time is not engaged in the transmission of voice message. If all
information during the non-session period is sent to the network, not only the system
resources are wasted, but also the intra-system interference will be worsened.
To tackle the above problems, GSM adopts Discontinuous Transmission (DTX). When
there is no session, the transmitting channel is closed to lower the interference level and
improve the system efficiency. In addition, this function also saves the power
consumption of MS. When transferring data, this function cannot be applied. DTX affects
the transmission of TCH frame.
2-51
Feature Description
There are two types of voice transmission in GSM system: one is normal mode, the voice
stream is encoded as 13kbit/s regardless of the MS's session status, and the other is
DTX mode. Only one mode can be selected in one session. When both parties of the
communication are GSM subscribers, DTX will have a negative effect on the
communication quality. Therefore, DTX mode is not allowed on the occasion.
II. Technologies description

If DTX mode is adopted, the voice coding of 13 kbit/s will be used in voice activation
period, and that of 500 bit/s (for transmitting the feature parameter of comfort noise only)
in non-voice activation period.
MS
IRAU
VAD
MSC
Voice
coding
Voice frame
replacing
Information
DTX
Processing
SP
BFI
DTX
Information
SID
Processing
BTS
SID
VAD: Voice Activity Detection

TAF: Time Adjust Flag
TAF
SID: Silence Indicator

BFI: Bad Frame Indication
Voice
decoding
CN
CN: Comfort Noise

SP: Speech Flag
Figure 2-13 Principle of DTX
1)
Voice Activity Detection
Voice Activity Detection (VAD) indicated the time to use DTX. When DTX is activated, it
is used to detect whether voice or noise is transmitted.
VAD algorithm and voice coding/decoding algorithm is closely related. This algorithm
judges whether voice or noise is contained in the output frame by comparing the filter
signal and the configured threshold. It also indicates whether the auxiliary bit of this
frame is transmitted. This judgement is based on the principle of the energy of noise
being lower than that of voice.
VAD generates a group of threshold values in each voice block of 20 ms for judging
whether the next voice block of 20 ms is voice or noise. If the background noise is too
loud, it will be transmitted as the voice signal.
2)
Silence descriptor
The noise coding process is similar to that of voice coding process: after sampling and
quantization, each 20 ms will be encoded as a noise block. The encoded noise block will
also become a block of 260 bits like the voice block. This is a Silence Descriptor (SID).
SID frame is applied to channel encoding, interleaving, ciphering and modulating like
2-52
Feature Description
voice frame to become a field containing noise message and be transmitted in the 8
consecutive bursts.
A complete SACCH message block on TCH has four 26-multiframe (480 ms). To enable
the peer end to differentiate the voice frame and SID frame, these 8 consecutive bursts
are fixedly arranged at the beginning of the third multiframe. Other frames (excluding
SACCH) within the same period will not be used to transmit any message.
Caution
1) The SID frame generated from 20 ms noise block completes the process of interleaving together with the
SID frames before and after it.
2) The first SID frame completes the interleaving together with the voice frame before it and the SID frame
after it.
The DTX functions are optional, independent in the direction of uplink/downlink and
based on the control unit of a cell. The uplink and downlink DTXs are two processes
independent to each other, and are activated by system parameters respectively.
There measurement methods in GSM system:
z
Global measurement: average the levels and quality of the 100 timeslots within the
entire period (totally 4 TCHs of 26-multiframe, idle frame not included)
Partial measurement: average the levels and quality of 12 timeslots, including 8

consecutive TCH bursts and 4 SACCH bursts containing measurement report. To
ensure the consistency, no matter whether the uplink or downlink activates DTX,
BTS and MS should both complete these two types of measurement. Since each
SACCH measurement report of BTS and MS indicates whether DTX is used, BSC
can select whether to use global measurement or partial measurement to judge
according to according to the measurement report.
Note:
No matter whether DTX is used, the uplink and downlink will proceed with global and partial measurement.
DTX, which is applicable for voice and non-transparent data transmission, involves the
operations of MS and TRAU.
No matter whether DTX is used or not, the decision-maker is MSC and the executor is
BSC.
2-53
Feature Description

[Cell/Modify Cell's System Message/Modify Cell System Message/Bsic Data]
Parameter: Discontinuous Transmission Indication
Value range: Can not use, Must use, May use
Default: Must use
Description: Whether the cell should use the function of DTX.
As regards MS uplink DTX, using or not using DTX are both allowed.
2.1.15 Frequency hopping

I. Overview
The purpose of frequency hopping (FH) is for obtaining better security and
anti-interference capability. There are fast FH and slow FH. Fast FH means that the
change rate of frequency is faster than modulation rate of signal. In GSM system, it is
required that the frequency should remain unchanged within a burst period. Therefore,
the FH in GSM system belongs to slow FH. It involves frequency diversity and
interference diversity technologies. The frequency occupied by channel in the Um
interface of GSM system is changed regularly. The frequency of changing frequency is
about 217 times per second.
The FH can avoid the attenuation caused by multi-path transmission and same
frequency interference, and improve the average C/I of the interference restriction
system (especially in cities), thus greatly improving the quality of session, strengthening
the capability of high-density multiplexing and increasing the system capacity. Adopting
FH can improve the transmission quality of the slowly moving MS by 6, 5 dB. Besides,
FH can also improve the security of communication.

1)
FH modes
FH means that the carrier containing meaningful information hops under the control of a
sequence. This sequence is called frequency-hopping sequence (HSN). An HSN is an
array of all frequencies in a frequency set uniquely defined with HSN, Mobile Allocation
Index Offset (MAIO) and Frame No. (FN) by using certain algorithms. Channels on
different timeslots (TN) can use the same HSN. Different channels on the same timeslot
in the same cell should use different MAIOs.
FH mode can be divided into frame FH and timeslot FH by the concept of time-domain.
2-54
Feature Description
z
Frame FH: Frequency changes for each TDMA frame. In the mode, each carrier
can be regarded as a channel. The TCH of the TRX which bears BCCH cannot be
used for FH while other different TRXs should have their own MAIO. This is the
expiation of timeslot FH.
Timeslot FH: Frequency changes for each timeslot of each TDMA frame. The TCH
of the TRX which bears BCCH can be used for FH. But currently it is realized only
on the occasion of base band FH.
FH mode can be divided into and into RF FH and base band FH by carrier realization
mode.
z
RH FH: Both Tx and Rx can be both used in FH. In a cell, the number of FH
frequencies engaged in FH can be larger than the number of TRX.
The RF FH of the M900/M1800 BTS is enabled through real-time switchover between

two frequency synthesizers. There are two advantages for this implementation: first,
lower speed requirements of the frequency synthesizer can be practical, i. e. the speed
requirements are easier to implement; second, one of the two frequency synthesizers
serves as the standby when there is no FH to enhance system reliability.
Huawei BTS adopts dynamic loop bandwidth and Ping-Pong handover to solve the
inconsistency between fast FH and signal quality, and realize the unrestricted FH in GSM
900 bandwidth of 25 MHz and DCS 1800 bandwidth of 75 MHz. All FH indices satisfy the
requirements in GSM protocols.
Dynamic loop band width technologies: local oscillation signal is mainly decided by
reference clock (phase discrimination frequency), voltage controlled oscillator and loop
bandwidth, etc. The phase noise of local oscillation within the loop bandwidth is decided by
reference clock, and that beyond loop bandwidth is decided by collage controlled oscillator. During
the operation of Huawei BTS, loop bandwidth needs to be dynamically adjusted along
with the needs of system. If the system is not in the working status, loop bandwidth
changes back to best bandwidth, so that the output signal can be the best, and the best
performance of the system can be guaranteed.
Ping-Pong handover: Two identical oscillators are designed on the circuit. A switch is in
charge of selecting between these two oscillators. When one oscillator is working, the
other one locks on the next frequency quickly. Switching to another oscillator is realized
with a switch between two timeslots. This avoids the instant performance worsening at
the beginning and end of the timeslot.
z
Base band FH: Each transmitter works on a fixed frequency. Tx is not involved in
FH. The transmitting FH is realized by switching the base band signal. Rx is
involved in FH. Therefore the number of FH frequencies in a cell cannot be larger
than number of the TRXs of the cell. When a TRX is faulty, the system can skip it
when implementing FH.
Huawei BTS adopts the technology of (FH_BUS), which implement FH on the basis of
timeslot exchange. Each transmitter is tuned to a fixed frequency, and has a fixed ID.
2-55
Feature Description
The coder of transmitter encodes the downlink signal to convert the data to burst format.
It calculates the channel (i. e. TRX) to be modulated for the burst according to FH
algorithm, and adds the attached information related to power control to generate a
special data packet. The coder transmits the data packet periodically (sub-timeslot).
Modulator checks the TRX ID of the data packet from each sub-timeslot. If the TRX ID is
different from the local TRX, it will receive that from the next sub-timeslot. If the TRX IDs
are the same, it will accept the data packet, and delay for a timeslot and then transmitted
to the air interface. Base band FH has a very high requirement on the real-time
identification of the ID of TRX. Huawei base band FH technology realizes fast and
reliable TRX ID identification on the basis of the ASIC.
Huawei BSS realizes the base band FH at timeslot level, RF FH at timeslot level, base
band FH at frame level and RF FH at frame level.
2)
FH algorithm
Parameters involved:
z
CA: Cell allocation table, i. e. the collection of frequency ID used in the cells.
FN: TDMA frame No., broadcast on the synchronous channel. BTS and MS achieve
synchronous with FN (0~2715647).
MA: the radio frequency ID collection for MS FH, a subset of CA. M contains N
frequency Ids, 1 N 64.
MAIO: Mobile Allocation Index Offset (0~N-1). During communication, the radio
frequency ID adopted on air interface is an element in MA. MAI (Mobile Allocation
Index, 0~N-1): indicating an element in MA, In other words, the frequency actually
used is decided by MAI. MAIO is an initial offset of MAI. Its purpose is avoid multiple
channels contends the same carrier.
HSN: FH serial No. (generator) (0~63). If HSN = 0, it will be cycle FH, and if HSN
0, it will be random FH.
The process of calculating the actual working frequency on each FH timeslot is as shown
in Figure 2-14.
2-56
Feature Description
MAI
(m0mN-1)
MAIO
(0N-1)
HSN
(063)
FN
T3(050)
NBIN bit
6bit
FN
T1(02047)
FN
T2(025)
11bit
6bit
T1R=
T1 MOD 64
5bit
Represent
in 7 bit
6bit
7bit
Exclusive OR
6bit
Addition
7bit
Look-up table
7bit
Addition
8bit
T=T3 mod
2^NBIN
M'=M mod 2^NBIN

NBIN bit
NBIN bit
N
S=(M'+T) mod N
M'<N
S=M'
NBIN bit
MAI=(S+MAIO) mod
NBIN bit
RFCN=MA(MAI)
Figure 2-14 FH algorithm

In the figure above:
z
MAI = (S + MAIO) MOD N (S is the result after calculating the frame No.)
RFCHN = MA (MAI)
mod: MOD
^: power
NBIN: INTEGER(log2N + 1)
Table: see Table 2-5.
2-57
Feature Description
Table 2-5 "Table" meaning table

Address
000~009
010~019
020~029
030~039
040~049
050~059
060~069
070~079
080~089
090~099
100~109
110~113
3)
Content
48
0
101
80
55
87
82
77
117
16
91
129
98
64
47
34
111
19
58
108
114
49
15
99
63
25
118
127
75
3
40
122
4
7
21
17
1
81
85
13
38
68
107
37
90
79
24
123
36
76
18
6
109
110
32
60
43
119
46
95
59
56
89
71
26
5
66
52
61
39
78
124
96
57
112
33
106
121
53
22
93
102
23
86
103
29
31
92
42
113
84
105
94
104
54
12
11
8
62
51
120
9
65
73
100
2
74
88
45
67
126
72
97
70
Concept synchronous cell
The concept of synchronous cell plays an important role in planning FH strategy and
lowering intra-network interference. BTS and MS achieve synchronization through their
agreement on FN. In synchronous cell, since the FNs of all TRXs are completely the
same, it is possible for different FH groups to use the same HSN. Adjust MAIO to avoid
the collision between cells and the adjacent frequencies of the same cell.

FH data configuration sequence: CAMAHSNMAIO
Four parameters of FH algorithm: MA = {f1, f2,,fN}, HSN, MAIO, FN
The data tables and parameters involved in configuration are detailed below.
[Cell/Modify Cell's FH Property/Modify Cell FH]
Parameter: FH Mode
Description: To select BTS FH mode
Value range: Not FH, Baseband FH, RF FH
Parameter: FH Group Assignment Table
Description: configure FH Group No. and Offset. Decide the MAIO of each TRX of each
cell engaged in FH.
Value Range: 0~99
[Cell/Modify Cell's FH Property/Modify Cell FH /Configure MA Group]
Parameter: MA Frequencies Assigned
2-58
Feature Description
Description: MA is an FH frequency set consisting of at most 64 frequencies. The

frequencies in it should be those described in CA table. BCCH frequencies should not be
included. It decides the MA of TRX engaged in FH and BCCH of TRX not engaged in FH.
Value Range: 0~1023
Parameter: Current MA Group No.
Description: The Current MA Group No. of each HP cell, which is not related with HP
algorithm.
Parameter: FH Sequence No.
Description: FH Sequence No. (HSN) of each cell engaged in FH. 0 stands for
sequence FH, other values stand for pseudo-random sequence. All channels in the
same cell should have the same HSN.
Value Range: 0~63
Parameter: Training Sequence No. (TSC)
Description: The Training Sequence No. (TSC) of each cell has nothing to do with FH
performance. It is a parameter used to balance time-domain. It should be the same as
BCC.
Value Range: 0~7
2.2 Extended Functions

2.2.1 Handover
I. Overview
Handover is a very important function in a cellular mobile communication network.
Handover enables the continuous session of subscribers while moving around different
cells. Besides, handover can also adjust the traffic of the cell, thus optimizing the overall
performance.
The overall handover process is implemented in the MS, BSS and MSC. Measurement
of radio subsystem downlink performance and signal levels received from surrounding
cells, is made in the MS. These measurements are send to the BSS for assessment. The
BSS measures the uplink performance for the MS being served and also assesses the
signal level of interference on its idle traffic channels. Initial assessment of the
measurements in conjunction with defined thresholds and handover strategy may be
performed in the BSS. Assessment requiring measurement results from other BTS or
other information resident in the MSC, may be performed in the MSC. In the above
2-59
Feature Description
handover process, handover decision algorithm is the most important part because it
determines the service quality and frequency efficiency.

Huawei handover algorithm includes cell sequencing and handover judgements.
1)
Cell sequencing
The cell sequencing can be divided into two parts: basic sequencing and network feature
adjustment.
a) Basic cell sorting.
Huawei handover algorithm adopts the M principle and K principle based on level
comparison in stead of L principle based on path loss. With M principle and K principle,
the serving cell and all adjacent cells are sequenced according to their levels to obtain
the standby cell list on the basis of levels.
M principle: check whether the downlink receiving level of the adjacent cell is higher than
the minimum receiving level while taking uplink and downlink balance compensation.
Only the cell with receiving level lower than the minimum receiving cell, i. e. RxLEV > MS
Rx MIN + MAX (0, Pa), can enter the standby cell list. In that formula Pa = MS TxPWR
MAX - P.
z
RxLEV is the MS receiving level for this cell.
MS Rx MIN is the minimum receiving level of MS required by the cell.
MS TxPWR MAX is for restricting the maximum transmitting power of MS.
P is the maximum transmitting power of the MS.
K principle:
K _ rank (n ) = RxLEV (n ) RxLEV (o ) K _ BIAS (o, n )

K _ BIAS (n ) = RxSUFF (n ) (RxSUFF (o ) KOFFSET KHYST )
After removing KOFFSET (offset) and KHYST (Hysteresis). The formula of K

sequencing:
K _ rank (n ) = (RxLEV (n ) RxSUFF (n )) (RxLEV (o ) RxSUFF (o ))

In this formula, (RxLEV(n) RxSUFF(n)) shows the difference between the adjacent cell
receiving level RxLEV (n) and adjacent cell minimum receiving level threshold RxSUFF
(n). (RxLEV(o) RxSUFF(o)) shows the difference between the serving cell receiving
level RxLEV(o) and serving cell minimum receiving level threshold RxSUFF(o). These
two differences decide the position of an adjacent cell in the standby cell list.
z
RxSUFF(n) is adjacent cell minimum receiving level threshold
RxLEV(o) is serving cell receiving level
RxSUFF(o) is serving cell minimum receiving level threshold
2-60
Feature Description
Note:
The purpose of hysteresis is to avoid Ping-Pong handover. The communication may be handed over back
and forth due to the unstable signal at the edge of the cells. This causes much increase in the load to the
system. Applying hysteresis is like enlarging the coverage radius of the serving cell while shortening the
coverage of the coverage radius of adjacent cell. In this way, handover will not be easily triggered, and the
Ping-Pong handover can be eliminated.
b) Adjustment according to network features

Network feature adjustment uses the network information except for the power level to
decide the position of each cell in the standby cell list, thus providing the ultimate standby
cell list for handover judgement.
z
Implemented according to the load of the cell. The cell with less load has the higher
priority.
Implemented according to whether BSC/MSC is the same. The cell controlled by

the same BSC or MSC has the higher priority.
Implemented according to the layer and level of the cell. The cell of lower layer or
level has the higher priority.
With basic sequencing of cell and network feature structure adjustment, it is possible to
have a best cell list on broad sense. In other words, regardless of the cause that triggers
handover, a cell ranking first in the list is not a result of certain processing based on
certain criteria.
c) Layers and levels of the cell
Hierarchical classification of the network can fulfill the demands of both coverage and hot
spot traffic. This is a mandatory function to be realized. Normally, the macro cell settles
the problem of coverage, while the micro cell tackles the problem of hot spot traffic.
The basic frame of Huawei network hierarchy has four layers. They are Umbrella, Macro,
Micro and Pico. In the multiband network, the top layer GSM 900 is usually set as
Umbrella, and the major layer of GSM900 is Macro. The major layer of GSM 1800 is
Micro and micro cell of GSM900/GSM1800 is Pico. Besides, it is also possible to
differentiate the priority of GSM900/GSM1800 band according to the cell's layer. There
are 16 levels of priority at each layer. In the network planning following this mechanism,
the network is first considered according to the layers. The lower layer has higher
property. In the same layer, according to the needs of network planning, the GSM 900
and GSM 1800 can be set with different priority. The smaller priority level has the higher
priority.
2-61
Feature Description
Umbrella
Cell
Layer 4
GSM 900
GSM 900
GSM 900
GSM 900
Macro Cell
Layer 3
GSM 1800
GSM900
GSM 1800
GSM900
GSM900
GSM 1800
GSM900
GSM900
Micro Cell
GSM1800
Pico Cell
Layer 2
GSM1800 GSM1800 GSM1800 GSM1800
GSM900
GSM900
GSM900
GSM1800
GSM1800
GSM1800
GSM900
Layer 1
GSM1800
Figure 2-15 Layers and levels of the cell
2)
Operation types
a) TA handover
TA can be regarded as a criterion for controlling the size of a cell. BSC judges whether
the TA of the current MS exceeds the maximum Timing Advanced LIMit (TALIM). If so, it
will initiate an emergent handover. The value range of TA is 0~63. The step length of
each bit is 553. 5 m, the TA setting can compensate for a distance 35 km over 63 steps.
If the serving cell satisfies the requirement of TA handover. After a successful handover,
the original cell will be punished so as to avoid this MS handover back to it for other
causes.
b) BQ handover
The BER values used to define a quality band are the estimated error probabilities before
channel decoding. BSC assesses the quality of radio link according to the quality level in
the measurement report. The correspondence between quality level and actual BER is
shown in Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 BER corresponding to quality level
Quality level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BER range
Less than 0. 2%
0. 2% to 0. 4%
0. 4% to 0. 8%
0. 8% to 1. 6%
1. 6% to 3. 2%
3. 2% to 6. 4%
6. 4% to 12. 8%
Greater than 12. 8%
2-62
Assumed value
0. 14%
0. 28%
0. 57%
1. 13%
2. 26%
4. 53%
9. 05%
18. 10%
Calculated value
14
28
57
113
226
453
905
1,810
Feature Description
The cause of BER increase could be signal power too low or channel interference. When
the receiving quality in the serving cell is lower than the BQ handover threshold, BQ
handover will be started so that the MS can maintain transmission quality of a certain
level. If the serving cell satisfies the requirement of BQ handover. After a successful
handover, the original cell will be punished so as to avoid this MS hands over back to it
for other causes.
c) Signal level rapid dropping handover
Handovers such as edge handover and PBGT adopt methods such as averaging filter
and P/N judgements. However it is not sensitive to short term signal level rapid dropping,
FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filter to original receiving signal level is used to settle this
problem. This kind of filter has a quick response to the rapid dropping slope of the
original receiving signal level signal.
Note:
Since the parameter setting of level rapid dropping handover algorithm is rather complicated, it is not easy to
obtain experience point. Therefore, this function is usually not used.
d) Interference handover
When the receiving level in the serving cell is high, but the receiving quality deteriorates
to a certain extent, interference handover is started so that the MS can maintain
transmission quality at the certain level. Difference between interference handover and
bad quality handover: in the former case, the quality is not low enough to affect session,
and the receiving level is still high.
When the active channel quality is affected by little interference in the serving cell, but
they still can sustain the ongoing communication. At the same time, the receiving level in
the serving cell is higher. There is possibility less interference on other channels in the
serving cell, so intra-cell handover can be carried out.
The parameters of interference handover algorithm: Qual_Thr and Lev_Thr. This to
decide whether to trigger interference handover. If RxLev > Lev_Thr and RxQual >
Qual_Thr, the interference handover is triggered. Interference handover is illustrated in
Figure 2-16.
2-63
Feature Description
Receiving
quality
(dtqu)
Qual_Thr
Receiving
level
Lev_Thr
Figure 2-16 Interference handover zone

The shadowed part in the figure stands for zones within which interference handover
occurs.
e) Edge handover
This is a level-based handover and is rescue handover. If edge handover is to be
triggered, the level of the destination cell is required to be higher than that of serving cell
for at least one hysteresis value (inter-cell handover hysteresis).
The criterion for triggering edge handover: When the receiving level of the serving cell is
lower than the edge handover threshold, and fulfilling the P/N criterion within a certain
measurement period, the edge handover will be triggered to ensure the communication
quality. Edge handover is illustrated in Figure 2-17.
Cell1
Cell2
-97dBm
-85dBm
Figure 2-17 Edge handover

f) PBGT handover
PBGT also belongs to better cell handover, a handover based on path fading. PBGT
handover algorithm searches for the cell with lower path loss and satisfying the system
requirement on real-time basis so as to judge whether handover is needed. Difference
from other handover algorithms: the trigger condition is path loss and receiving power.
2-64
Feature Description
Triggering condition of PBGT handover: The path loss of the adjacent cell is smaller than
the threshold of the serving cell and the P/N criterion is satisfied within a period of
measurement time. P/N criterion is that there are P satisfying the criterion during N
measurements.
PBGT(n) > PGBT_HO_Margin (n)
In the inequality above, P, N and PBGT_HO_Margin (n) are configured at data
configuration console. PBGT (n) calculates according to the control parameter and the
information reported by BTS.
The method of calculating PBGT (n):
PBGT (n ) = (Min(MS _ TxPWR _ MAX , P ) RxLEV _ DL PWR _ C _ D )
(Min(MS _ TxPWR _ MAX (n ), P ) RxLEV _ NCELL(n ))
Meanings of the parameters:

z
MS TxPWR MAX: maximum transmitting power allowed in the serving cell
MS TxPWR MAX (n): maximum transmitting power allowed in the adjacent cell n
RxLEV_DL: downlink receiving power of the serving cell
RxLEV_NCELL (n): downlink receiving power of the adjacent cell n
PWR_C_D: difference between the maximum downlink transmitting power caused

by power control and the actual downlink transmitting power of the serving cell.
P: maximum transmitting capability of MS
PBGT handover occurs only between cells of the same layer and same level.
g) Load handover
There may be cells with heavy load while their upper layer cell and the adjacent cell
bears less load. To achieve load balance between cells by sharing the load with upper
layer and adjacent cell, the traffic load handover is applied. Its aim is to hand over part of
the traffic in the heavily loaded cell to less loaded cells, and preventing the traffic of the
adjacent cells being handed over to this cell. Load handover can be implemented
between cells within the same BSC. Load handover is illustrated in Figure 2-18.
2-65
Feature Description
High traffic cell

Low traffic cell
Low traffic cell

Heavy traffic cell
High traffic cell
Low traffic cell

Low traffic cell
Figure 2-18 Load handover

The method of realizing load share: by heightening the edge handover threshold towards
that of the serving cell, the traffic at the cell edge will be handed over those with less
traffic. The basis for judging the traffic of a cell is the cell flow (i. e. TCH occupation rate)
and the preset threshold. If the cell flow of a cell is higher than the heavy traffic load
threshold (Load HO Start Threshold ), this cell is consider to have a heavy traffic load,
and the load handover algorithm needs to be activated. If the cell flow of a cell is lower
than the low traffic threshold (Load HO Rx Threshold), it is consider having a low traffic
load, and is allowed to accept the traffic handed over from other heavy traffic load cells.
Since the load handover mechanism is likely to trigger a good number of handovers, the
situation of system CPU load should be taken into consideration before triggering
handover, i. e. system flow level. In addition, to avoid too many handovers happening
simultaneously, the load handover is implemented step by step, i. e. edge handover
threshold will increase by certain step length (CLS_Ramp) and period (CLS_Period).
The increase ends when the threshold reaches the load handover bandwidth
(CLS_Offset). Load handover is illustrated in Figure 2-19.
2-66
Feature Description
Load HO zone
Normal HO border
Cell A
Cell B
CONF_HO_RXLEV
CONF_HO_RXLEV+CLS_Offset
CONF_HO_RXLEV+CLS_Ramp
Figure 2-19 Load handover

h) Hierarchical handover
The GSM network is classified into layers, so as to flexibly direct its traffic and fulfill the
needs of different network structure.
If a cell has a high priority and its signal level is higher than a threshold (Inter-layer HO
Threshold) and satisfy the P/N criterion, the traffic will be handed over to this cell even if
the serving cell can still provide normal services. The purpose of hierarchical handover is
to direct the traffic to the cell with higher priority so that the traffic can be distributed more
reasonably.
i) Fast moving handover
This kind of handover is carried out for fast moving MS to reduce the number of
handover and hence reduced call drop rate.
If MS is moving quickly with micro cell as the reference, it will be handed over to the
macro cell. If the fast moving MS registered in the macro cell, time penalty will be
implemented to the micro cell so that the MS will stay in the macro cell. Fast moving
handover is illustrated in Figure 2-20.
2-67
Feature Description
Umbrella Cell
Micro Cell
Figure 2-20 Fast moving handover

There are two principles for fast moving handover:
z
If the MS is moving fast with the micro cell as the reference, it will be handed over to
the macro cell.
To avoid the fast moving MS registered in macro cell enter the micro cell, time
penalty will be implemented to micro cell.
If the duration of MS camping in a cell is lower than a certain threshold (Fast Moving
Time Threshold), this MS is considering to be moving fast with this cell as the reference.
To avoid miscarriage of justice, P/N measurement will be implemented to several cells. If
the criterion of fast moving is satisfied, this MS will be handed over the macro cells. For
MS registered in macro cell, the method of "timer + penalty" is applied. Before the speed
sensitive timer of a certain micro cell times out, this receiving level of this micro cell will
be punished, so that the position of this micro cell in the cell sequencing will be lowered.
Fast moving handover algorithm can only perform accumulation judgement to the MS
within the same BM and same BSC. When MS moves to another BM, it is necessary to
re-judge.
j) Other handovers
Other handovers include IUO handover, directed retry, forced handover, and extended
cell handover.
3)
Handover procedure
Handover decision algorithm enables the preprocessing of the input MR and decides
whether handover should be done and which type of handover it should be (intra-cell
handover, inter-cell handover in the same BSC, outgoing BSC handover, etc.) according
to the various conditions. Handover decision algorithm sends the message of decided
handover result to call process module, which will complete handover-signaling process
together with BTS, MSC and MS. If a handover fails for a certain reason, call process
2-68
Feature Description
module will notify the handover result to the algorithm, which will decide how to further
process this handover. Handover process is as shown in Figure 2-21.
MR preprocessing
Handover decision algorithm starting decision
MR averaging procesing
Penalty processing of cell measurement value
Basic cell sorting

Adjustment according to network features
Handover decision
Sending handover commands to the call handling module
Call control
Processing of handover results
Figure 2-21 Handover decision process flow chart

Each phase of the process is described as follows.
a) MR preprocessing.
MR provides basic parameters needed in handover decision. MS measures the
receiving quality (RxQual) and receiving level (RxLev) of the downlink of the serving cell
as well as the downlink RxLev of the BCCH carrier frequency of adjacent cells (best six
adjacent cells average). Then MS sends these measurement results to BTS through
SACCH once every 480ms. If SACCH is used for the transmission of other signals, MS
sends the measurement results once every 960ms. BTS measures the RxQual and
RxLev of the corresponding uplink. BTS combines the uplink measurement value and
the downlink measurement value to form a MR message.
2-69
Feature Description
Note:
If messages transmitted on the uplink SACCH do not include the MR (transmitted by MS), the uplink
measurement result will indicate that the MR transmitted by MS is lost.
MR should be preprocessed so that it can have a better reflection of radio links. MR

preprocessing process can be realized in both BTS and BSC and controlled by OMC.
The preprocessing of the MR includes the following three procedures:
MR interpolation processing: When discontinuous MRs are received by BTS or BSC, lost
MRs should be interpolated so as to guarantee the continuity of the whole MR
processing process. This procedure is called MR interpolation. If the number of lost MRs
exceeds a limit, previously received MRs will be regarded as invalid ones and
re-collection is needed.
To eliminate the uncertainty in handover decision, it is necessary to perform smooth
processing over the MRs, or filtering. A simple and practical algorithm is weighted
filtering. Different filter lengths can be respectively defined for different types of
measurement values like the receiving level, receiving quality and TA, or different
channel types like signaling channels, speech and data channels. The receiving level
(RxLev) and receiving quality (RxQual) use corresponding assumed value for
calculations, as shown in Table 2-7, and Table 2-8.
Table 2-7 Receiving level calculation assumed value
RxLev number
0
1
2
62
63
Implication
< -110dBm
-110dBm~109dBm
-109dBm~-108dBm
-49dBm ~ -48dBm
> -48dBm
Assumed value
-110dBm
-109dBm
-108dBm
-48dBm
-47dBm
Table 2-8 Receiving quality calculation assumed value

RxQual number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BER range
Assumed value
< 0. 2%
0. 2% ~ 0. 4%
0. 4% ~ 0. 8%
0. 8% ~ 1. 6%
1. 6% ~ 3. 2%
3. 2% ~ 6. 4%
6. 4% ~ 12. 8%
> 12. 8%
0. 14%
0. 28%
0. 57%
1. 13%
2. 26%
4. 53%
9. 05%
18. 10%
2-70
Calculated value
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Feature Description
The MR represents the condition of radio channels in the previous measurement cycle,
so it is of hysteresis to some extent. The prediction algorithm is mainly responsible for
MR values for the next cycle(s) based on the radio environment changes prediction. MR
prediction is a process that can be selected by the operator.
When the multiplexing on the Abis interface is 15:1, every 4 signaling links multiplex a
64kbit/s timeslot statistically. MR is transmitted through RSL. In order to minimize
signaling transmission error bit, when Abis interface multiplexing mode is 15:1, MR
processing mode requires that MR should be a preprocessed one instead of the original
one. Moreover, MR reporting frequency can adopt interval reporting. It can be realized
with data configuration: in [Cell/Modify Cell's Handover parameter/Modify Handover
Parameter/HO Control Data], modify [BTS Measurement Report Preprocessing],
[Transfer Original Measurement Report] and [Report Freq. of Preprocessed
Measurement Report]. Accordingly, the emergency handover due to fast level dropping
is decided by BTS. And the BSC will forward the decision. For other handovers
completed within BSC, handover decisions and processing are still carried out in the
BSC.
b) Handover decision algorithm starting decision
Judge whether basic conditions for handover are satisfied, such as whether there are
enough MRs. If conditions are satisfied, handover decision algorithm is started.
c) MR averaging processing
Filter MRs according to a certain algorithm, cancel their noise, and smooth MRs, thus to
prevent incorrect handovers due to individual interference.
d) Penalty processing of cell measurement value
Practically there is a possibility that a handover can not be successful. In case the
handover to the selected target cell fails, the MS will stick to the original serving cell. After
the cycle of a handover decision is finished, the system might try to hand over the MS to
the above-mentioned target cell again, which might cause invalid handover attempt or
handover failure, or even interruption. Therefore, the target cell shall be punished, which
is to reduce the receiving power of the corresponding cell by a set penalty value for a
period (called the penalty time).
Penalty types include the penalty of the forsaken cell due to TA value, penalty of the
forsaken cell due to bad quality (BQ), penalty to the failed cell due to ordinary handover
failure, and fast-moving penalty (this is a penalty imposed on the microcell in the
candidate queue in order to prevent frequent handover when the fast moving MS
accesses a cell of small coverage).
e) Basic cell sorting.
2-71
Feature Description
Adjacent cells that have been imposed penalty and the serving cell are sorted through a
certain algorithm, thus the position of each cell is located. This is to get ready for final
handover.
f) Adjustment according to network features
To adjust candidate queue through a certain algorithm according to hierarchical network,
cell priority, speed sensibility, and the specific network environment.
g) Handover decision
Handover decision algorithm is used to decide the time to start handover and the target
cell to be handed over. Confirm the candidate cell queue list, adjust cells adjusted in last
procedure and finalize a uniform clear list of cells that are ready to be handed over.
h) Sending handover commands to the call handling module
After making the handover decision with the algorithm and deciding to execute the
handover, BSC sends handover message containing the type of incoming handover to
the call-handling module, then the latter starts the signaling procedures for this handover.
i) Processing of handover results
After the call handling module has processed handover signaling, it returns the result to
the handover decision module. If the handover fails, the handover decision module will
start penalty to the cell responsible for the failure. If the handover is successful, the
module will set a new handover interval timer to avoid frequent handovers.

In data configuration console, enter the dynamic data configuration mode.
1)
TA Handover
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Handover Parameter /

Emergency HO Data]
Parameter: TA Thrsh.
Description: When the TA exceeds this value, the emergency handover will be
triggered.
Value range: 0~255
Default:Default: 63(Normal cell), 219(Dual timeslot extension cell)
[Cell/Modify Cell's Handover Parameter/Modify Handover Parameter / Filter &
Penalty Data]
Parameter: Filter Length for TA
Description: Indicates the number of MRs to be used to do TA averaging calculation.
2-72
Feature Description
Value range: 1~32

Default: 6
Parameter: Penalty Time after TA HO Fail.
Description: When the emergency handover due to too great TA value in a cell and the
emergency handover fails; In order to avoid handing over back to this cell and
"Ping-Pong" handover, a signal level penalty will be given to this cell. This parameter
indicates the duration for penalty.
Unit: second
Value range: 0~60
Default: 10
Parameter: Penalty Level after TA HO Fail.
Description: When the emergency handover due to too great TA value in a cell and the
emergency handover fails; In order to avoid handing over back to this cell and
"Ping-Pong" handover, a signal level penalty will be given to this cell. This parameter is
the penalty of signal level to be given. This penalty is valid only during the duration of
Penalty Time after TA HO Fail.
Unit: Level
Value range: 0~63
Default: 63
2)
BQ Handover

Emergency HO Data]
Parameter: UL Qual. Thrsh.
Description: Indicates the uplink receiving quality threshold in order to trigger
emergency handover due to the bad quality. When frequency hopping or DTX is used, it
is recommended to set the value of this parameter to 70. When an emergency handover
is triggered, the first-choice target cell is other cell. Only when there is no other cell
serving as candidate cell and the Intra-cell HO allowed is Yes will the intra-cell
handover be triggered.
Value range: 0~70 corresponding to RQ (quality level 0~7) 10
Default: 60
Parameter: DL Qual. Thrsh.
2-73
Feature Description
Description: Indicates the downlink receiving quality threshold in order to trigger

emergency handover due to the bad quality. When frequency hopping or DTX is used, it
is recommended to set the value of this parameter to 70. When an emergency handover
is triggered, the first-choice target cell is other cell. Only when there is no other cell
serving as candidate cell and the Intra-cell HO allowed is Yes will the intra-cell
handover be triggered.
Value range: 0~70 corresponding to RQ (quality level 0~7) 10
Default: 60
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Handover Parameter / Filter &
Penalty Data]
Parameter: Filter Length for TCH Level
Description:
Indicates the number of MRs to be used to do Speech/Data Channel (TCH) signal level
averaging calculation. When the filtering window is set to be too large, the impact of
sudden change will be reduced, as well as the response speed for this kind of sudden
change will be slower.
Value range: 1~32
Default: 6
Parameter: Filter Length for SD Qual.
Description: Indicates the number of MRs to be used to do Signaling Channel (SDCCH)
signal quality averaging calculation. The SDCCH occupation time by MS is shorter than
the TCH occupation time, so the value of this parameter should be less than that of Filter
Length for TCH Qual
Value range: 1~32
Default: 3
Penalty Data]
Parameter: Penalty Time after BQ HO Fail.
Description: When the emergency handover to a cell and the emergency handover fails;
in order to avoid handing over back to this cell and "Ping-Pong" handover, a signal level
penalty will be given to this cell. This parameter is the penalty of signal level to be given.
This parameter indicates the duration for penalty.
Unit: Second.
Value range: 0~60
2-74
Feature Description
Default: 10
Parameter: Penalty Level after BQ HO Fail.
Description: When the emergency handover to a cell and the emergency handover fails;
in order to avoid handing over back to this cell and "Ping-Pong" handover, a signal level
penalty will be given to this cell. This parameter is the penalty of signal level to be given.
This penalty is valid only during the duration of Penalty Time after BQ HO Fail.
Unit: dB
Value range: 0~63
Default: 63
3)
Level rapid dropping handover
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Handover Parameter / HO

Control Data]
Parameter: Rx_Level_Drop HO AllowedDescription: The parameter decides
whether to use the emergency handover algorithm when receiving level drops fast.
Generally, this algorithm is used only when suitable conditions satisfied. It will never be
enabled if "Transfer Original MR" is set to No.
Value range: Yes/No
Default: No
Emergency HO Data]
Parameter: Filter parameter A1~A8
Description: Parameters for level fast drop filter, totally 9 parameters, including the filter
parameter B. The actual values of A1~A8=(A1~A8)-10. The actual parameter B value =
minus value of the B value is set. Their working formula is as follows:
C1 (nt)=A1%C(nt)+A2%C(nt-t)+A3%C(nt-2t)++A8%C(nt-7t), where:
C (nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt.
If C1 (nt)<B, and C(nt) is below the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level
is regarded to be fast deteriorating.
Value range: 0~20
Default: 10
Parameter: Filter parameter B
Description: Used for the fast drop filter. See the following table for reference about the
relation between quality class and BER.
2-75
Feature Description
Quality class
BER
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Less than 0. 2%
0.2% to 0.4%
0.4% to 0.8%
0.8% to 1.6%
1.6% to 3.2%
3.2% to 6.4%
6.4% to 12.8%
Greater than 12.8%
Value range: 0~255

Default: 0
4)
Interference handover
[Cell/Modify Cell's Handover Parameter/ Modify Handover Parameter / Emergency

HO Data]
Parameter: UL Qual. Thrsh. for Interf. HO
Description: Indicates the uplink receiving quality threshold in order to trigger
emergency handover due to interference. When frequency hopping or DTX is used, it is
recommended to set the value of this parameter to 60. When an emergency handover is
triggered, the first-choice target cell is other cell. Only when there is no other cell serving
as candidate cell and the Intra-cell HO allowed is Yes will the intra-cell handover be
triggered.
Unit: Quality level.
Value range: 0~70 corresponding to RQ (quality level 0~7)10
Default: 50
Parameter: DL Qual. Thrsh. for Interf. HO
Description: Indicates the downlink receiving quality threshold in order to trigger
emergency handover due to interference. When frequency hopping or DTX is used, it is
recommended to set the value of this parameter to 60. When an emergency handover is
triggered, the first-choice target cell is other cell. Only when there is no other cell serving
as candidate cell and the Intra-cell HO allowed is Yes will the intra-cell handover be
triggered.
Value range: 0~70 corresponding to RQ (quality level 0~7)10
Default: 50
Parameter: UL RX_LEV Thrsh. for Interf. HO
Description: Only when the Rx Quality is very bad and the Rx Level exceed a certain
threshold will the system regard there is interference. This parameter indicates that the
2-76
Feature Description
threshold for uplink Rx Level. When an emergency handover is triggered, the first-choice
target cell is other cell. Only when there is no other cell serving as candidate cell and the
Intra-cell HO allowed are Yes will the intra-cell handover be triggered.
Unit: dB.
Value range: 0~63 (-110dBm~-47dBm)
Default: 25
Parameter: DL RX_LEV Thrsh. for Interf. HO
Description: Only when the Rx Quality is very bad and the Rx Level exceed a certain
threshold will the system regard there is interference. This parameter indicates the
threshold for downlink Rx Level. When an emergency handover is triggered, the
first-choice target cell is other cell. Only when there is no other cell serving as candidate
cell and the Intra-cell HO allowed are Yes will the intra-cell handover be triggered.
Unit: dB.
Value range: 0~63
Default: 30
5)
Edge handover
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Handover Parameter / Cell HO

Data]
Parameter: Edge HO UL RX_LEV Thrsh.
Description: Edge handover uplink receiving level threshold. The edge handover will be
triggered if the uplink receiving level is constantly lower than Edge HO UL RX_LEV
Thrsh. within a period of time. If PBGT HO allowed is set to Yes, the corresponding
edge handover threshold will be lowered. In the case that PBGT HO allowed is set to
No, too low value of the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Thrsh is likely to cause overlapping
coverage and co-channel interference.
Unit: grade
Default:
25 for urban areas without PBGT handover being enabled, urban)
20 for remote suburbs
20 for urban areas with PBGT handover being enabled
Parameter: Edge HO DL RX_LEV Thrsh
2-77
Feature Description
Description: Edge handover downlink receiving level threshold. The edge handover will
be triggered if the downlink receiving level is constantly lower than Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Thrsh. within a period of time. If PBGT HO allowed is set to Yes, the
corresponding edge handover threshold will be lowered. In the case that PBGT HO
allowed is set to No, too low value of the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Thrsh. is likely to cause
overlapping coverage and co-channel interference.
Unit: grade
Default: 13
Parameter: Edge HO watch time
Description: A period of time to measure uplink and downlink receiving level so as to
judge whether it is edge HO. i. e. the N in P/N mentioned above. Unit: Second.
Value range: 1~16
Default: 5
Parameter: Edge HO valid time
Description: During deciding edge handover, within the edge handover statistics time,
the duration to keep uplink or downlink receiving level lower than its edge handover
threshold. i. e. the P in P/N mentioned above. Unit: Second.
Value range: 1~16
Default: 4
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Adjacent Relationship]
Parameter: Inter-cell HO Hysteresis
Description: The handover hysteresis between adjacent cells at the same layer. The
purpose of this parameter is to reduce Ping-Pong effect. It is symmetrically distributed.
This value will be invalid if cells are in different layers.
Unit: dB.
Value range: 0~63
Default: 4 dB populous urban areas and 8 dB for suburbs.
6)
PBGT handover

Control Data]
Parameter: PBGT HO Allowed
2-78
Feature Description
Description: Whether the PBGT handover algorithm is used.

Value range: Yes/No
Default: Yes
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Adjacent Relationship]
Parameter: PBGT HO Threshold
Description: A threshold in PBGT handover algorithm used to judge whether to perform
PBGT handover. When PBGT Handover Allowed is set to Yes and "Inter-cell HO
hysteresis"> "PBGT HO Threshold, the "Inter-cell HO hysteresis" will act instead of the
"PBGT HO Threshold."
Unit: dB.
Value range: 0~127 corresponding to -64~63dB
Default: 68 for popular urban areas, 72 for suburbs.
Data]
Parameter: PBGT Watch Time
Description: The path losses of adjacent cells and the serving cell are compared with
PBGT watch time so as to determine whether the PBGT handover is triggered.
Unit: Second
Value range: 0~16
Default: 5
Parameter: PBGT Valid Time
Description: The PBGT handover will be triggered when the path loss of adjacent cells
the path loss of the serving cell > PBGT HO Thrsh. lasts PBGT valid time.
Unit: Second
Value range: 0~16
Default: 4
7)
Load handover

Control Data]
Parameter: Allow load handover
2-79
Feature Description
Description: Indicates whether Traffic load-sharing handover is allowed. Load-sharing

can reduce the cell congestion and balance the traffic load for each cell so as to improve
network performance. It works only in the same BSC or in cells of the same layer. It is
used only for TCH. Extra interference might be resulted from tight frequency reuse.
Value range: Yes/No
Default: Yes
Data]
Parameter: System Flux Thrsh. for Load HO flux level threshold
Description: The load handover occurs only when the system load is lower than a
certain threshold. This parameter indicates the threshold. The value of this parameter
cannot be too great.-Unexpected consequence might occur when the system load is
very high. The value of this parameter corresponds to TCH occupancy percentage..
Unit: %
Value range: 0, 8~11 (corresponding to percentage 0, 70, 80, 90, and 95 respectively)
Default: 10
Parameter: Load HO Thrsh.
Description: The load handover will be triggered when the load of a cell exceeds Load
HO Thrsh.. The value of this parameter corresponds to TCH occupancy percentage.
Unit: %
Value range: 0~7 (corresponding to 0, 50, 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, and 90 respectively).
Default: 5
Parameter: Load Req. on Candiate Cell
Description: The target cell is able to receive the handovers from other cells only when
the load of the target cell is lower than Load Req. on candidate cell. Otherwise, this cell
refuses any handover request from other cells.
Unit: %
Value range: 0~7 (corresponding to percentage: 0, 50, 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90
respectively.
Default: 2
Parameter: Load HO Bandwidth
2-80
Feature Description
Description: This parameter works together with other parameters to determine

whether the handover is allowed. Only when the RX_Level of the serving cell is within the
range of (Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh. + Load HO bandwidth)
then the handover will be allowed.
Unit: dB.
Value range: 0~63
Default: 25
Parameter: Load HO Step Period
Description: When a cell is qualified for handover, handover requests might be sent for
all connections simultaneously. It will cause a sudden increase of CPU load and call-drop
due to the congestion of the target cell. Therefore, these requests will be divided into
bands based on the receiving level. For example, band1 is within the range (Edge HO
RX_LEV Thrsh., Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh. + Load HO step period); band2 is within the
range (Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh. + Load HO step period, Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh. + 2
Load HO step period), and so on. Handovers are performed band by band from the edge
to the inner.
Unit: Second.
Value range: 1~60
Default: 10
Parameter: Load HO Step Level
Description: This parameter indicates the interval between two different handover
bands. See the description of HO step level.
Unit: dB.
Value range: 1~63
Default: 5
8)
Layered and hierarchical handover.
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Handover Parameter / Cell

Description Data]
Parameter: Layer of The Cell
Description: The whole network of designed by Huawei has four layers as the basic
frame: Umbrella layer Macro layer, Micro layer and PICO layer. Each layer can be set
with 16 priorities. This provides abundant space for carriers network planning so as to
meet the requirement of various complicated networking environments. Among them,
2-81
Feature Description
Macro layer is the main GSM900 layer, Micro layer is the main GSM1800 layer, PICO is
the GSM900 and GSM1800 micro layer.
Unit: layer
Value range: 1~4 (corresponding to: PICO layer, MICRO layer, MACRO layer, and
Umbrella layer)
Default: 3
Parameter: Cell Priority
Description: Used to control the handover priority of cells in the same layer. Generally,
the priority of cells in the same layer is configured with the same value. For cells in
different layers, the smaller layer number, and the higher priority; for cells in the same
layer, the lower priority value, the higher priority.
Unit: Grade
Value range: 1~16
Default: 1
Parameter: Inter-layer HO Thrsh.
Description: The threshold for inter-layer Hierarchical Handover. This threshold should
satisfy the following requirement: Inter-layer HO Thrsh. Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh. +
Inter-cell HO hysteresis.
Unit: grade
Value range: 0~63. (-110dBm~-47dBm)
Default: 25
Parameter: Inter-layer HO hysteresis
Description: Indicates the hysteresis for inter-layer or inter-priority handover. It is used
to avoid inter-layer Ping-Pong handover. Actual Inter-layer HO Thrsh. of serving cell =
value of Inter-layer HO Thrsh. - Inter-layer HO hysteresis. Actual Inter-layer HO Thrsh. of
adjacent cell = value of Inter-layer HO Thrsh. + Inter-layer HO hysteresis.
Unit: dB.
Value range: 0~63
Default: 3
Data]
Parameter: Layer HO watch time e
2-82
Feature Description
Description: The statistics duration for sorting these cells when there are better cells
with higher priorities, i. e. the N in P/N mentioned above.
Unit: Second.
Value range: 1~16
Default: 5
Parameter: Layer HO valid time
Description: The duration that a cell with higher priority keeps ranking first in the whole
statistics duration. If a cell can keep ranking first for this duration, the cell will be decided
to be the best cell, i. e. P in P/N mentioned above. Unit: Second.
Value range: 1~16
Default: 4
9)
Fast Moving handover

Control Data]
Parameter: MS Fast Moving HO Allowed
Description: The fast moving algorithm is a special algorithm to process fast moving MS.
This parameter is used to decide whether to use this algorithm.
Value range: Yes/No
Default: No
Data]
Parameter: MS Fast-moving Watch cells
Description: The number of cells used to judge whether an MS is in fast moving state.
Too great the value of this parameter will increase the system load and too small the
value will cause inaccurate judgement.
Value range: 1~10
Default: 3
Parameter: MS Fast-moving Valid cells
Description: This parameter works together with MS Fast-moving Watch cells. When
an MS has achieved the value set in MS Fast-moving Watch cells, and if there are MS
Fast-moving Valid cells that are crossed fast. In this case, fast moving handover will be
triggered.
2-83
Feature Description
Value range: 1~10

Default: 2
Parameter: MS Fast-moving time Thrsh.
Description: If the time of an MS spent on crossing a cell is lower than MS Fast-moving
time Thrsh. , the MS will be regarded as moving fast.
Unit: Second
Value range: 0~255
Default: 15
Description Data]
Parameter: Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO
Description: When MS is moving fast in Umbrella layer, the penalty will be given to
other adjacent cells in other layers. This parameter determines the penalty level value.
This parameter is valid only for the duration of Penalty Time on MS Fast Moving HO
Unit: dB.
Value range: 0~63
Default: 30
Parameter: Penalty Time on MS Fast moving HO
Description: The duration of penalty given to the adjacent cells when MS is in fast
moving state.
Unit: Second
Value range: 0~255
Default: 40
2.2.2 Power Control

I. Overview
As an important method to control radio link, power control adjusts the transmit power of
MS and BTS according to the expected value configured in OMC data management
system, the receiving level (including uplink and downlink) from BTS and the MR of
receiving quality. Basic rules for power control are:
2-84
Feature Description
1)
When the level or signal quality is higher than the expected value, the power should
be decreased accordingly.
2)
When the level or signal quality is lower than the expected value, the power should
be increased accordingly.
3)
The level and signal quality should be both considered so as to improve the
accuracy and effectiveness.
The nature of a cellular system requires that the output power of the BSC and MS should
be set as low as possible. With the limited resource of the RF spectrum cellular systems
depend upon the reuse of the RF channels. The reuse distance between these channels
mainly upon the subscriber density in a particular area, the greater the density the
shorter the reuse distance. By keeping the MS and BSC at the minimum acceptable
power output it reduces the chances of interference, particularly co-channel.
Another benefit of effective power control is that the battery of MS is extended, thus
maximizing available talking time.
Huawei BSS offers three different algorithms for the implementation of power control,
which is GSM 0508 power control algorithm, and Huawei I (HW_I) and Huawei II (HW_II)
algorithms. Any algorithm can be selected among these three algorithms. HW_I and
HW_II algorithms are recommended due to their flexible configurations, effectiveness,
easy operations and easy command. These Huawei-developed algorithms are
compatible nicely with the GSM900 and GSM1800 systems.

1)
Power control classification
Power control comprises uplink and downlink power controls, which are executed
separately. The uplink power control is for MS while the downlink power control is for
BTS.
a) MS power control
The purpose of MS power control is to adjust the MS output power in order to achieve the
stable receiving signal so as to reduce the interference from subscribers of adjacent
channels, decrease the saturation degree of BTS multicoupler and reduce MS power
consumption.
The MS power control is divided into two adjusting stages, i.e., the stable adjusting stage
and the initial adjusting stage. The stable adjusting is the normal method for performing
the power control algorithm, while the initial adjusting is used in the time when the call
connection is initially started. When a connection is performed, MS is output as the
nominal power of the cell where it is located (the nominal power indicates that the MS
transmitting power is the MS maximum transmitting power MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH in
the broadcast system messages on the BCCH channel of the cell where it is located. If
MS does not support this power class, the supported power class that is nearest to it will
2-85
Feature Description
be utilized, such as the maximum output power class supported by the reported MS
Classmark in the establishment indication message). However, since BTS may
simultaneously support multiple calls, the receiving signal intensity should be reduced in
a new connection as quick as possible, otherwise, the quality of other call supported by
this BTS may be deteriorated due to the saturation of the BTS multi-coupler, and the call
quality of other cells may be affected due to the high interference. Therefore, the purpose
of the initial stage power control adjusting is to reduce the MS transmitting power as
quick as possible until the stable measurement report is obtained, so that the MS can be
adjusted according to the stable power control algorithm.
The parameters that must be selected in the uplink power control, such as the expected
desirable uplink receiving level, desirable uplink receiving quality, etc. , are all set by the
O&M data management console, the data configuration can be dynamically carried out
according to the actual situations of the cell. After a given number of the uplink
measurement reports is received, by the processing methods such as interpolation and
filtering, the actual uplink receiving level and the receiving quality are obtained, then they
are compared with the desirable uplink receiving level and the receiving quality, with the
power control algorithm, the power class to which the MS should be adjusted is
calculated; if it is different from the current MS output power class and meets a given
application restricted conditions (such as the power adjusting step length restriction, MS
output power range restriction), the power adjusting command is sent. The essence of
the uplink power control adjusting is to enable the actual uplink receiving level and
receiving quality obtained from interpolation and filtering to progressively approach the
desirable uplink receiving level and receiving quality set by O&M. The purpose for the
interpolation and filtering of the measurement reports is to process the lost measurement
report, clear the temporary nature (spiffiness), so as to ensure the stability of the power
control algorithm.
The difference between power controls in initial phase and stable phase is that their
expected uplink receiving levels and receiving qualities, filter lengths are different, and
the former one only adjusts downwards.
b) BTS power control
The BTS power control is an optional function. The base station power control is
basically identical to the MS power control, except that the base power control utilizes
only the stable power control algorithm. The parameters that must be selected in the
power control include the receiving level threshold (lower limitation) to be performed the
power control and the receivable maximum sending level threshold (upper limitation).
The receiving level RXLEV is divided into 64 classes, with numbers from 0 to 63, class 0
of the receiving level is the lowest, while the class 63 of the receiving level is the highest.
The base station power control is divided into the static power control and the dynamic
power control, the later is the fine adjusting based on the former. The GSM 05.05
protocol specification specifies that the base station static power class is divided into 6
2-86
Feature Description
(2dB/per class), when the maximum power output by the base station is 46dBm (40W),
the class 6 is 34 dBm. The static power level is defined in the cell attribute table of the
data management console, i. e., the maximum output power value Pn of the current
dynamic power control is specified. As the dynamic power control classes are set to 15,
the range of the dynamic power control is Pn-Pn-30dB. If the requirements cannot be
satisfied when the dynamic power control reaches its maximum value, the static power
control classes should be adjusted to increase the maximum output power value Pn of
the dynamic power control. enable the actual uplink receiving level and receiving quality
obtained from interpolation and filtering to progressively approach the desirable uplink
receiving level and receiving quality set by O&M. The purpose for the interpolation and
filtering of the measurement reports is to process the lost measurement report, clear the
temporary nature (spilliness), so as to ensure the stability of the power control algorithm.
2)
Execution process of power control
There are 3 MR cycles from sending command to execution, as shown in Figure 2-22.
In the 26 multiframe
the 12th frame is for
Report period of SACCH:
sending SACCH
26 4104 frame (480ms)
SA0
SA1 SA2
BTS transmifs the command

of adjust power and TA at
SACCH header
SA3
SA0
SA1
SA2 SA3
SA1 SA2
SA3
MS starts to send the

messurement report of
the previous multi-frame
MS adopts new
powerand TA
MS obtains SACCH block
SA0
MS Generates new SACCH BTS receives the

header to report new TA and measurement report
power control message
Figure 2-22 Power control execution process

a) In the first MR cycle, MS receives the power regulation message carried by SACCH
header on dedicated channel and the first layer header carried by a downlink SACCH
message block. MS will execute the power control command in next cycle instead of
upon the receipt of these headers in first cycle.
b) In the second MR cycle, power control is executed. The maximum rate of change of
MS power is 2dB/13 frame (60ms). If the regulation step length is 8, i. e. 82=16dB. It
needs 104 frames (i. e. 480ms, one MR cycle) to complete power regulation. If the
regulation step length is 16, i. e. 162=32dB. It takes 2 MR cycleS to complete power
regulation.
2-87
Feature Description
c) In the third cycle, the current transmit power (refers to the power level used by the last
burst pulse of SACCH MS cycle) is stored, which will be reported to BTS in next SACCH
uplink MR.
3)
Power Control Algorithm
BSC can dynamically implement power control on each MS and BTS Three algorithms
can be adopted as power control algorithm: GSM 0508 algorithm, HW_I algorithm and
HW_II algorithm. Algorithm process is as shown in Figure 2-23
MR Preprocessing
Power Control Algorithm selection
GSM0508 power control algorithm
HW_I Power control algorithm
HW_II Power control algorithm
Figure 2-23 Power control algorithm selection

Power control algorithm is specified in the 0508 protocols (for further details refer to the
related specifications). For uplink, upper limit and lower limit thresholds are set for the
receiving signal level and the receiving signal quality. Counters P' and N' are used to
count the MR and the values of these counters can be set through OMC. When N' MRs
in the consecutively received P' MRs exceeds the above threshold, power regulation will
be executed.
Usually the steps for power control are:
z
MR preprocessing
Power calculation
Power control decision
Adjustment by sending power control commands
4)
Huawei HW_I algorithm
Huawei HW_I has following features:

z
Compared with protocol algorithm, the initial state regulation is added.
Data configuration is rather complicated. The power control adjustment involves

many parameters and complicated calculation.
Power control decision is the sum of the level and quality, and the expected value is
just a specified value instead of a range. Once the adjustment results of the
2-88
Feature Description
receiving level and receiving quality are contrary, the power control will never stop
and the level fluctuates with the expected value.
Power control decision process
HW_I algorithm power control decision process is as shown in Figure 2-24.
MR pre-processing
Satisfying power
control target
N
Power control calculation
and regulation cinitial
state and stable state
Figure 2-24 HW_I algorithm power control decision process

b) Measurement Report
In order to implement power control decision, various kinds of information about the
current communications status from MS and BTS should be collected, including
receiving signal level, and communication quality etc. Network side on SACCH will
receive MRs from MS and BTS every 480 ms, in which various kinds of information
needed for power control decision are contained. The process of MS reporting is as
shown in Figure 2-25.
2-89
Feature Description
MR
MR
MR
MR
Uplink
measurement
Downlink
measurement
Figure 2-25 Reporting MR

An example of BSS MR is shown in Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 MR example
2-90
Feature Description
c) MR preprocessing.
Interpolation: each MR has a serial number. If the serial numbers of received MRs are
found not continuous, this means that there are some MRs gets lost. In this case,
network will add all lost MRs according to interpolation algorithm.
Filtering: Several continuous MRs results will be used to reflect the state of MS in a
period of time thus to avoid the one-sidedness caused by judging the state of MS
according to only one MR result.
d) Power control decision
Number of transmit power to be adjusted
(Expected stable signal level - current receiving signaling level) uplink (downlink)
compensating factor + (current actual receiving uplink (downlink) quality expected
uplink (downlink) quality) 10 uplink (downlink) quality compensating factor
Caution:
The last regulated power level cannot exceed the maximum power control step length.
Actual stable level equals to the sum of current actual level and transmit power to be
regulated
During the process of judging power control level to be adjusted, it needs to search
tolerance table according to the level of current transmit power. If the final power
regulation level is with the tolerance range, the regulation is unnecessary. GSM1800
tolerance table is shown in Table 2-9.
Table 2-9 GSM1800 tolerance table
Level
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
Tolerance
GSM900 tolerance table is shown in Table 2-10.

Table 2-10 GSM900 tolerance table
Level
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
Tolerance
2-91
Feature Description
The similarities and difference of HW_I algorithm uplink power control and downlink
power control is as follows:
Similarities:
z
In order to avoid the fluctuation caused by power controls, the interval between two
continuous controls is specified for both uplink and downlink.
In order to not being affected by unexpected factors, all MRs should be filtered.
Both uplink and downlink power controls have power control on level and quality
respectively.
Both have maximum power control step length and compensating factor.
Difference:
z
MS has power control not only for stable state but also for initial connecting phase
before a call is connected. The purpose is to lower MS transmit power as soon as
possible.
Uplink has measures to improve transmit power in the case of MS handover failure.
Downlink has the restriction for both maximum and minimum MS transmit power.
5)
Huawei HW_II algorithm
Compared with HW_I, HW_II has following advantages:

z
MR compensation, which makes the power control decision more accurate.
MR prediction, which reduces power control delay.
Adaptive power control, which sufficiently guarantees the algorithm stability and
high efficiency.
Keep power control target within the range between upper limit and lower limit so as
to avoid power control fluctuation.
Easy and flexible data configuration, which guarantees effective regulation of

network optimized parameters.
a) Power control decision process

HW_II power control decision process is as shown in Figure 2-27.
2-92
Feature Description
MR pre-processing
Power control requested

by receiving level
Power control requested

by receicing quality
Conprehensive decision
of power control
Figure 2-27 HW_II power control decision process

b) Request power control according to level
z
After the preprocessing of MR, power control module compares the current
receiving level with expected value.
Then the transmit level step length is calculated. The regulation is to make the
receiving level closer to the expected value.
When receiving level regulates transmit power, variable step length can be adopted
so that the quick power control can be obtained.
c) Request power control according to receiving quality

After the preprocessing of MR, power control module compares the evaluation value of
the current receiving quality with expected value.
z
Calculate the transmit step length to be regulated
Improving transmitting power for low receiving quality.
Decreasing transmitting power for high receiving quality.
Do not adjust the transmitting power when the receiving quality fallsbetween the
upper/lower thresholds.
d) Comprehensive decision of power control

Comprehensive decision of power control is shown in Table 2-11.
Table 2-11 Table of comprehensive decision of power control
Receiving level power control
regulation
AdjStep_Lev
Receiving quality power control

regulation
AdjStep_Qul
2-93
Comprehensive decision of
power control
MAX(AdjStep_Lev, AdjStep_Qul)
Feature Description
AdjStep_Lev
AdjStep_Lev
AdjStep_Lev
AdjStep_Lev
AdjStep_Lev
No action
No action
No action

AdjStep_Qul
No action
AdjStep_Qul
AdjStep_Qul
No action
AdjStep_Qul
AdjStep_Qul
No action
No action
AdjStep_Lev
AdjStep_Lev
MAX(AdjStep_Lev, AdjStep_Qul)
AdjStep_Lev
AdjStep_Qul
AdjStep_Qul
No action
e) MR compensation
Power control module will extract the receiving level and receiving quality of some history
MRs when it implements power control decision. These MRs might be obtained in
different transmit powers. In order to guarantee the accuracy of receiving level to be
used, if the transmit powers in these MRs are different, the receiving level value of
history MRs should be compensated. The interpolated and compensated MRs are
filtered so as to make control power decision more effective.
f) Predict filtering
The power control is a process of transmitting power control based upon the current
received level and the receiving quality. The sending and transmission of power control
command and power adjustment will take certain period of time, so there will exist certain
hysteresis between the receiving change and corresponding transmitting power
adjustment.Filtering prediction enables MR on which power control decision is based to
get closer to the state of power regulation so as to erase delay effectively.
MR filtering prediction is implemented in a very short time and changes of receiving level
and quality are likely to be continuous. N MRs before the current time are used for
weighted filtering, then 0~3 MRs of after the current time are predicted. Generally, there
are 3 MRs between power control decision and power regulation, which is about 1.5
second. As a consequence, the accuracy of prediction is guaranteed. Power control
decision is made after the filtering of predicted MRs, interpolated MRs, and
compensated history MRs.
g) Dual threshold power control algorithm
Dual threshold power control algorithm adopts the following three strategies:
Adjust power control step length according to receiving level: The final purpose of power
control is to obtain the best communication quality at the lowest level. However, due to
the instability of radio link and the external interference, transmit power cannot be
lowered greatly. Therefore, HW_II adopts the power control strategy of dual threshold so
as to try to keep receiving within two thresholds.
Adjust power step length according receiving quality: Generally, the change of receiving
quality is associated with interference. The main interference of GSM comes to same
2-94
Feature Description
frequency interference generated from frequency multiplexing. This interference is

interactive. One call increases its power means that it exerts a stronger interference on
the other call. Therefore, the power regulation caused by the change of receiving quality
should avoid the group effect of increasing transmit power due to bad quality. Receiving
quality threshold is also set with dual thresholds. Receiving quality with the range
between two thresholds needs not to adjust transmit power. While receiving quality
beyond the range should be adjusted. For the power regulation caused by quality factor
should use fixed step length to avoid.
Considering both power control strategies of receiving level and receiving quality
regulation. Considering the requirements of both level and quality. On one hand, both
requirements should be satisfied as much as possible; on the other hand, in the case that
the requirements are not consistent or completely contrary, the stability should be fully
considered to prohibit the unstable regulation process. Therefore, the effect on power
control caused by level and quality should be both considered.
h) Variable step length power control
When variable step length regulation is adopted, if that the level or quality is greatly
different from its expected value, use the larger step length to quickly adjust power; in the
case that the level or quality is slightly different from its expected value, use the smaller
step length to adjust power. Thus, quick and accurate power regulation is achieved.
i) Adaptive power control
Adaptive power control is to change power control strategy according different
communication environments. This fact leads to a more effective and more stable power
control. This is reflected in following two aspects:
z
Power control adjustable maximum step length can be adjusted automatically

according to the different communication environments.
The different power control strategies are adopted for different communication
environments.

1)
HW_I algorithm parameters
[Cell/Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter/ Modify Power Control Parameter /

MS Power Control]
Parameter: Initial RX_LEV Expected
Description: Signal level expected at the BTS receiver at the initial stage. The specific
value can be determined in reference to the actual cell planning and the cell
geographical environment, Normally, its value should be greater than the signal level in a
stable state.
Unit: grade
2-95
Feature Description
Value range: 0~63

Default: 30
Parameter: Stable RX_LEV Expected
Description: The expected signal level (usually refers to the signal level at the edge of
adjustment area) obtained from BTS receiver under stable state. The Stable RX_LEV
Expected should be greater than uplink Rxlev threshold (edge HO). Otherwise, the
Ping-Pong handover caused by power control will occur.
Unit: grade.
Value range: 0~63
Default: 30
Parameter: Uplink RX_LEV Compensation
Description: The parameter required for calculating power adjustment, indicating the
weight value that the difference between the actual and expected Rx levels affects MS
transmitting power.
Value range: 0~100
Unit: %
Default: 80 Indicate when the difference between the current level and the ideal level is
5dB, power is adjusted by 4 dB, i.e., (5*80/100)
Parameter: UL Qual. Expected
Description: Indicate the signal quality received at the BTS receiver in the expected
stable state.
Value range: 0~7
Unit: grade
Default: 1
Parameter: UL Qual. Compensation
Description: Every power adjustment amplitude varies according to the difference
between actual uplink quality and expected uplink quality. As the weight function of this
difference, provided the difference is fixed, the greater uplink quality compen factor is,
the larger amplitude should be adjusted.
Value range: 0~100
Unit: %
2-96
Feature Description
Default: 20 Indicate the difference between the current quality and the ideal quality is 1
level, and power is adjusted by 2 dB. I.e., (1*20/100)*10
Parameter: Max PC Step
Description: The maximum grade that power control can be adjusted by MS
dynamically. 2dB/grade
Value range: 1~16
Unit: grade, every grade is 2dB
Default: 8
2)
HW_II algorithm parameters
Main parameters are as follows:

z
Uplink /downlink signal level and quality upper/low threshold.
Three types of step length adjusted according to level.
Step length adjusted according to quality.
[Cell/Modify Cell's Power Control Parameter/ Modify Power Control Parameter /

Huawei II Power Control]
Parameter: Filter Length for UL RX_LEV
Description: Number of the MRs about averaging uplink signal level before MS power
control adjustment.
Value range: 1~20
Default: 6
Parameter: Filter Length for DL RX_LEV
Description: Number of the MRs about averaging downlink signal level before BTS
power control adjustment.
Value range: 1~20
Default: 6
Parameter: Filter Length for UL Qual.
Description: Number of the MRs about averaging uplink signal quality before MS power
control adjustment.
Value range: 1~20
Default: 6
Parameter: Filter Length for DL Qual.
2-97
Feature Description
Description: Number of the MRs about averaging downlink signal quality before BTS
power control adjustment.
Value range: 1~20
Default: 6
Parameter: MR Compensation Allowed
Description: After this switch is turned on, the currently received MRs are placed in MR
compensation queue, then the system delivers the information about transmit power
change according to the MS and BTS power recorded in the MRs. After the completion
of MR interpolation, the system compensates Rx levels of history MRs according to
power change information.
Value range: Yes/No
Default: Yes
Parameter: UL M.R. Number Predicted
Description: When HW_II algorithm is adopted, the filter with pre-measurement
function instead of average filter value of history MR is used to make power control
decision so as to cancel the delay of power adjustment. This parameter specifies the
number of uplink MRs to be pre-measured.
Value range: 0~3
Default: 2
Parameter: DL M.R. Number Predicted
Description: When HW_II algorithm is adopted, the filter with pre-measurement
function instead of average filter value of history MR is used to make power control
decision so as to cancel the delay of power adjustment. This parameter specifies the
number of downlink MRs to be pre-measured.
Value range: 0~3
Default: 2
Parameter: PC Interver
Description: The minimum period between two consecutive power control commands.
Unit: SACCH period (480ms)
Value range: 1~30
Default: 5
Parameter: UL RX_LEV Upper Thrsh.
2-98
Feature Description
Description: The upper threshold of signal level of uplink to perform power control. After
signal level exceeds this limit, the system works out a power reduction value (=Rx level
sum of upper and lower limit/2), which together with the maximum adjustment step
allowed by quality zone where Rx signal quality is located decide the actual step of
power adjustment.
Unit: grade
Value range: 0~63
Default: 35
Parameter: UL RX_LEV Lower Thrsh.
Description: The lower threshold for signal level of uplink to perform power control. After
signal level exceeds this limit, the system works out a power increase value (=sum of
upper and lower limit/2 Rx level), which together with the maximum adjustment step
allowed by quality zone where Rx signal quality is located decide the actual step of
power adjustment.
Unit: grade
Value range: 0~63
Default: 25
Parameter: UL Qual.Upper Thrsh.
Description: When the signal quality is used to calculate step, the power control will
take place once the signal quality is beyond of its range between the upper and lower
limit. This parameter specifies the good quality threshold for uplink to perform power
control.
Unit: grade
Value range: 0~7
Default: 0
Parameter: UL Qual. Lower Thrsh.
Description: The lower threshold for bad signal quality of uplink to perform power
control.
Unit: grade
Value range: 0~7
Default: 2
Parameter: DL RX_LEV Upper Thrsh.
2-99
Feature Description
Description: The upper threshold of signal level of downlink to perform power control.
After signal level exceeds this limit, the system works out a power reduction value
(=RxLEV sum of upper and lower limit/2), which together with the maximum
adjustment step allowed by quality zone where Rx signal quality is located decide the
actual step of power adjustment.
Unit: grade
Value range: 0~63
Default: 40
Parameter: DL RX_LEV Lower Thrsh.
Description: When signal level is used to calculate power control step, it is specified
with upper and lower limit. Only when the signal level is beyond the range between upper
limit and lower limit will power control adjustment be made. This parameter specifies the
lower threshold of signal level of downlink to perform power control. After signal level
exceeds this limit, the system works out a power increase value (=sum of upper and
lower limit/2 RxLEV), which together with the maximum adjustment step allowed by
quality zone where Rx signal quality is located decide the actual step of power
adjustment.
Unit: grade
Value range: 0~63
Default: 30
Parameter: DL Qual. Upper Thrsh.
limit. This parameter specifies the good quality threshold of downlink to perform power
control.
Value range: 0~7
Default: 0
Parameter: DL Qual. Lower Thrsh.
limit. This parameter specifies the bad quality threshold of downlink to perform power
control.
Unit: grade
Value range: 0~7
2-100
Feature Description
Default: 2
Parameter: MAX Adj. Value for Qual. Zone 0
Description: Huawei II power control algorithm classify receiving signal quality (RQ
value) into three quality bands (0, 1~2, 3). In every quality band, different maximum
allowed power adjustment step-length is set. If the allowed maximum step-length
adjustment is set too small, the algorithm will not reach the purpose of fast power control;
if it is set too large, it will reduce the effectiveness of power control. This parameter
specifies the maximum allowed power step-length when RQ value is 0.
Value range: 0~30
Unit: dB
Default: 16
Description: This parameter specifies the maximum allowed power step-length when
RQ value is between (0, 1)
Value range: 0~30
Unit: dB
Default: 8
Description: This parameter specifies the maximum allowed power step-length
adjustment when RQ value3 during power adjustment according to level.
Value range: 0~30
Unit: dB
Default: 4
Parameter: Adj. PC Value by RxQual.
Description: The adjustment step allowed by power control based on Rx signal quality.
That is, the step is fixed in the case of power control based on quality, while the step
varies from quality to quality in the case of power control based on level.
Value range: 0~4
Unit: dB
Default: 4
2-101
Feature Description
2.2.3 Extended Cell

I. Overview
In GSM specifications, the TA of cell has a restriction of 63 bit at the radio interface, which
results that the cell coverage radius should be within 35km. In regions such as vast land,
with scattered subscribers, with low traffic, and the infrastructure facilities such as
transmission and power supply are hard to be constructed or unavailable, the cell with
radius over 35km should be provided. The extended cell breaks the restriction of radius
within 35km. Supported by BTS hardware, it can cover a range with radius of 120km
under its ideal state. Carriers can use this technology to fast construct their GSM
networks with fewer stations and at lower cost, and to attract the mobile subscribers in
special regions so as to improve profit.

When the cell coverage radius exceeds 35km, signal delay will exceed the duration
corresponding with the maximum value 63 bit specified in GSM specifications. If an MS
reaches the ordinary coverage verge, it will transmit at the maximum TA allowed by
system; if the MS continues to move outside of cell range, the system is no longer able to
implement adaptive regulation on TA value due to the TA has reached its maximum, and
part of signaling transmitted by MS will reach BTS receiver at next time slot. It is this
principle that extended cell uses to realize the cell extension, i. e. two continuous time
slots in BTS are specified for each MS call, and the receiving window of BTS receiver is
also extended to a width of two time slots thus the cell coverage radius is extended to
over 35km. In order to enable MSs in extended range to initiate call at any time, two time
slots should be always distributed to BCCH, CCCH and SDCCH.
The frame TDMA of GSM radio interface is composed of 8 time slots. Each time slot is a
channel. Normally, the system uses TA to make the uplink signals of MSs with different
distances reach within the corresponding local time slot. TA supports a maximum of 63
bit. In order to support the extended MS signals over 63 bit, dual time slot solution binds
odd and even time slots and regards each TDMA frame as only with four channels: 0/1,
2/3, 4/5, 6/7. . For MS, only channel 0, 2, 4, and 6 are distributed. The MS in the range
0~35km, its TA value changes within the range 0~63. The TA value of MS with radius
over 35km is always maintained as 63. While BTS demodulates uplink data in two
continuous time slots. TA value of TA in MS has a maximum of 63+156. 25 = 219. 25 bit.
The principle of extended cell delay regulation is as shown in Figure 2-28.
2-102
Feature Description
unlink data
DELAY<=63
demodulation range
After TA adjustment
TS1
TS0
TS2
delay>63
After TA adjustment
TS0
TS2
TS1
Dual times lot extendend cell
Figure 2-28 Principle of extended cell delay regulation

If all carrier frequencies in a cell are set as ordinary ones, this is called cell level dual time
slot solution. If part of carrier frequencies in a cell are set as ordinary ones and other
carrier frequencies are configured as dual time slot ones, and BCCH is located in dual
time slot carrier, then this is called carrier level dual time slot solution.
When carrier level dual time slot extended cell is adopted, there are ordinary carrier and
dual time slot ones. BCCH in dual time slot guarantees the random access of any areas.
The calls within TA value accessed randomly being within 35km radius are distributed to
ordinary carrier; while the calls within 34~120km radius and the incoming handovers are
distributed to dual time slot carrier. For the incoming handovers to be found as 0~35km
ones, the system can handover them again to ordinary carrier. When the calling MS
crosses 35 km line, this will lead to an intra-cell handover, which is from the dual time slot
frequency to the ordinary one or from the ordinary to dual time slot frequency. The
conversion of carrier frequencies between ordinary one and dual time slot one can be set
through BSC data configuration

The specific configuration process and the involved data tables and parameters are as
follows:
[Cell / Modify Cell's Property / Modify Cell Property / Basic Property]
Parameter: Cell Extension Type
2-103
Feature Description
Description: The normal cell is under 35 km radius; but in some specific applications,
the cell with coverage over 35 km may be required, which is called extension cell.
Value range: Normal cell, Single Timeslot Extension Cell, Double Timeslots Extension
Cell.
Default: Double Timeslots Extension Cell
[Cell/Modify TRX's Channel Type/Modify Channel Type]
Parameter: Channel Type
Description: BSC supports the radio channel type. At least one "Active BCCH" and one
"SDCCH8" should be configured to the cell. The "active BCCH" is fixedly configured to
Channel 0. If cell broadcast function is supported, change "SDCCH8" into
"SDCCH+CBCH".
Value range: TCH Full Rate, TCH Half Rate 01, TCH Half Rate 0, SDCCH8, Main
BCCH, Combination BCCH, BCH, BCH + CBCH, SDCCH + CBCH, PBCCH + PDTCH,
PCCCH + PDTCH, PDTCH and Dynamic PDTCH.
Default: All channel types (Main BCCH, SDCCH8, TCH full rate etc.) function only when
they are configured to the channels with even number. If they are configured to channels
with odd number, faults will be caused (Cell does not work or cannot assign channel,
etc.).
Generally, SDCCH8 follows BCCH closely in channel 1; for the configuration of dual-slot
extension cells, make sure that they are configured to channels with even number.
Except main BCCH, odd channels can be configured with the rest types.
Emergency HO Data]
Description: TA threshold for triggering emergency handover.
Value range: 0~255
Default: This value can be calculated according to the coverage radius of area to
perform TA emergency handover. 1bit equals to about 550m.
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Handover Parameter / IUO HO
Data]
Description: The UnderLaid subcell and OverLaid subcell can be differentiated
geographically. This parameter can be used for the assistance of adjusting the traffic and
coverage of OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell. This parameter together with "Rx
2-104
Feature Description
level threshold", "Rx level hysteresis" and "TA hysteresis" decide the area of OverLaid
subcell and UnderLaid subcell. Unit: dBm.
Value range: 0~255
Default: This value can be calculated according to the coverage radius of area to
perform TA emergency handover. 1bit equals to about 550m.
Parameter: TA Hysteresis
Description: This parameter is used together with Rx level threshold, Rx level
hysteresis and TA hysteresis to decide the area of OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid
subcell. Unit: dBm.
Value range: 0~255
Default: 0
2.2.4 IUO
I. Overview
With the development of GSM network, the number of subscribers increases gradually,
so the contradict between short frequency resource and great demand is particularly
obvious. In order to increase capacity, the technology of aggressive frequency reuse
should be used to improve the frequency utilization. However, the aggressive frequency
reuse increases the radio interference greatly and even to affect the communication
quality seriously. Under the circumstance of aggressive frequency reuse, the IUO
technology can be used to avoid or decrease radio interference so as to guarantee
communication quality. The IUO technology divides an ordinary cell into two service
layers: OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell. For the MS in the UnderLaid subcell, try
to distribute the less reuse frequency, such as BCCH frequency; for the MS in the
OverLaid subcell, try to distribute the more reuse frequency, such as frequency except
BCCH. The frequency inside the OverLaid subcell adopts aggressive frequency reuse
mode, which can improve system capacity effectively.

IUO refers to the different carrier circle cells formed by different carrier frequencies in a
cell with difference on coverage. Logically, OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell can
be regarded as two cells because their coverage areas are different, The OverLaid
subcell is the main traffic carrier layer because it has many channels. Its function is to
absorb the most subscribers within the cell coverage area. UnderLaid subcell solve the
problem of coverage and provide service for the areas not covered by overlaid cell. e The
technical description of IUO is as shown in Figure 2-29.
2-105
Feature Description
UnderLaid subcell Cell A
Cell B
OverLaid subcell
Signal
Interference
Figure 2-29 Aggressive Frequency Reuse of IUO cell

As shown above, the IUO divides the cell coverage into OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid
subcell. The carrier frequencies of OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell can adopt
different multiplexing modes. For the OverLaid subcell cell, it adopts more reuse
frequency mode such as 1x3 due to its small coverage. For the UnderLaid subcell cell, it
adopts less reuse frequency mode such as 4x3. After the IUO technology is employed,
compared with Multiple Reuse Pattern (MRP), it can greatly increase the network
capacity and guarantee the network quality because the OverLaid subcell employs of
aggressive frequency reuse mode. In some special cases, the UnderLaid subcell is
configured with only one carrier BCCH with the multiplexing mode of 4x3 being adopted
and the rest TCH carrier frequencies are configured in OverLaid subcell with the
multiplexing mode of 1x3 being adopted, then the IUO cell is completely the same as the
cell with the multiplexing mode of 1x3 adopted and the average frequency multiplexing
ratio is the same as that of 1x3 multiplexing. Therefore, in this case, the IUO can
effectively reduce the interference for the whole network and obtain the better network
quality than 1x3 multiplexing without the decrease of network capacity.
The wider coverage can be realized through having the carrier in which BCCH is used
large power amplifier. The power that provided by BCCH carrier is greater than other
carriers, so the coverage distance of different carrier is different. While the cell coverage
area depends on the carrier of smaller coverage, so the coverage area is greatly
restricted. When the IUO technology is employed, the carrier with wide coverage can be
used to serve as UnderLaid subcell to realize the far end coverage of site; while the
carrier with small coverage can be used to serve as OverLaid subcell to increase the
near end capacity of site. In this way, the cell coverage area can be increased.
2-106
Feature Description
Underlaid
Overlaid
Figure 2-30 IUO coverage

After the employment of the IUO cell, the cell coverage area can be greatly increased.
The theoretically added coverage of various typical stations with different combining
modes is shown in Table 2-12.
Table 2-12 Coverage changes for typical sites after the employment of IUO cell
Number of cell
carrier frequencies
Combining mode
3
4,5
4,5
5,6
CDU+CDU
CDU+CDU+SCU
CDU+CDU+CDU
CDU+CDU+SCU
Loss of low
loss carrier
1. 0dB
1. 0dB
1. 0dB
4. 5dB
Loss of high
loss carrier
4. 5dB
8. 0dB
4. 5dB
8. 0dB
Added coverage area

after the employment
of IUO
27%
60%
27%
27%
The division of OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell is based on the MS downlink
receiving level and TA, as shown in Figure 2-31.
2-107
Feature Description
Figure 2-31 Division of OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell in a IUO cell
The receiving level threshold and TA threshold can be adjusted through data
configuration. Therefore, under the precondition of without affecting the network index,
the boarder of UnderLaid subcell can be adjusted flexibly to let OverLaid subcell and
UnderLaid subcell rationally share the traffic.
1)
Channel assignment technology of IUO cell
The channel assignment technology refers to that different distribution strategies are
adopted for different channel distribution cases with fully consideration to features of IUO.
There are following cases:
a) Immediate assignment
There is no reference receiving level and TA when immediate assignment takes place. In
order to guarantee the service quality, the SDCCH of UnderLaid subcell is prior to the
others of Overlaid subcell. Only when there is no signaling channel available in
UnderLaid subcell will the signaling channel in OverLaid subcell be assigned.
b) Assignment
The channel assignment strategy of IUO is used to assign channels. Try to assign
OverLaid subcell channel when the subscriber is in the OverLaid subcell range and
assign UnderLaid subcell channels when there is no OverLaid subcell channel available.
Similarly, try to assign UnderLaid subcell channel when the subscriber is in the
UnderLaid subcell range and assign OverLaid subcell channels when there is no
UnderLaid subcell channel available. Try to use the suitable service layer to serve the
subscriber.
c) BSC internal handover
2-108
Feature Description
BSC internal handover is applicable for the non-IUO handover and the direct handover
from OverLaid subcell to adjacent cells. Use IUO channel assignment strategy to assign
channels and use the suitable service layer to serve the handover MS.
Inter-BSC handover
Being unable to get the receiving level and TA of adjacent cells, the system selects the
preferred UnderLaid subcell, or preferred OverLaid subcell, or non-strategy mode
through switch.
2)
IUO cell handover technology
Huawei handover algorithm has the decision function of IUO handover to realize
ordinary IUO technology. When the MS crosses the boarder of OverLaid subcell and
UnderLaid subcell, the IUO handover is initiated to enable the MS to connect call in a
suitable traffic layer. If the target handover layer is congested, the handover will not be
triggered. With the employment of IUO cell handover technology, BSC can intelligently
guide traffic to utilize frequency resource rationally.

The specific configuration process and the involved data tables and parameters are as
follows:
[Cell / Modify Cell's Handover Parameter / Modify Handover Parameter / IUO HO
Data]
Parameter: UO Signal Intensity Difference
Description: Used to compensate the intensity difference between OverLaid subcell
and UnderLaid subcell.
Unit: dB
Value range: 0~63
Default: It is recommended to perform field measurement and sampling for the
difference between OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell power, combiner
interpolation loss difference, path loss caused by different antennas, and path difference
caused by different frequency selection.
Parameter: RX_LEV Thrsh.
Description: RX_LEV Thrsh. works together with RX_LEV Hysteresis, TA Thrsh. and
TA hysteresis. This is to determine the boundary between OverLaid subcell and
UnderLaid subcell. The value of this parameter must be greater than the Edge HO
Thrsh. It is recommended that RX_LEV Thrsh. > Edge HO Thrsh. + UO Signal Intensity
Difference.
Unit: grade
2-109
Feature Description

Default: 25
Parameter: RX_LEV Hysteresis
Description: RX_LEV Hysteresis works together with RX_LEV Thrsh., TA Thrsh. and
UnderLaid subcell.
Unit: dB
Value range: 0~63
Default: 3
Description: TA Thrsh. works together with RX_LEV Thrsh., RX_LEV Hysteresis, and
UnderLaid subcell. The value of this parameter must be greater than TA Thrsh.
Unit: bit period. 1 bit period corresponds to 0.55km
Value range: 0~63
Default: The OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell can be differentiated
geographically. This parameter is applicable to assist the traffic and coverage adjustment
of OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell.
Parameter: TA Hysteresis
Description: TA hysteresis works together with RX_LEV Thrsh., RX_LEV Hysteresis,
and TA Thrsh. This is to determine the boundary between OverLaid subcell and
UnderLaid subcell.
Unit: bit period, 1 bit period corresponding to 0.55km
Value range: 0~63
Default: 0
2-110
Feature Description
Note:
The above 4 parameters determine the coverage range of OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell.
OverLaid subcell coverage range can be indicated as follows:
Receiving level >= RX_LEV Thrsh. + RX-LEV Hysteresis; TA <= TA Thrsh.- TA hysteresis
UnderLaid subcell coverage range can be indicated as follows:
Receiving level <= RX_LEV Thrsh. - RX_LEV Hysteresis; -TA >= TA Thrsh. + TA hysteresis
There is a hysteresis band between OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell which is used to avoid
"Ping-Pong" handovers (as shown below).
RX_LEV Thrsh. - RX_LEV Hysteresis <= Receiving level <= RX_LEV Thrsh. + RX_LEV Hysteresis and TA
Thrsh. - TA hysteresis <= TA <=TA Thrsh. + TA hysteresis
If the TA Thrsh. is 63, and the TA Hysteresis is 0, then the boundary of the OverLaid subcell is completely
determined by the receiving level parameters.
If the RX_LEV Thrsh. is 63, and the RX_LEV Hysteresis is 0,then the boundary of the UnderLaid subcell is
completely determined by the TA parameters.
Parameter: UO HO Watch Time

Description: This parameter together with IUO HO duration controls the frequency of
IUO HO.
Unit: second
Value range: 0~16
Default: 5
Parameter: UO HO Valid Time
Description: This parameter together with IUO HO measurement time controls the
frequency of IUO HO.
Unit: second
Value range: 0~16
Default: 4
Parameter: Assign Optimum Layer
Description: For IUO cell, there are four modes of TCH assignment: 1) System selects
the preferentially assigned service layer based the MR on SDCCH; 2) TCH is assigned
to UnderLaid subcell preferentially; 3) TCH is assigned to OverLaid subcell preferentially;
4) No special processing performed.
Value range: System optimization, OverLaid subcell, UnderLaid subcell and No
preferential
2-111
Feature Description
Default: System optimization

Parameter: Assign-Optimum-Level Thrsh.
Description: After selection of optimal layer, the current SDCCH level value can be
estimated (inserted/ filtered) with the uplink measured value in the previous SDCCH MR.
Furthermore, comparison can be made with "assign optimal level threshold" in order to
assign the external circle or internal circle channels.
Unit: dB
Default: If SDCCH is in the UnderLaid subcell, edge handover threshold + signal level
difference between OverLaid subcell and UnderLaid subcell + uplink and downlink
balance allowance + SDCCH and TCH difference allowance; If SDCCH is in the
OverLaid subcell, edge handover threshold uplink and downlink balance allowance +
difference allowance between SDCCH and TCH.
Parameter: Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC
Description: The incoming HO intra-BSC optimum algorithm allowed. When a cell is
configured as an IUO cell, the two processing methods of incoming intra-BSC handover
request in BSC are
1)
2)
No preference
Add the receiving level of the target IUO cell with the handover request. Then the
target cell compares the receiving level with RX_LEV Thrsh. to select the optimum
layer, regardless of the RX_LEV Hysteresis.
Value range: System Optimization, OverLaid Subcell, UnderLaid Subcell, No

Preference
Default: UnderLaid subcell
Parameter: Incoming-to-BSC HO optimum layer
Description: Generally, the inter-BSC handover is triggered at the edge of a cell. In this
case, the UnderLaid subcell can be selected preferably. In the case of 1800 and 900 that
share the same site location, the inter-BSC handover is hardly triggered at the edge of a
cell. The OverLaid subcell can be selected preferably. If the handover success rate is low,
it is recommended that the UnderLaid subcell should be selected preferably.
Value range: UnderLaid subcell, OverLaid subcell, No preference
Default: UnderLaid subcell
2-112
Feature Description
Note:
BCCH carrier must be configured as UnderLaid subcell.

1) The carrier with SDCCH must be configured as UnderLaid subcell.
2) The handover between OverLaid and UnderLaid subcells will be forbidden If both RX-LEV Thrsh. and
RX-LEV Hysteresis are 63.
3) The handover between OverLaid and UnderLaid subcells will be forbidden If both TA Thrsh. and TA
Hysteresis are 63.
4) The dual timeslot extended cell adopts IUO for data configuration. See the reference for dual timeslot
extended cell.
Penalty Data]
Parameter: Penalty time after IUO HO Fail.
Description: After an IUO handover failure, regardless of handover from UnderLaid
subcell to OverLaid subcell or from OverLaid subcell to UnderLaid subcell, IUO
handover will be forbidden within a period of time. This parameter indicates this duration.
Unit: second
Value range: 0~16
Default: 10
Description Data]
Parameter: Cell Type
Description: Whether it is a IUO cell.
Value range: Normal cell, IUO cell.
Default: Based on actual circumstance.
[Cell / Modify TRX's Property / Modify TRX Property]
Parameter: IUO Property
Description: Property of IUO cell carrier
Value range: OverLaid subcell, UnderLaid subcell and none
Default: For IUO cell, this parameter is configured as UnderLaid subcell or OverLaid
subcell according to actual situation; for non-IUO cell, it is configured as none.
2-113
Feature Description
2.2.5 Satellite Transfer

I. Technical description
Satellite communication is the development and the special form of microwave
communication, the supplement and backup to conventional communication means.
Satellite communication features wide coverage, little effected by landform, fine mobility,
and flexible link calling. Meanwhile, it has the problems such as delay, jitter, and bit error,
which leads to the Abis interface of ordinary GSM equipment not supporting satellite
transfer.
Huawei BSS adopts dedicated satellite transfer equipment to realize the satellite transfer
of Abis interface according to the features of satellite transfer. The solution principle is
described as follows:
1)
LAPD protocol processing
During the LAPD protocol process, the timer duration is prolonged and the value of slide
window is increased to resist delay.
2)
TRAU frame algorithm
The adjustment algorithm of the TRAU frame is modified from fixed cycle adjustment to
self-adaptive adjustment.
3)
BTS clock work mode
The transmission between BSC and BTS can only occupy 19 time slots of DDN circuit
(TS1~18, TS31) and the time slot 0 of DDN circuit is used for the synchronization of DDN
instead of transmitting service. Therefore, BTS can only use the clock of DDN. However,
the accuracy of DDN clock is only 10E-7, which cannot satisfy the requirement of GSM
protocol. BTS adopts internal clock, which accuracy meets the requirement of GSM
protocol.
4)
Voice quality
When the transmission bit error is less than 10E-6, the Voice quality is not affected.
Usually, the transmission bit error of satellite circuit is less than 10E-8.
As the link lease is very expensive and the quality is particularly sensitive to
environments, the solution of Abis interface transmission by using satellite transfer
should be positioned for the special areas where the ordinary transmission means is
dissatisfactory and for the emergency communication. When the satellite transfer is used
for networking, the star networking mode is usually adopted. The typical satellite transfer
networking diagram is shown in Figure 2-32.
2-114
Feature Description
Satelite
Earth Station
MSC
Earth Receiving E1
Station
BTS
BSC
BTS
SDH/PDH
/HDSL/Microware
/E1
BTS
Earth Receiving E1
BTS
Station
Figure 2-32 Typical satellite transfer networking diagram

Satellite communication is composed of satellite and ground station.
Generally, the satellite communication adopts synchronous satellite, i.e. the satellite orbit
plane is on the equator plane, the satellite is 35786. 6km from the earth surface, the
flying direction is the same as the earth rotation, and the duration of satellite rotation
cycle is the same as that of the earth. The satellite consists of control system,
communication system (antenna and trunk equipment), telemetry system, power supply
system and temperature control system.
The ground station consists of antenna system, transmitter, receiver, channel terminal
equipment (modem), communication control system and power supply system.
The ground station of ordinary satellite communication is a kind of large-sized
international or European standard communication station. It has such features as high
transmission rate, antenna of large caliber, and expensive cost of equipment. The
subscriber data are connected to the ground station through the ground communication
network to complete communication.
The subscribers in VSAT system form a dedicated network to communicate through
satellite respectively. This mode is featured by its low cost of equipment, antenna of
small caliber, and flexible application.
II. Data configuration

1)
[BTS / Modify Site's Extended Parameter / Modify Site's Ext Parameter]
2-115
Feature Description
Parameter: Transmission Mode

Description: This parameter is to select an Abis interface transfer mode.
Value range: Ground transfer, Satellite transfer
Default: Satellite transfer
2)
[Cell / Modify Cell's Call Control Parameter / Modify Cell Call Control
Parameter / Call Control]
Parameter: Immediate Assignment optimization

Description: Whether optimization of the channel activated by BTS is permitted when
mobile station accesses the channel for many times, so as to increase the responding
speed of the network and improve the network performance
Value range: Yes/No
Default: Yes
Note:
Satellite transfer is for the whole site: 1) For all cells under the site configured as Satellite transfer, its
Immediately assigned optimization should be configured as Yes. The immediately assigned optimization
is mainly for satellite transfer. It is has little effect on ground transfer.
3)
[Cell / Modify Cell's System Message / Modify Cell System Message / Basic
Data]
Parameter: MS Maximum resend times

Description: The maximum resend times of channel request message over RACH
channel for MS. If this number is exceeded, MS will discard the request and execute cell
re-selection process.
Value range: 1, 2, 4, 7
Default: 4
Parameter: Extend transmit TS number
Description: To avoid another collision occurring after a collision caused by multiple
MSs seizing the same RACH timeslot simultaneously, MS will resend channel request at
random in the range of this field. Unit: RACH time slot.
Value range: 3~12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50
Default: 32
Parameter: CCCH configuration
2-116
Feature Description
Description: To specify CCCH channel configuration.

Value range: One non-combined CCCH, one combined CCCH, two non-combined
CCCH, three non-combined CCCH and four non-combined CCCH.
Default: A non-combined CCCH
4)
When the satellite transfer is adopted, more SDCCHs can be assigned because MS
generally needs to resend the channel request.
2.2.6 Diversity Receiving

I. Technical description
In radio waves propagation, fading (including slow fading and fast fading) may impact on
the communication quality and may even interrupt the communication.
In this technique, the system receives two or more input signals, which carry identical
information but irrelevant random fading features. To minimize these impacts and
enhance the transmission quality, diversity technique is used. It is an effective approach
to overcome fading, encompasses frequency diversity, time diversity, polarization
diversity and space diversity.
1)
Space diversity
Space diversity is implemented by providing two sets of stand-alone receiving equipment

concurrently, including antenna, tower amplifier (optional), feeder, DMUX and receiver.
The receiver is made up of two completely independent paths. The input signals of the
two channels come from the master and diversity antennas. The two signals of space
diversity receiving have different propagation environments and different kinds of fading
so they have the feature of coherence or little coherence. It lowers the impact of
propagation factor to adopt diversity combining technology and make it output powerful
useful signals. In the mobile communication, the wider spacing interval, the more
different multipath propagation, and the less relativity. The interval between antennas
can be either vertical or horizontal. The vertical interval has a poor performance of
diversity, so it is rarely used. In the same BTS or cell, if two sets of antennas with an
interval of dozens of wavelength are used to receive the same signal, the most powerful
signals or combined signals with minimum fading can be selected through diversity
combining technology. The diversity gain can be used to indicate the improvement of
space diversity, which value is related with adopted combing technology. However, the
improvement depends on the ratio between the effective height of diversity antenna (he)
and level interval (d), and the incoming wave angle . When the frontal signal (i. e.
=0o) is received, the signal coherence coefficient on two sets of antennas is the smallest
one and the gain is the greatest one; when the lateral signal (=90o) is received, the
coherence coefficient is the greatest one and the gain is the smallest one.
2-117
Feature Description
Space diversity is the most effective and most common mode in the mobile
communication.
2)
Time diversity
Time diversity can be used to send the same message through a certain delay, or send a
part of message at different times within the allowed range of delay. Interleaving
technology is used to realize time diversity.
3)
Frequency diversity
Frequency diversity is realized through frequency hopping.
4)
Polarization diversity
It can get a better diversity gain to set two sets of antenna to form a certain angle.
Moreover, the two sets of antenna can be integrated as one set of antenna. Therefore,
for a sector, only one set of Tx antenna and one set of Rx antenna are needed. If the
duplexer is used, only one set of antenna integrated by Tx and Rx antennas is needed.
Huawei BTS uses dual polarization antenna to realize polarization diversity. This can
realize the combination of antenna, tower top amplifier (optional), feeder, and divider.
When the complicated radio transmission conditions result in deterioration in a path of
the received signals, another path of received signals may vary in signal quality as they
are from an irrelevant transmission path. The BTS receives two paths of signals: main
and diversity signals, demodulates and combines them. This gives 3~5dB diversity gain.
It has been proven that for the space diversity, a better diversity can be achieved when
the distance between 2 sets of antenna is greater than 10 wavelengths. For the
polarization diversity, it has the advantage of convenient antenna extension and saving
hoist space and is increasedly used.
II. Data configuration

The system needs no extra data configuration to realize the diversity receiving.
2.2.7 Aggressive Frequency Reuse Pattern

I. Aggressive Frequency Reuse
With the development of network, the subscribers increase gradually, the contradict
between short frequency resource and great demand is particularly obvious. In order to
increase capacity, the technology of aggressive frequency reuse should be used to
improve the frequency utilization. According to the actual network circumstance and
requirements, the system can adopt hierarchical aggressive frequency reuse and 1x3
multiplexing technology. The comparison of adopting different aggressive frequency
reuse is as shown in Table 2-13.
2-118
Feature Description
Table 2-13 The maximum configuration under different bandwidths

Frequency band
4x3 multiplexing
6MHz
10MHz
Hierarchical multiplexing
S(2/2/2)
S(4/4/4)
S(3/3/3)
S(6/6/6)
1x3 multiplexing
S(4/4/4)
S(8/8/8)
Note:
1) S(4/4/4) indicates three synchronous cells with each carrier number being 4.
2) In 4x3 multiplexing, 4 indicate four sites, 3 indicates three cells, and totally there are twelve cells as
frequency cluster. Different cells in the same cluster have different frequencies; while cells of other clusters
reuse one certain group of frequency in these twelve frequency clusters.
II. Advanced aggressive frequency reuse technology

1)
Hierarchical aggressive frequency reuse
Hierarchical aggressive frequency reuse supports that there can be several different
frequencies multiplexing modes working simultaneously in the same GSM network. For
example BCCH adopts 4x3 multiplexing mode and TCH adopts 3x3 and 2x3 modes.
The nature of hierarchical aggressive frequency reuse is a method of frequency planning.
It has no special requirements of software and hardware for equipment. Hierarchical
aggressive frequency reuse divides all available frequencies into several groups and
each group serves as a carrier layer. The principle of hierarchical aggressive frequency
reuse is as shown in Figure 2-33.
(1,2,3,4,...36,37)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BCCH
BCCH
TCH1
TCH1
TCH2
TCH2
TCH3
MICRO
Figure 2-33 Principle of hierarchical aggressive frequency reuse

After the hierarchical aggressive frequency reuse is used, frequency hopping, DTX and
dynamic power control should be started to improve C/I thus to satisfy the requirement of
C/I>12dB. The frequency hopping can get the frequency diversity gain and interference
diversity gain.
2-119
Feature Description
For example: the maximum configuration S (4/4/4) packet mode can be divided into:
BCCH, TCH1, TCH2 and TCH3.
There are two modes of carrier packet:
z
Continuous packet: The ARFCNs of frequencies assigned in the same layer are
continuous.
Interval packet: The ARFCNs of frequencies assigned in the same layer have
intervals.
The following examples illustrate these two packets. Provided that frequency range is
512~561, totally 50 frequencies. 12 frequencies are assigned for BCCH, 38 for TCH.
a) Continuous packet mode
BCCH (12): 512~523;
TCH (38): 524~561.
b) Interval packet mode
BCCH (12): 512, 514, 516, 518, 520, 522, 524, 526, 528, 530, 532, 534;
TCH: 513, 515, 517, 519, 521, 523, 525, 527, 529, 531, 533, 535~561.
Both these two packet modes have their advantages and disadvantage. The comparison
is made as follows.
In the case of continuous packet, the interference between BCCH carrier layer and TCH
carrier layer is little. However, both same frequency and adjacent frequency interference
should be considered as a restriction for the planning of BCCH layer. Meanwhile, BCCH
layer and TCH layer are quite independent and there is only one frequency between
BCCH and TCH layers, therefore, BCCH layer can be easily modified without
interference to TCH layer.
The employment of interval packet mode can guarantees that there is no adjacent
frequency interference between BCCHs. Moreover, the planning of BCCH carrier layer is
relatively easy since the same frequency interference is considered as a main restriction.
However, the interference between BCCH and TCH layers is strong. Therefore, the
planning of TCH layer after the planning of BCCH layer becomes difficult. Under the
condition of the same number of frequencies, the continuous packet mode of BCCH
carrier layer is more difficult than the interval packet mode, for more consideration should
be given to the restriction of adjacent frequency interference. (In the system with
frequency hopping adopted, the less consideration can be given to the restriction of
adjacent frequency interference.
The principle for different carrier layer multiplexing ratios: Assign frequency layer by layer,
try to apply different multiplexing ratios for different layers, and realize aggressive
frequency reuse layer by layer.
2-120
Feature Description
General principle: BCCH>TCH1>TCH2>TCH3

When multiple frequency multiplexing is adopted, C/I value will be decreased due to the
aggressive frequency reuse being adopted for each TCH layer. Then the requirement
that the same frequency interference C/I is greater or equal to 12dB in GSM system is
not guaranteed. Moreover, the different frequencies have different interference situations.
The less frequencies in the layer, the more serious interference. If frequency hopping
and other measures are not adopted, the above-mentioned interference between
frequencies will take place thus the communication quality is not guaranteed. Therefore,
the system must adopt measures such as frequency hopping, discontinuous
transmission, and dynamic power control to minimize these kinds of interference.
Frequency hopping can get the frequency diversity gain and interference diversity gain
so as to avoid Rayleigh fading and same frequency interference.
It should be noted that the purpose for different carrier layers using different multiplexing
ratios is to avoid interference at most. This is shown in the flowing aspects.
Under the circumstance of non-uniform network sites, it is not the case for every cell to
use the TRX of last layer or the most last layers. So the TRX of last layer or the most last
layers can realize a higher aggressive frequency reuse ratio (even without the
employment of frequency hopping).
Since the system tries to s are tried to use different multiplexing modes for each carrier
layer, frequencies of any two cells in network are not completely the same, i. e. there is
no the real same frequency cell. After multiple frequency multiplexing is realized, though
interference is increased, the TRX also increased. This makes more frequencies to
participate in frequency hopping and the gain is increased. If the frequency with weak
interference and frequency with strong interference coexist in the same cell, they will be
mixed after frequency hopping is adopted. The system can still use the interfered
frequencies according to the feature of decoder.
So for each burst, C/I is changeable. But for a specified connection, its quality depends
on C/I equalizing value and the equalizing value is not fluctuated.
III. 1x3 frequency multiplexing technology

1x3 frequency multiplexing technology is a kind of aggressive frequency reuse. The
following is a simple example to illustrate the principle of 1x3 frequency multiplexing.
Provided that the maximum configuration site is S (8/8/8) in a certain area, the available
frequency band is 14. 4MHz, 9 frequencies are reserved for micro-cellar, 12. 6MHz is left,
and there are totally 63 frequencies. Among these 63 frequencies, 15 are assigned for
BCCH carrier (the assignment on the frequency is continuous), and 48 TCH frequencies
are left. Then frequencies are divided into 3 groups (combiner hopping mode is
adopted):
Group 1: 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44, 47, 50, 53, 56, 59, 62, 65, 68, 71, 74;
2-121
Feature Description
Group 2: 30, 33, 36, 39, 42, 45, 48, 51, 54, 57, 60, 63, 66, 69, 72, 75;
Group 3: 31, 34, 37, 40, 43, 46, 49, 52, 55, 58, 61, 64, 67, 70, 73, 76.
1x3 frequency multiplexing has the advantage of high frequency efficiency, easy
planning method, and easy assignment of frequency. Meanwhile, HSN and MAIO should
be carefully planned and the BTS should support radio frequency hopping. In large cities,
there are many BTSs and the site is complicated. The employment of 1x3 frequency
planning method can greatly reduce workload and good performance can be achieved in
the case of small multiplexing ratio. 1x3 multiplexing uses the principle that the number
of FH frequencies is greater than the number of carrier frequencies in the cell to avoid
interference and to reduce same frequency collision probability. For a specified
connection, its quality depends on C/I equalizing value. It has been proven that whether
the C/I is good or not depends on same frequency collision probability after radio
frequency hopping. And the collision probability is only related with the frequency
utilization. 1x3 frequency multiplexing mode is as shown in Figure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 1x3 frequency multiplexing mode

The frequency planning of 1x3 frequency multiplexing is easy and practical, as well as
some disadvantages. For example: when sites are distributed irregularly and the
landforms are greatly different, the collision probability will be greatly increase Moreover,
in the network in which 1x3 planning is implemented, there is also requirement for
network load. When TCH multiplexing ratio is over 40% and the load is over 80%, the
network quality will be decreased rapidly. If the TCH multiplexing ratio is higher, for
example, over 50% and the load is over 60% or 70%, the network quality will also be
decreased rapidly.
IV. Applied conditions for aggressive frequency reuse

To adopt aggressive frequency reuse to improve the frequency utilization and the
network capacity, a series of anti-interference measures should be taken to reduce the
same frequency and adjacent frequency interference caused by aggressive frequency
reuse.
2-122
Feature Description
According to the specifications, carrier interference ratio index (engineering value) is:
Same frequency carrier interference ratio: C/I is greater than or equal to 12dB;
Adjacent frequency carrier interference ratio: C/I is greater than or equal to-6dB;
Carrier interference ratio when carrier has an offset of 400 kHz: C/I is greater than or
equal to -38dB.
Currently, the following measures are taken to improve the network anti-interference
capability so as to satisfy the carrier interference ratio index: Frequency hopping, DTX
and power control. The following introduces the effect on improvement of network same
frequency C/I and adjacent frequency C/I by frequency hopping.
Frequency hopping has two functions: frequency diversity and interference diversity.
The frequency diversity gain of frequency hopping depends on propagation environment,
MS speed, frequency number of frequency hopping sequence number, and the
inter-frequency relativity. It is no greater than 6dB. When MS has a high, frequency
hopping has no function of frequency diversity. Generally, the electromagnetic wave of
mobile communication consists of direct wave component and scattered wave
component. When direct wave is in a dominant position, the frequency diversity of
frequency hopping is not obvious. Its gain is about 0~3dB. On the contrary, when
scattered wave in a dominant position, the gain is obvious, which is about 3~6dB. For a
typical environment in which propagation environment, MS speed, and interval between
frequencies are satisfied to achieve the maximum FP frequency gain, the maximum gain
for three-frequency hopping reaches 3. 3dB, 6dB for four-frequency hopping, no greater
than 5.5dB for 9-frequency hopping. The maximum gain of frequency diversity is no
greater than 6dB.
The interference diversity capability of frequency hopping is related to interference
distribution, frequency number of frequency hopping sequence number, and the
inter-frequency relativity. Generally, for the narrow band interference, interference
diversity functions apparently; for the broadband interference, it does not function
apparently. It has been proven that when interference is distributed as narrow band and
the number of FH frequencies is 3, 5, 7, the interference diversity gain for interfered
frequency is 3.2 dB, 4.6 dB , 5.5 dB respectively. The function of interference diversity is
shown on the equalization of interference. Therefore, the interference diversity gain for a
single frequency is 0 by default and is sent in the system information
2.2.8 Multiband Network

I. Overview
The multiband network is a network combined GSM900 and GSM1800 In the multiband
network, GSM multiband MS can communicate in either GSM900 frequency band or
2-123
Feature Description
GSM1800 frequency band. Each cell in a multiband network has frequencies from only
one frequency band. The multiband network allows cell reselection, distribution and
handover between GSM900 cell and GSM1800 cell. The application of multiband
network is as shown in Figure 2-35.
GSM900
GSM1800
MSC
BSC
BSC
MSC
BSC
BSC
GSM900 Cell
GSM1800 Cell
Figure 2-35 GSM900/GSM1800 multiband network
The multiband network can be used to utilize the abundant frequency resources in
GSM1800 frequency band, to absorb network traffic, and to satisfy the increasing
demand of network capacity.

To guarantee the stable operation of multiband network, it is of utmost importance to
correctly configure the parameters related with the multiband network operation at the
stage of network commissioning. Given below is a description of the technical principles
governing the multiband network.
1)
MS Classmark
In the GSM system, MS Classmark represents the MS services, supported bands, power,
and encryption capability. The Classmark of the mobile station falls into three categories:
Classmark1, Classmark2 and Classmark3. The network can interrogate the Classmark
of MS and realize its capabilities. In addition, the network can request the mobile station
to report its Classmark3 immediately after creating a link by setting the parameter Early
Classmark Sending Control. Since the important messages in Classmark3 are created
specially for multiband applications, it is required that in the multiband network the
equipment should support the processing of MS Classmark.
Huawei BSS supports ECSC, processing of MS Classmark3, etc.
2)
BA list
2-124
Feature Description
In the GSM system, the BA (BCCH Allocation) list is a set of all the carrier channel
numbers of adjacent cells of each cell.
The network carries out compatibility handling for various types of MSs through system
information control. It also guides the MSs to access and handover correctly so that good
services of the radio network can be guaranteed.
BA defines the absolute channel numbers used by carrier of all adjacent frequency cell
BCCHs, which is used for cell selection and handover. It is the system that informs MS
the BA list through system information. There are two types of BA list:
z
The BA1 mainly contains the list of adjacent cells searched by the MSs in idle mode.
It is transmitted periodically in the system information type 2, 2bis or 2ter, and used
for cell re-selection in the idle mode.
The BA2 mainly contains the list of adjacent cells searched by the MSs in active
mode. It is transmitted in the system information 5, 5bis or 5ter, and used for
handover in active mode.
When an MS is in active mode, It extracts the parameters of adjacent cells from the
associated channel system information type 5, 5bis or 5ter on the SACCH, instead of
from the system information type 2, 2bis and 2ter. In accordance with the actual network
status, the BA list in the system information type 5, 5bis and 5ter can be either identical to
or varied with that in the system information type 2, 2bis and 2ter.
The BA list shall be set in accordance with the network design requirements and the
actual status of adjacent cells. Otherwise, there might be inappropriateness in handover
or cell re-selection, or even handover failure. In this case, it may impact the services
provided by the network.
The number of adjacent cells on each BA list shall not exceed 32.
3)
Support of system Information for multiband network
The network carries out compatibility handling of MSs of various classes through system
information (type 2 / 2bis / 2ter and 5 / 5bis / 5ter). The radio network controls the MSs to
access and handover correctly and guarantees good services.
Huawei GSM system carries out thorough compatibility processing of Phase 1 and
Phase 2 900 MSs, Phase 1 and Phase 2 1800 MSs and multiband MSs, and supports
system information type 2 / 2bis / 2ter and 5 / 5bis / 5ter.
The BA1 list is sent in system information type 2 for re-selection. The BA2 list is sent in
the system information type 5 for handover. In GSM900 system, the frequency channels
are numbered from 1 to 124. Coding can be done on one list without 2bis / 2ter / 5bis /
5ter when the bitmap format is used. However, this should be adjusted after the
multiband system is employed.
For the GSM900 cells, the GSM1800 frequency channels on its adjacent cell list are for
multiband MSs. They are transmitted via the system information type 2ter / 5ter. Only a
2-125
Feature Description
multiband MS supports the system information type 2ter / 5ter. Whereas the frequency
channels of its GSM900 adjacent cells are placed in the system information type 2 / 5
and can be coded in the bitmap format. The Phase 1 MS recognizes the bitmap format
only. This ensures compatibility with Phase 1 GSM900 MSs.
For the GSM1800 cells, they are handled in a similar way. The 900M frequency channels
on the list of its adjacent cells are for multiband MSs, transmitted through the system
information type 2ter / 5ter. Whereas the frequency channels of its GSM1800 adjacent
cells are placed in the system information type 2/5. As they cannot be coded on one list,
the BA list needs to be split into two parts, transmitted respectively in the system
information type 2 (or 5) and 2bis (or 5bis). The system information type 2bis (5bis) is for
single-band M1800 MSs and multiband MSs only.
For the multiband network, it is required that the equipment should support the system
information type 2ter/5ter.
4)
ECSC (Early Classmark Sending Control)
ECSC indicates whether MS is required to report the MS Classmark3 voluntarily and

early. For further details refer to the protocol 0408. On receipt of the Classmark change
message, MS will send the additional Classmark message to the network as early as
possible. Classmark3 information includes the power messages of various frequency
bands of multi-frequency MS. In the handover between different frequency bands, power
level should be correctly described. It is essential to know the Classmark3 message
when making a paging call or sending the BA2 list in different bands.
The sampling range of the ECSC is as follows:
ECSC=1, transmission required.
ECSC=0, transmission not required.
This function comes into beings for the multiband-networking situation. And the
information in Classmark3 is for multiband application.
In case of single-band networking, it is advisable to set this parameter to 0. In case of
multiband networking, the recommended value of ECSC is 1 so that signaling flow can
be reduced.
The parameter ECSC is transmitted in system information type 3.
5)
MBR (Multi-Band Report)
MBR serves to help the network to notify the MS that the 6 adjacent cells reported must
cover multiple bands.
In the single-band GSM system, when the MS reports the adjacent cell measurement
results to the network, it need only report the 6 adjacent cells with strongest signals in a
band. When there is a multi-band network, the operator will usually expect the MS to
have the priority to enter a band in time of handover depending on the actual status of the
2-126
Feature Description
network. Therefore, the MS is expected to report the measurement results based not
only on the level of the signals but also on the band of the signals. The system parameter
Multi-band Report, therefore, serves to notify the mobile station to report the multi-band
adjacent messages.
In the multiband network, the following situation often occurs because the propagation
loss in the 1800 MHz band is larger than that of the 900MHz band: among the 6 adjacent
cells with strongest signals as reported by MSs, none of them is a GSM 1800 cell. This
will affect the absorption of traffic by the GSM1800 network. In this case, the network can
request the multiband MSs to send the MR about the adjacent 1800MHz cells by setting
the MBR value. By setting different values for MBR, the MSs can report the messages of
the adjacent cells of different bands as required when submitting the MRs of 6 best
adjacent cells.
MBR is represented in decimal digits, with the ranges from 0 to 3. Its implication is shown
in Table 2-14.
Table 2-14 MBR implication
MBR
0
1
6)
Implication
MS shall report the measurement results of 6 adjacent cells with strongest signals known and allowed by
NCC depending on the signal level of the cells, regardless of which band the cells are in.
MS shall report the measurement results of an adjacent cell in each band with strongest signals, which are
known and allowed by NCC on the adjacent cell list. Then it shall report the adjacent cells in the band used
by the current service area in the remaining space of the report. If there is still space left, it shall report the
status of the other adjacent cells, regardless of which band they are in.
The MS shall report the measurement results of two adjacent cells in each band with strongest signals
known and allowed by NCC on the adjacent cell list. Then it shall report the adjacent cells in the band used
by the current service area in the remaining space of the report. If there is still space left, it shall report the
status of the other adjacent cells, regardless of which band they are in.
The mobile station shall report the measurement results of three adjacent cells in each band with strongest
signals known and allowed by NCC on the adjacent cell list. Then it shall report the adjacent cells in the band
used by the current service area in the remaining space of the report. If there is still space left, it shall report
the status of the other adjacent cells, regardless of which band they are in.
PI (Cell Reselection Parameter Index)
PI is used to notify MS whether to adopt C2 as cell reselection parameter and to

calculate whether the parameter of C2 exist.
Value range of PI: Y or N.
Y indicates that MS should extract parameters from broadcasting of system information
in cell to work out C2 value and use the value to serve as the standard of cell reselection;
N indicates that MS should use C1 to serve as cell reselection standard (i. e. C2 = C1).
Generally, PI is set as Y in multiband network.
2-127
Feature Description
III. Traffic guide strategy in multiband network

In the multiband networking, one of the most important purposes is to try to let GSM1800
network absorb or share traffic so as to satisfy the increasing requirement of network
capacity and quality. The following principles should be followed.
z
In the early stage of multiband network construction, try to let GSM1800 cells
absorb multiband subscribers.
Realize the continuous coverage of GSM1800 network in hot spot areas.
When the number of multiband subscribers reaches a certain level, use different
bands to share traffic thus to reduce handover and provide better service.
The carrier can realize different traffic control strategy through real-time adjustment of
related parameters.
Different traffic control methods are used for different MS states. GSM1800 cell can have
higher priority or better adjacent cell measurement comparison value through the
configuration of system parameters. So when the subscriber turns on the mobile to
select cell in idle mode or reselects cell in standby state, GSM1800 cell can be more
likely to be the serving cell for multiband subscribers. In this way, the subscriber is more
likely to wait at GSM1800 before a call connection; during the connection of MS call, the
traffic distribution can be adjusted by directed retry. In connected state, try to connect as
much as possible traffic to high level GSM1800 cells in lower layers through cell
hierarchy and specifying different hierarchical cell structures (HCS); the multiband traffic
handover can be used to make traffic load more rational.
The following describes in detail the cell selection, cell reselection, directed retry, cell
hierarchy and specifying HCS, and multiband handover.
1)
Cell Selection and Cell Reselection
In idle mode, the system guides the traffic absorption by controlling the process of MS
cell selection and cell reselection.
When MS turns on, it first needs to select cell so that to confirm its serving cell. Principle
of cell selection: cells allowing to be accessed and cells with high priority are first
selected; for the cells with the same priorities, the cell with maximum C1 value is first
selected. The C1 value of selected cell should be greater than zero. C1 value is
calculated as follows:
C1 = RxLEV RxLEV _ Access _ MIN MAX ((MS _ TxPWR _ MAX _ CCH P ),0 )
RxLEV Access MIN range: 0~63, 0 is corresponding with -110dBm, 63 is corresponding

with -47dBm.
MS TxPWR MAX CCH value range:
z
GSM900: 0~19 available, 0 is corresponding to 43dBm, 1 is corresponding to

41dBm. The value of higher level is 2dB greater than that of lower level.
2-128
Feature Description
GSM1800: 0~15 available, 0 is corresponding to 30dBm, 1 is corresponding to
28dBm. Step is 2dB.

In the multiband network, owing to the strong fading of signals in GSM1800 frequency
band, signals in GSM900 frequency band is stronger. In order to enable MS can be
accessed to GSM1800 system, the cell selection priority can be controlled by setting
value of cell bar qualify (CBQ) and cell bar access (CBA). The signals in GSM1800 cell
are generally weaker than that in GSM900 cell. To enable the multiband MS to select
GSM1800 cell preferentially, GSM1800 cell can be set as Normal and GSM900 cell as
Low.
Table 2-15 Cell selection/reselection hierarchy
Case
1
2
3
4
CBQ
CBA
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Cell selection
Normal
Barred
Low
Low
Cell reselection
Normal
Barred
Normal
Normal
When selecting cell, GSM900 cell is set as CBQ=1, CBA=0 and GSM1800 is set as
CBQ=0, CBA=0. This enables GSM1800 cell to have a higher priority.
After MS completes cell selection, it should reselect cell in standby state in order to select
a better serving cell. The parameter that decides cell reselection is C2. MS reselection
principle is to select the cell with maximum C2 value as the serving cell. C2 depends on
the following factors:
z
C2=C1+CRO-TOH(PT-T) (PT<31)
C2=C1-CRO
(PT=31)
Where, the value Cell Reselection Offset (CRO) decides the difficulty of cell reselection
and Temporary Offset (TO) functions within penalty time (PT).
CRO value can be 0, 1, 63 with grade as unit, which are corresponding to 0=0dB;
1=2dB; 63=126dB respectively.
TO value can be 0, 1, and 7, which are corresponding to 0=0dB; 1=10dB; 6=60dB;
7=infinite respectively.
PT value can be 0, 1, and. 31, which are corresponding to 0=20s, 1=40s, and 30=620s
respectively.
H ( ) = 0 if PT-T<0
H ( ) = 1 if PT-T>0
C1 indicates the quality of radio channel. The greater C1 value, the better quality of
channel. C2 is corrected manually. C2 value of each cell can be adjusted through CRO
value. So the C2 value can be calculated according to CRO, TO, and PT so as to confirm
2-129
Feature Description
the cell reselected for MS. That is to say, C2 value of GSM1800 cell can be greater than
that of GSM900 cell by setting parameters that can affect C2 value, such as CRO.
Therefore, though signals in GSM1800 cell are weaker that of GSM900 cell, GSM1800
cell can still be reselected for MS by setting parameters.
Parameters of cell selection and reselection can be flexibly used to control MS to select
GSM1800 network as required in network planning; under the precondition that network
quality is guaranteed, these parameters can be used to make MS establish calls in
GSM1800 network so as to share the load of GSM900 network.
2)
Directed retry
Provided that the process to initiate a call by an MS has completed switching, connection,
control of some signaling and it is time to for SDCCH to assign TCH so as to connect the
speech channel of both parties. However, it is found that the TCH of this cell is full. In this
case, directed retry can be used to assign TCH of adjacent cells for MS from SDCCH
thus to guarantee the successful connection. At the same time, the traffic is shared.
3)
Layers and levels of network
Under the connected state, traffic between frequency bands can be distributed rationally
through abundant Huawei multiband handover This is the core of multiband traffic guide
and control strategy.
Huawei hierarchy handover algorithm divides a cell into 4 layers each layer with 16 levels.
This meets the need of complicated networking circumstances. The design concept of
this hierarchy has fully considered the collaboration with the current network equipment
and the requirement of future network development. The cell layers and levels are as
Umbrella
Cell
GSM900
Cell
GSM 1800
Cell
Layer 4
GSM 900
GSM 900
GSM 900
GSM 900
Layer 3
GSM 1800
GSM1800
GSM1800
Layer 2
GSM900
GSM900
GSM900
GSM1800
GSM1800
GSM1800
GSM900
Layer 1
Micro Cell
GSM1800
Figure 2-36 Cell layers and levels

The GSM system covering the same area is divided into 4 layers. The high layer is the
fourth layer, i. e. umbrella-like cellular, which is generally is a GSM900 cell with wide
2-130
Feature Description
coverage. It has two functions: covering and quick connection of MS. The middle layer
consists of GSM900 macro cells. These are the main cells of the system and most of
subscribers gather in this layer. The followed layer consists of GSM1800 micro cells with
small coverage. This layer is the main target for capacity expansion so as to solve the
problem of short resource of frequencies. The bottom layer consists of GSM1800 Pico
cells, which is to meet the requirements of hot spot and blind spot areas. For the priority,
the cell in lower layer has a higher priority.
Considering the future network development, to make network planning and optimization
more detailed and more flexible, the layer should combine with level division, that is to
say, each layer should be divided into several levels. Each layer of these four layers is
divided into 16 priorities.
For the description of handover, please refer to 2.3.6 .
IV. Features of GSM1800

1)
Propagation characteristics of GSM1800
The working frequency of GSM1800 is two times as that of GSM900. According to

COST-231 model and practical experience, the propagation loss of GSM1800 inside
stadia is 6dB greater than that of GSM900 and the propagation loss of GSM1800 outside
stadia is 10dB greater than that of GSM900. The propagation loss inside buildings is
5~17dB higher (it varies from material to material). The fast fading of GSM1800 is a
disadvantage to realize the fine coverage of GSM1800 and the condition of GSM1800
coverage is directly related with the performance of network. Moreover, electromagnetic
diffraction of GSM1800 is poorer that than of GSM900.
2)
GSM1800 coverage requirements
a) Outdoor coverage
The outdoor coverage can be easily realized if the distance between sites is not too far. If
necessary, besides the installation of GSM1800 equipment on the site of original
GSM900 site, the new sites should be installed in proper places.
b) Indoor coverage
In order to guarantee the fine indoor coverage of GSM1800, the distance between BTSs
in the city should not exceed 1000m. In the city with buildings in reinforced concrete
structure, which penetration loss is very great, so it is recommended that the distance
between BTSs should be 500~800m.
3)
GSM1800 coverage mode
There are three coverage modes for GSM1800 network in multiband network: Fine
continuous coverage, continuous coverage of hot spot areas, scattered coverage of hot
spot areas.
a) Fine continuous coverage
2-131
Feature Description
This coverage mode has the following advantages: GSM1800 is easy to absorb traffic
and has less handovers and high quality of operation; the frequency planning and
network optimization is easy to be realized and the traffic distribution is easy to be
controlled; after sites are constructed, if capacity expansion is needed, it is only needs to
configure carrier instead of constructing new sites; and it is convenient to be constructed
and maintained. The disadvantage is that the investment is large and it is hard to select
sites in one time.
b) Continuous coverage of hot spot areas
This coverage mode has the following disadvantages: the traffic absorption of GSM1800
is limited and there are frequent multiband handovers; strict requirement for locating
traffic hot spot; it is hard to plan frequencies and optimize network due to the irregular
distribution of GSM1800 BTSs. The construction and maintenance is complicated. The
advantage is that the site in highly intense areas can be gradual constructed so as to
save the investment.
c) Scattered coverage of hot spot areas
This coverage mode has the following disadvantages: the traffic absorption of GSM1800
is low and there are frequent multiband handovers; strict requirement for locating traffic
hot spot; it is hard to plan frequencies and optimize network due to the irregular
distribution of GSM1800 BTSs. The construction and maintenance is complicated. The
advantage is that the initial investment is small.
V. Multiband networking modes

There are three modes for multiband networking: standalone MSC networking, shared
MSC/standalone BSC networking, and shared BSC. In general, the former two modes
are called standalone networking and shared BSC network is also known as mixed
networking.
1)
Standalone MSC networking
Standalone MSC networking refers to that GSM900 and GSM1800 use different MSCs
for networking respectively, as shown in Figure 2-37.
2-132
Feature Description
BTS
BSC
MS
M S C /V L R
BTS
E IR
OMC
H L R /A U C
SMC
BTS
MS
BSC
M S C /V L R
BTS
G SM 900
G SM 1800
Figure 2-37 Standalone MSC networking mode

The standalone MSC networking has the following features:
z
No impact on original network
Clear network planning, clear network data configuration, and easy to construct.
Satisfy the requirement of long-term capacity expansion.
Convenient to manage the whole network and develop new services.
The initial investment of network is relative large but the investment for each
subscriber is the smallest.
Introduce competition so as to lower equipment investment and improve quality of

service.
Besides the above features, the standalone MSC networking increases the inter-office
handovers and position updates, thus the load of signaling link is increased. In addition,
the standalone MSC networking has the problem of collaboration of equipment of
different providers. In a long-term view, it is better than mixed networking.
2)
Shared MSC / standalone BSC networking
Shared MSC / standalone BSC network refers to GSM900 and GSM1800 network
adopts the same MSC and different BSCs for networking, as shown in Figure 2-38.
2-133
Feature Description
BTS
MS
BSC
BTS
EIR
OMC
MSC/VLR
SMC
HLR/AUC
BTS
MS
BSC
BTS
GSM1800
GSM900
Figure 2-38 Shared MSC/standalone BSC networking

Shared MSC/standalone BSC networking has the following features:
z
It has impact on the original network.
It needs to plan NSS again and it is hard to be constructed.
It is hard to expand its capacity. As network develops, construction and

maintenance might become difficult.
The initial investment of network is relative small and the investment for each
subscriber is small.
Introduce competition so as to lower equipment investment and improve quality of

service.
BSC has backup function so the network security is good.
3)
Shared BSC networking
Shared BSC networking refers to that BTSs of GSM900 and GSM1800 access the same
BSC or multiband mixed BTS accesses BSC, as shown in Figure 2-39.
BTS
MS
BTS
BSC
BTS
EIR
OMC
MSC/VLR
SMC
HLR/AUC
BTS
MS
BTS
BSC
BTS
GSM900
GSM1800
Figure 2-39 Shared BSC networking mode

Shared BSC networking has the following features:
2-134
BTS GSM1800/GSM900
Feature Description
z
It might impact on original network greatly, especially when BSC has a small
capacity.
It needs to plan NSS and BSS again so the construction is difficult.
It is hard to expand its capacity. As network develops, construction and

maintenance might become difficult.
Development of new services is restricted.
It cannot introduce competition thus it is hard to lower the cost and to improve
service.
The initial investment of network is the smallest and the investment for each
subscriber is the largest.
2.2.9 Carrier Mutual-assistance

I. Overview
Carrier mutual-assistance includes BCCH carrier mutual-assistance, baseband FH
carrier mutual-assistance and the mutual-assistance mixed the above.

1)
BCCH mutual-assistance
When MS is in the idle mode, it needs to know some information about network
infrastructure. BSC sends such information to the BTS, which will broadcast on the
BCCH channel. BCCH channel is a low-capacity channel and can send a 23-byte
message every 0.235 second. Such broadcast information includes cell selection
information, adjacent cell information, access control information, dedicated channel
control information, cell identification, location area, packet system information, etc.
When fault occurs in BCCH of a cell, all TRX services in this cell will be interrupted. To
avoid the interruption of other TRX services in the cell when fault occurs in BCCH,
another available TRX in the cell can be used to replace fault TRX so that the service
continues to be provided. After the fault of TRX has been removed, the BCCH can be
switched to the original TRX. This is called BCCH mutual-assistance.
2)
Baseband FH carrier mutual-assistance
If a TRX (not BCCH carrier) has fault in a baseband FH cell, this will decrease the
number of frequencies that participate in FH so as to decrease the communication
quality of the cell. If TRX submits a report that the Disable state of a BT is changed, BSC
starts carrier mutual-assistance and the frequency of faulted TRX is deleted from
sequence number of FH frequencies, then the data are sent to TMU and TMU delivers
these data to the corresponding TRX in the cell. Thus the communication quality is
guaranteed.
3)
Mixed mutual-assistance
2-135
Feature Description
For a baseband FH cell, if its BCCH has fault, it needs to start a TRX participating in FH
to replace original TRX where BCCH is in. To this end, the cell needs to use baseband
hopping TRX fault handling provided by the system to delete the carrier participating in
mutual-assistance from the corresponding FH sequence number so as to prevent this
carrier from affecting other TRX FHs. At the same time, this TRX is changed to a TRX not
participating in FH.
Therefore, BCCH mutual-assistance includes two processes:
z
BCCH mutual-assistance
The TRX participating in baseband FH is changed to be a not participating in FH

one.
Note:
It is through the baseband FH TRX fault handling function that the process to change the TRX participating
base FH to a not participating in FH one is realized.

The parameters that the faulted TRX handling function of BCCH mutual-assistance and
baseband hopping TRX fault is related are as shown in Table 2-16.
Table 2-16 Parameter explanation of cell configuration data table
Parameter
Cell TRX switchover

permitted
BCCH mutual-aid
switchover allowed
Hopping TRX failure
SO permitted
Value range:
Yes/No
Whether cell BCCH mutual assistance is permitted or not.
Not switch back
The original BCCH carrier is recovered, it is not allowed to switch

back.
Instant switchover after the original BCCH carrier is recovered.
After the original BCCH carrier recovers, instant switchover does not
take place. However, switchover takes place during the resource
check at 2:00AM. (Recommended).
Instant switchover
Switchover when
checking resource
Yes/No
Not switchover
Hopping TRX
recovery SO sel.
Description
Instant switchover
Switchover when
checking resource
Whether switchover is permitted in case TRX failure occurs.

Switchover is not permitted after the recovery of faulted hopping
carrier.
Instant switchover is permitted after the recovery of faulted hopping
carrier.
After the faulted hopping carrier recovers, switchover does not take
place. However, switchover takes place during the resource check at
2:00AM. (Recommended)
When faulted TRX of BCCH mutual-assistance or baseband FH is being handled,

corresponding alarm messages will be reported. So do when switching back.
Related alarms are as follows:
z
BCCH mutual-assistance occurs in cell 650

2-136
Feature Description
BCCH mutual-assistance switches back in cell 651
Baseband hopping TRX fault handling occurs in cell 652
Baseband hopping faulted TRX recovery handling occurs in cell 653
Note:
1) The function of BCCH mutual-assistance and baseband hopping TRX fault handling cannot be used with
the function of time slot baseband hopping simultaneously.
2) If SDCCH/TCH dynamic regulation and BCCH mutual-assistance take place at the same time, BCCH
mutual-assistance has the highest priority and SDCCH/TCH dynamic regulation recover original data.
3) When carriers in a cell are managed by different TMUs, do not configure any carrier mutual-assistance
parameters.
2.2.10 Cell Broadcast

I. Overview
Cell broadcast is a specific service of the GSM system, broadcast information to all
mobile stations in a specific area periodically. The MS supporting this service can
monitor this broadcast information continuously and this information can be displayed on
the MS terminals. The typical examples of cell broadcast are to broadcast traffic
information and weather forecast.
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (SMSCB) allows short message to be broadcast
to all mobile stations in certain areas. These areas may be one or several cells, even the
entire PLMN area. The short message from Cell Broadcast Centre (CBC) is sent to BSC,
and BSC will manage and dispatch the message, and send the received message to
BTS, which can control the flow of short message broadcast.
The architecture of cell broadcast system is as shown in Figure 2-40.
WAN
OMC
CBC
Remote connection
LAN connection
LAN
CBC
CDB
CDB
BTS
GMEM
GMEM
...
GMEM
GMEM
...
Figure 2-40 Cell broadcast system architecture
2-137
BSC
BTS
BTS
BSC
Feature Description
II. Cell broadcast functions

1)
Receiving and storing of short messages
CDB receives and stores the short message from CBC. There are three kinds of
commands to broadcast short messages sent from the CBC: send a new broadcast
short message, delete an outdated message or a message that meet specified
requirements, and replace an old message with a new one. CDB handles these three
cases respectively and updates the memory of short messages, i. e., adding the new
message to the short message database. On the reception of new command it deletes
the older one, or deletes the older message before adding a new message after the
reception of replacing message. If old message can not be deleted then the new
message will not be added.
2)
Dispatching and transmitting of short messages
Every short message should be broadcast in specific areas, which correspond to one or
more cells. In the meantime, every message has its own transmission requirements, i. e.
the transmit times and frequencies are different. BSC should send each message to the
specific area according to its transmit requirements. When a cell requests multiple short
message, BSC should calculate the transmitting time sequence according to specific
message dispatch algorithm, and send these messages to BTS in turn according to the
assigned sequence.
3)
Responding to the query of cell broadcast centre
While storing and transmitting short messages, CDB will record the completion message,
the number sent by each cell, message load conditions of each cell and the broadcast
channel state of each cell. CBC can keep track of the current system running state by
querying and monitoring the cell broadcast system. It can adjust and optimize the system
to ensure satisfactory running. When fault occurs in cell, CDB will report it to CBC, which
will stop sending short messages to this cell. When CBC identifies that a specific
broadcast message is been sent, it will send a command to delete or replace this
message from CDB to reduce its load.
III. Cell broadcast features

1)
Supporting MS DRX mode
If MS in idle mode has selected its serving cell, it is ready to monitor the paging message
from this cell. To lower the power consumption of MS, the GSM specification adopts the
discontinuous receiving mechanism (DRX), i. e. each subscriber (IMSI) corresponds to a
dedicated paging group and each group corresponds to a paging sub-channel of the cell.
MS recognizes its paging group and the corresponding paging sub-channel according to
the last three digits of the IMSI and PCH allocation on service cell. MS in idle mode uses
its own paging sub-channel to receive the paging message (or to monitor the receiving
level of the BCCH carrier of the non-serving cell). MS ignores the message from other
paging sub-channel or even shuts down the power of some hardware to lower its power
2-138
Feature Description
consumption during the broadcasting of other paging sub-channels. But MS must

measure the network messages task periodically.
The BSC supporting DRX mode needs to send scheduling messages to satisfy the
requirement of the discontinuous receiving by MS. One dispatch message contains the
information of the short messages to be sent one after another in a cell. The cycle
occupied by short messages in one dispatch message is called dispatch cycle. Dispatch
message contains the descriptions of each short message to be broadcast according to
the transmit sequence, and indicates the message position in dispatch cycle. Mobile
subscriber can read concerned short message in less time by reading dispatch message,
thus minimizing power consumption.
2)
Supporting traffic control for BTS
Transmit sequence of short messages in each cell is dispatched by BSC and transmitted
by BTS. Each TRX maintains one message buffer and sends short message periodically
to MS through specific channel. Thus, there will be an asynchronous state of sending
short messages between BSC and BTS. In this case, BTS will report this asynchronous
state to BSC in the form of load indication message. If a specific TRX receives too many
short messages and can not send them in time, BSC will temporarily stop sending short
messages of this TRX. If a TRX barely receives short messages, BSC will send out
some short messages so that the time sequence for sending short message in this cell
will be met. By sending broadcast messages to BTS to control traffic, CDB can schedule
the balance of the broadcast system of the whole cell. Thus the requirement of sending
broadcast messages is satisfied as much as possible.
2.2.11 Radio Channel Allocation

BSC is responsible for the allocation of circuit channel and PCU for the allocation of
packet data channel.
1)
Radio channel allocation requirements
Radio channel allocation is based on the following requirements:

z
Initial channel allocation: An idle MS enters active mode during MOC, paging
response, or location updating.
Connection allocation: The channels allocated can not meet the requirements. For
example, MS has been allocated SDCCH, but if need to transfer speech or data.
Handover: Due to the subscriber mobility or the change in the interference level, it is
necessary to hand the MS call to another channel.
For the dedicated channel allocation management of the BSC system, VEA (Very Early
Allocation) and EA (Early Allocation) are used in a combined manner as an allocation
strategy.
VEA refers to the allocation of TCH at initial stage. EA refers to the allocation of TCH after
the initial allocation of SDCCH.
2-139
Feature Description
During channel allocation in the BSC, the VEA is used for some special calls. For
common calls, the EA technique is used, which can effectively improve channel
utilization efficiency.
2)
Radio channel allocation algorithm
BSC channel allocation algorithm selects the channel for allocation by considering
channel interference, configuration, history record, load distribution, MS transmitted
power, etc., and based on the specific call event and environment.
Channel interference directly determines such critical traffic statistic indices as the
quality of communication completion ratio and call drop rate on the channel. It is the most
important factor to be considered during the channel allocation. The measurable
interference includes uplink interference of the idle channel and the uplink / downlink
interference of the occupied channels.
The rule for the interference-based channel allocation algorithm is to select the channel
of lower interference for allocation. But there are two special cases. The first is that for a
high-level call or user, the MSC may have an interference limit for channel allocation.
The channel with interference higher than this limit can not be allocated. The second is
the specific call environment in which the maximum transmitting power capacity of MS
and path loss are considered. The call with better receiving level can be allocated with a
channel having severer interference. The channel with lower interference is reserved for
the call of poorer receiving level and thus the call completion ratio and communication
quality can be improved.
The channel allocation algorithm based on channel configuration is based on the
following factors: whether the carrier of the channel is that of BCCH, the frequency reuse
distance of the TRX, whether the channel use frequency hopping, and the number of
frequency in the frequency hopping group. Proper frequency allocation based on
channel configuration helps to reduce the interference of network, and improve the
quality of network.
The channel allocation algorithm based on channel history record is characterized by the
memory function. The history record includes the channel seizure success or failure and
call drops, and it needs to verify whether the cause of seizure failure and that of call drop
lies in the radio channel itself. Such history records can provide reliable facts for the
current channel allocation.
The channel allocation algorithm based on load balancing is characterized by even
distribution of the carrier frequencies, Time Slots (TS) and sub-TSs during the channel
allocation. It can reduce adjacent-channel interference and same frequency interference.
On the other hand, it also helps to avoid the risk caused by calls being concentrated on a
few carriers.
There are also special allocation methods for specific call events such as intra-cell
handover and IUO handover. For example, intra-cell handover is mainly caused by the
2-140
Feature Description
quality problem of the speech channel, which indicates that the carrier where the original
channel is located has suffered interference. If the original channel frequency hops, then
some frequency bands in the frequency-hopping group of the original channel may have
suffered severe interference. In case of intra-cell handover, the allocation of new channel
may select the carrier and frequency hopping group that are different from those of the
original channel.
3)
Queuing
Channel allocation algorithm used in the BSC supports queuing. In case of initial
allocation, no queuing takes place because an MS will resend the channel request.
Queuing is mainly applied to connection allocation and handover, where the MSC
decides if queuing is allowed in the allocation request or handover request. If no
allocable radio channel is available and queuing is allowed, then the M900/M1800 BSC
will queue the allocation requests. Try to allocate traffic channel with the allowed period
of time so as to reduce the subscribers wait time.
4)
Allocation by priority
The channel allocation algorithm in the M900/M1800 BSC supports different priority
levels, that is, channel allocation can be carried out according to the preset priority levels.
In some cases, the request of higher priority can be forcibly implemented and can
occupy the channel, which is being used by a user of lower priority.
5)
Dynamic allocation of SDCCH
a) Purpose
The objective of SDCCH dynamic allocation is to optimize the usage of traffic channels
and signaling channels, reduce the occurrence of congestion on the SDCCH, and lower
the impact of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system performance.
The number of SDCCHs required is based on the traffic model, that is, the current traffic
distribution and statistical data about handover. An increase of short message service
will lead to the increase of requirement for the SDCCHs, which makes the prediction of
the SDCCHs requirement very difficult.
There may be the case that the number of users in a cell suddenly increases, and many
users can not access the network just because they fail to request the SDCCH. In this
case, TCHs have to be converted into SDCCHs so as to ensure that most of the users
can access the network and communication can be implemented through directed retry
function, which improves the call success rate.
b) Advantages
It's not necessary to work out the exact number of SDCCH in advance after
implementing SDCCH dynamic allocation. SDCCH dynamic allocation increases the
system capacity and improves the call completion ratio.
2-141
Feature Description
The disadvantage of SDCCH dynamic allocation is increased intra-cell handover traffic.

It can be overlooked on account of its advantages.
c) Approach
SDCCHs are allocated with the cell as a unit. The following should be configured in the
data management console: dynamic/static allocation of SDCCH, idle SDCCH threshold,
and maximum number of cell SDCCHs, minimum time for TCH recovery, etc.
If SDCCH allows dynamic allocation and satisfy the following conditions:
z
When number of SDCCHs is less than or equal to idle SDCCH threshold;
And number of existing SDCCHs in the cell is less than the maximum number of
SDCCHs;
Number of idle TCHs is greater than 4 or greater than the number of configuration
carriers.
The system will automatically select a TCH and turn it into SDCCH. At the same time,
BSC delivers configuration command to BTS to configure this TCH as SDCCH and
update the channel list of internal BSC.
When there are many idle SDCCHs, the SDCCH channels are dynamically converted
into TCHs.
6)
Dynamic allocation of PDCH
a) Introduction
To support GPRS service, two types of channels are introduced, i. e. , static PDCHs and
dynamic PDCHs. Static PDCHs are used for packet service only. Dynamic PDCH is
initialized as a TCH and controlled by BSC. When the static PDCHs are not sufficient, the
PCU will apply for dynamic PDCHs from the BSC. When the PCU is granted with the
control authority, dynamic PDCHs are used for packet service. On the contrary, if TCHs
are insufficient, the BSC can request dynamic PDCHs from the PCU. When the BSC is in
control, the dynamic PDCHs serve as TCHs. According to the protocol, following
channel combinations are provided.
z
PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
PBCCH+PCCCH
Huawei BSS supports the first three combinations.

b) Approach
The dynamic PDCH control is based on cell, the following two items should be
configured: Idle TCH threshold N1; application TCH decision period T (minute). Set a
Count for each cell with initial value being 0. Count value ranges -T~T. Adjust Count
every one minute. If the number of the current channels is greater than N1, then 1 is
2-142
Feature Description
added to the counter value, if the number of the current idle TCHs is less than or equal to
N1, then 1 is subtracted from the counter value. If the counter value is less than -T/2 after
adjustment, then the BSC requests dynamic PDCHs from the PCU. After the BSC
acquires the control power, dynamic PDCHs serve as TCHs. If any change takes place
to the current type of a dynamic PDCH, it is necessary to issue a configuration command
to the BTS so as to configure this channel as the current type and update the channel list
in the BSC.
c) Note:
It is difficult to predict the packet traffic of the cell. The introduction of dynamic PDCH can
improve the utilization of the channels.
Channel allocation follows the principle that circuit switching service being preferred to
packet switching service. The PCU will automatically release the dynamic PDCH when
the number of idle PDCH is enough.
2.3 GPRS Function

The GPRS functions supported by BSS include:
Radio link management and radio resources management.
Access control over the MS.
Provision of routes for the transfer of packet data.
The radio link management function involves mainly establishment, maintenance and
release of the radio links. The radio resources management function involves mainly
coding/decoding of radio packet channels, configuration of radio packet channels,
multiplexing of radio channels, switchover of radio channels between the circuit switched
traffic channel and the packet switched traffic channel and allocation of channels to the
MS.
The access control function serves primarily to solve the issue of channel contention and
allocate radio resources to the MS according to the requested QoS.
The routes serve to transfer the uplink data to Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN)
properly and receive the downlink data from the SGSN.
2.3.1 Supported Packet System Information

I. Overview
The packet system information broadcast in the cell serves mainly for the MS to access
the network. If the cell supports GPRS, the System Information 13 (SI13) shall be added
to the BCCH, if not, SI13 will not be broadcast. The cell can either be configured with the
2-143
Feature Description
PBCCH channel or without it. This will be notified to the MS via SI13. The main message
broadcast on the PBCCH are the dedicated packet system information of GPRS.

There are following types of packet system information:
1)
Packet System Information Type 1 (PSI1)
This information is sent by the network on the PBCCH or PACCH, giving information for
Cell selection, for control of the PRACH, for description of the control channel(s) and
optional global power control parameters. This information shall not be segmented
across more than one RLC/MAC control block.
2)
This information is sent by the network on PBCCH and PACCH, giving information of
reference frequency lists, cell allocation, GPRS mobile allocations and PCCCH
descriptions being used in the cell. PSI2 also contains Non-GPRS cell options applicable
for non-packet access. This message shall not be segmented across more than one
RLC/MAC control block.
3)
This information is sent by the network on the PBCCH or PACCH, giving information of
the BCCH allocation (BA_GPRS) in the neighboring cells and cell selection parameters
for serving cell and non-serving cells. This information shall not be segmented across
more than one RLC/MAC control block.
4)
Packet System Information Type 3 bis (PSI3bis)
This information is sent by the network on the PBCCH and PACCH giving information of
the BCCH allocation in the neighboring cells and cell selection parameters for
non-serving cells. This information shall not be segmented across more than one
RLC/MAC control block. If not all information fits into one instance of the PSI3bis, the
PSI3bis can be repeated.
5)
This information is optionally sent by the network on the PBCCH and PACCH giving
information directing the mobile station to make measurements on a list of serving cell
PDCHs, during the idle frame of those PDCHs. This information shall not be segmented
across more than one RLC/MAC control block.
6)
This optional information is sent by the network on the PBCCH giving information for
measurement reporting and network controlled cell reselection. If not all information fits
into one information, the remaining information will be sent in other instances of the PSI5.
The information is sent on PBCCH only if so indicated in PSI1.
7)
2-144
Feature Description
This information may be broadcast by the network on the PACCH. The information
provides the mobile station with GPRS cell specific access-related information. The
information in this information shall be the same as provided in the PSI13 on BCCH.
PSI1~PSI4 can either be broadcast on the PBCCH or sent on the PACCH. PSI5 can be
broadcast only on the PBCCH. PSI13 can be sent only on the PACCH. When there is
PBCCH in the cell, no PSI13 will be transferred on the PACCH, but PSI1 will be
broadcast periodically on it. When there is no PBCCH in the cell, only the PSI13 will be
broadcast periodically on the PACCH.
M900/M1800 BSS can transfer all the GPRS-related packet system information, provide
such functions as controlled re-transmission, high-speed re-transmission and low-speed
retransmission, and control the transfer of packet system information on the PACCH
based on the configuration of the PBCCH/PCCCH in a cell.
III. Data Configuration

At present, the PBCCH and PCCCH are not configured. Therefore, PSI13 is usually
broadcasted on PACCCH.
The configuration of PSI13 is realized with the command pcu add gprs. The following
parameters are involved.
1)
NMO
Description: network operation mode.

Value range: 0~3. 0 - network operation mode I, 1 - network operation mode II, 2 network operation mode III, 3 reserved.
Default: At present, the GPRS network usually has neither Gs interface nor PCCCH
configured. Therefore, this parameter is usually set as "1".
2)
T3168
Description: T3168 timer overtime value. The duration for MS to wait for the packet
uplink assignment message.
Value range: 500 ms, 1000 ms,, 4000 ms
Default: 1000ms
3)
T3192
Description: T3192 timer overtime value. The duration for the MS to wait for TBF
release after receiving the last data block.
Value range: 500 ms, 1000 ms, 1500 ms, 0 ms, 80 ms, 120 ms, 160 ms and 200 ms
Default: 500 ms
4)
DRXTimerMax
2-145
Feature Description
Description: maximum duration of non-DRX. The maximum duration for executing

non-DRX mode when MS is switching from packet transfer mode to packet idle mode.
Value range: no enter DRX mode immediately, 1 s 1 s, 2 s 2 s, 64 s 64 s
Default: 4 s, i.e., enter DRX mode after 4 seconds
5)
AccBurst
Description: the access burst format used by MS in PRACH, PTCCH/U or packet

control acknowledge message.
Value range: 8 bit, 11bit
Default: Some MSs do not support 11 bit access burst type, so it is recommended to set
it as "8 bit".
6)
CtrlAckType
Description: control acknowledge message type. The format adopted by MS in the

control acknowledge message.
Value range: 0, 1. 0 4 access burst used (TA can be obtained without sending "polling"
message), 1 - RLC/MAC control block used (TA can be obtained only after sending
"polling" message).
Default: 0
7)
BsCvMax
Description: maximum value of MS countdown timer

Value range: 0~15
Default: 4
8)
PanDec
Description: PAN_DEC used by MS N3102 counter. When MS T3182 times out, N3102
will reduce the value of PAN_DEC.
Value range: 0~7, nouse
Default: 3
9)
PanInc
Description: PAN_INC used by MS N3102 counter. When MS activates T3182 and

receives the corresponding acknowledge message from packet uplink, N3102 will
increase the value of PAN_DEC.
Value range: 0~7, nouse
Default: 3
10) PanMax
2-146
Feature Description
Description: PAN_MAX of MS N3102 counter, i.e. the maximum value of N3102.

Value range: 4, 8, 32, nouse
Default: 12
2.3.2 Supported GPRS MS Modes

I. GPRS MS types
The integrated GPRS MS consists of ME and SIM. ME includes MT and TE. GPRS MS
is divided into three classes:
1)
Class A GPRS MS
Class A GPRS MS can simultaneously be connected to both GSM and GPRS networks
and activated in both networks, monitor information of each system and start them
simultaneously, and provide GPRS service and GSM circuit-switched service
simultaneously, including short message service. Class A MS subscriber can
initiate/receive call in both services and handover automatically between packet data
service and circuit service.
2)
Class B GPRS MS
Class B GPRS MS can be connected to both GSM and GPRS networks simultaneously.
It can be used in GPRS packet service and GSM circuit-switched service separately but
not simultaneously, i. e. in a certain moment, it uses either circuit-switched service or
packet-switched service. Class B MS also can automatically handover.
3)
Class C GPRS MS
At a certain moment, Class C MS can be connected only GSM network or GPRS If it

supports both packet-switched and circuit-switched services, the service handover
should be completed manually. It cannot use both services simultaneously.
II. GPRS MS multislot hierarchy

GPRS system can use the MAC layer function to provide a subscriber with the multislot
mode. However, the corresponding MS should be capable to support this mode. The
classification of MS under different multislot modes is listed as follows.
2-147
Feature Description
Table 2-17 Classification of MS under different multislot modes

Classification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Max. number of time slots
Rx
1
2
2
3
2
3
3
4
3
4
4
4
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
Tx
1
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
4
6
2
3
4
4
6
8
Min. number of time slots
Sum
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Tta
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
Ttb
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
a
a
a
a
a
0
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Tra
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
1
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
MS type
Trb
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
a
a
a
a
0
0
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
a=1 indicates that FH is adopted; a=0 for not adopting FH; b=1 indicates that FH being adopted or MS changes
frequency when it changes from receiving to transmitting; b=0 indicates that FH is not adopted and MS does not change
frequency when it changes from receiving to transmitting; c=1indicates that FH is adopted and MS changes frequency
when it changes from transmitting to receiving; c=0indicates that FH is not adopted and MS does not change frequency
when it changes from transmitting to receiving .
Rx indicates the maximum number of time slots used in an MS downlink in a TDMA frame. MS should support
configurations of time slot numbers indicated by all integers from 0 to RX. The receiving time slots can be discontinuous
by time. For the type 1 MS, its receiving time slots will be distributed in a receiving window with a size of RX. There is no
transmitting time slot between receiving time slots in the TDMA frame.
Tx indicates the maximum number of time slots used in an MS uplink in a TDMA frame. MS should support configurations
of time slot numbers indicated by all integers from 0 to Tx The transmitting time slots can be discontinuous by time. For
the type 1 MS, its transmitting time slots will be distributed in a transmitting window with a size of RX. There is no
receiving time slot between transmitting time slots in the TDMA frame.
Sum indicates the sum of all available time slots that can be used by MS in each TDMA frame. 1Rx + TxSum
Tta relates to the time needed for the MS to perform adjacent cell signal level measurement and get ready to transmit.
Ttb relates to the time needed for the MS to get ready to transmit.
Tra relates to the time needed for the MS to perform adjacent cell signal level measurement and get ready to receive.
Trb relates to the time needed for the MS to get ready to receive.
2-148
Feature Description
Huawei BSS system supports

z
MS of Type B
MS of Type C
MS with multi-slot capability ranging 1~12.
2.3.3 Supported RLC Modes

I. RLC acknowledged mode
Under RCL acknowledged mode, the transmission of RLC data block adopts
retransmission method. The transmitting party numbers RLC data block through block
sequence number (BSN), which can be used for retransmission and recombination. The
receiving party can transmit PACKET ACK/NACK message to request retransmit RLC
data block.
II. RLC non-acknowledged mode

The transmission of RLC data block under RLC non-acknowledged mode does not
support retransmission. But in the process of releasing uplink TBF, the last transmitted
uplink block might be retransmitted. The BSN of RLC data block header numbers the
RLC block data for recombination. The receiving party sends PACKET ACK/NACK to
transmit other necessary control signaling.
Huawei GPRS BSS supports RLC acknowledged mode and non-acknowledged mode.
2.3.4 Supported Channel Coding Scheme

PDTCH defines four coding schemes: CS-1~CS-4. Except for PRACH and TPCCH/U,
CS-1 is usually used for other packet control channels. For PRACH access burst,
defines two coding schemes. All coding schemes are forced for MS. Only CS-1 is forced
for network.
I. Channel coding:
z
Channel coding of PDTCH
The radio block bearing RLC data block can use 4 types of coding schemes. Parameters
of each coding scheme are shown in Table 2-18.
Table 2-18 Coding parameter of coding schemes
Channel coding scheme
RLC/MAC data block size (octets)
Rate kbit/s
CS-1
CS-2
CS-3
CS-4
23
33
39
53
9. 05
13. 4
15. 6
21. 4
2-149
Feature Description
z
Channel coding of PACCH, PBCCH, PAGCH, PPCH, PNCH and PTCCH
PACCH, PBCCH, PAGCH, PPCH, PNCH and downlink PTCCH adopt CS-1, uplink
PTCCH adopts the same coding scheme as PRACH.
z
Channel coding of PRACH
There are two types of packet access burst in PRACH: 8bit and 11bit packet access
burst.
8bit packet access burst bears 8 information bits. The same channel coding is adopted
for uplink packet access burst and random access burst. The coding scheme of 11-bit
packet access burst bears 11 information bit.
Huawei BSS supports all these four CS and dynamically handovers between them
according to radio transmission quality (RLC block retransmission rate of uplink
/downlink TBF).
II. Dynamic Additional Sub-TS

Under CS-1/CS-2, BSS is also based on the 16kbit/s link at the G-Abis interface. When
CS-3 and CS-4 is adopted, the rate of a PDCH is 15.6 kbit/s and 21.4 kbit/s, therefore,
when mapping the radio channels to the terrestrial channels, a PDCH is mapped to two
16 kbit/s links. However, the coding scheme adopted by PDCH is adjusted according to
the change of the radio transmission environment of the MS that occupies it. Mapping a
PDCH permanently onto two 16kbit/s links will greatly decrease the multiplexing ratio of
the G-Abis interface, and thus greatly reduce the utilization ratio of the G-Abis interface
transmission equipment.
With dynamic additional sub-TS allocation, M900/M1800 GPRS BSS can resolve the
transmission issue of CS-3 and CS-4 on the G-Abis interface perfectly. The dynamic
attached sub-slot technology is to statically allocate a main 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot and
dynamically allocate a attached 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot at the G-Abis interface for the
CS-3/CS-4 PDCH. With the dynamic additional sub-TS technology, it is not necessary for
GPRS BSS to upgrade the hardware of BTS, BSC or PCU for supporting CS-3 and CS-4.
In addition, in its support for CS-3 and CS-4, the multiplexing ratio of the G-Abis interface
is greatly improved, thus saving investments on the G-Abis interface transmission
equipment.
The dynamic additional sub-TS technology used by M900/M1800 GPRS BSS displays
the following features:
z
Any idle Sub-TS of the G-Abis interface can be used as additional sub-TS, so that
each has maximum utilization.
Within a same site address, the additional sub-TSs can be dynamically attached to
various main TSs to enhance the utilization ratio of this sub-TSs according to
statistical multiplexing rules.
2-150
Feature Description
z
The locations of the additional 16kbit/s sub-TS are relatively flexible. They do not
have to be adjacent to the main 16kbit/s sub-TS.
It packs and unpacks the data packets through software to avoid hardware
upgrading.

M900/M1800 BSS supports four types of coding schemes: CS-1~CS-4. The
configuration related to channel coding schemes is realized with the command pcu add
cspara. The following parameters are involved.
1)
UpFixCs
Description: CS fixedly adopted for uplink.

Value range: cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, unfixed
Default: cs2
2)
UpDefaultCs
Description: Default CS adopted for uplink. If the uplink configured to adjust CS type
dynamically, then the CS of the first TBF to transfer can be set by this parameter, the CS
of other TBF is dynamically adjusted according to the signal transmission quality.
Value range: cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4.
Default: cs2
3)
UpThdCs1Cs2
Description: The resend rate conversion threshold, i.e. when the resend rate of the
uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to this value, the coding scheme of it changes from
CS-1 to CS-2.
Value range: 0~100
Default: 5
4)
UpThdCs2Cs1
Description: Uplink TBF retransmission rate conversion threshold from CS-2 to CS-1,
i.e. when the uplink TBF retransmission rate is larger than or equals to this value, the
uplink TBF coding scheme changes from CS-2 to CS-1.
Value range: 0~100
Default: 10
5)
UpThdCs2Cs3
i.e. when the uplink TBF retransmission rate is smaller than or equals to this value, the
2-151
Feature Description
Value range: 0~100

Default: 10
6)
UpThdCs3Cs2
Value range: 0~100
Default: 20
7)
UpThdCs3Cs4
i.e. when the uplink TBF retransmission rate is smaller than or equals to this value, the
Value range: 0~100
Default: 10
8)
UpThdCs4Cs3
Value range: 0~100
Default: 20
9)
DnFixCs
Description: Fixedly adopted CS for downlink.

Value range: cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, unfixed.
Default: unfixed
10) DnDefaultCs
Description: Default CS adopted for downlink. If the downlink dynamically adjusts CS,
then the CS of the first TBF can be set by this parameter, the CS type of other TBF is
dynamically adjusted according to the signal transmission quality.
Value range: cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4.
Default: cs2
11) DnThdCs1Cs2
Description: Downlink TBF retransmission rate conversion threshold from CS-1 to CS-2,
i.e. when the downlink TBF retransmission rate is smaller than or equals to this value, the
downlink TBF coding scheme changes from CS-1 to CS-2.
2-152
Feature Description
Value range: 0~100

Default: 5
12) DnThdCs2Cs1
i.e. when the downlink TBF retransmission rate is larger than or equals to this value, the
Value range: 0~100
Default: 10
13) DnThdCs3Cs2
Value range: 0~100
Default: 20
14) DnThdCs3Cs4
i.e. when the downlink TBF retransmission rate is smaller than or equals to this value, the
Value range: 0~100
Default: 10
15) DnThdCs4Cs3
Value range: 0~100
Default: 20
16) MaxFixCs34Pdch
Description: The fixed maximum number of PDCH supporting CS-3/CS-4 in this cell.
Value range: 0~255
Default: none
2-153
Feature Description
2.3.5 Supported Network Control Modes

During the cell reselection required by network, the network requires MS to send MR so
as to control the cell reselection. Here three network control modes are defined.
z
NC0: MS controlled cell re-selection, no measurement reporting.
NC1: MS controlled cell re-selection, MS sends measurement reports.
NC2: Network controlled cell re-selection, MS sends measurement reports.
Huawei BSS supports NC0.
I. Data configuration
Network control mode parameter is configured with the command pcu add relatedinfo
in PCU.
Parameter: NCO
Description: Network control mode.
Value range: nc0, nc1, nc2
Default: Currently fixedly set as "nc0", meaning MS controlled cell re-selection, no
measurement reporting
2.3.6 Supported Network Operation Mode

GPRS network defines three network operation modes in order to uniformly coordinate
the pagings of circuit-switched and packet-switched service.
I. Network operation mode I

The network sends a CS paging message for a GPRS-attached MS, either on the same
channel as the GPRS paging channel (i.e., the packet paging channel or the CCCH
paging channel), or on a GPRS traffic channel. This means that the MS needs only to
monitor one paging channel, and that it receives CS paging messages on the packet
data channel when it has been assigned a packet data channel.
II. Network operation mode II

The network sends a CS paging message for a GPRS-attached MS on the CCCH
paging channel, and this channel is also used for GPRS paging. This means that the MS
needs only to monitor the CCCH paging channel, but that CS paging continues on this
paging channel even if the MS has been assigned a packet data channel.
2-154
Feature Description
III. Network operation mode III

The network sends a CS paging message for a GPRS-attached MS on the CCCH
paging channel, and sends a GPRS paging message on either the packet paging
channel (if allocated in the cell) or on the CCCH paging channel. This means that an MS
that wants to receive pages for both circuit-switched and packet-switched services shall
monitor both paging channels if the packet paging channel is allocated in the cell. No
paging co-ordination is performed by the network.
Table 2-19 shows channels that deliver circuit paging message and packet paging
message under various network modes.
Table 2-19 Network operation mode
Network operation mode
Circuit paging channel
Packet Paging Channel

CCCH Paging Channel
Packet Data Channel
CCCH Paging Channel
I
II
CCCH Paging Channel
III
CCCH Paging Channel
GPRS paging channel

CCCH Paging Channel
Not Applicable
CCCH Paging Channel
CCCH Packet Paging
Channel
CCCH Paging Channel
Paging coordination
Yes
No
No
Currently, Huawei GPRS BSS system supports three network operation modes.
2.3.7 Supported QoS

GPRS provides the subscriber with negotiable QoS configuration. GPRS QoS has five
basic attributes:
z
Precedence class;
Delay class;
Reliability class;
Peak throughput class
Mean throughput class.
Each attribute has multiple values available. The combination of different priorities
enables the system to support various applications with different QoSs required.
During the negotiation of QoS profile, MS can apply a value for every QoS attribute,
including the default value stored in HLR and used to create new account. Network also
needs to negotiate a priority for every attribute so that it can keep consistent with
effective GPRS resources. Network always provides adequate resource to support the
negotiated QoS profiles. RLC/MAC layer supports four radio priority levels, and whether
the cause for the uplink access is user data or signaling message transmission. This
information is used by the BSS to determine the radio access precedence and the
service precedence. The radio priority levels to be used for transmission of MO SMS
2-155
Feature Description
shall be determined by the SGSN and delivered to the MS in the Attach Accept message.
The radio priority level to be used for user data transmission shall be determined by the
SGSN based on the negotiated QoS profile and shall be delivered to the MS during the
PDP Context Activation and PDP Context Modification procedures.
Huawei BSS can satisfy MS QoS requirements as much as possible according to the
state of current radio resources.
2.3.8 Supported Assignment

When network side or MS requests to establish TBF for data transmission, GSM/GPRS
network can assign some channel resources for data transmission or refuse the request
according the multi-slot capability of MS and network resources state.
Network can assign TBF resource from CCCH, PACCH or PCCCH. According to the
direction of TBF data transmission, assignment can be divided into uplink and downlink
assignment. When channel resource is in short or for other causes, network can refuse
the request to establish TBF.
When MS requests to establish TBF for uplink data transmission, network sends
immediate assignment message on CCCH or packet uplink assignment message on
PCCCH to assign channel resource. When MS requests to establish uplink TBF during
its downlink TBF data transmission, network assigns packet uplink channel for MS on
PACCH. MS transmits data according to assigned channel resource.
When network requests to establish TBF for downlink data transmission, network can
send immediate assignment message on CCCH or packet assignment message on
PCCCH for MS to assign downlink channel resource. When MS requests to establish
downlink TBF during its uplink TBF data transmission, network can assign packet uplink
channel for MS through PACCH. MS transmits data according to assigned channel
resource.
Network assigns resource on different channels according to CCCH or PCCCH
configuration. Meanwhile, network can perform different assignments such as single
block assignment and packet resource assignment according to different access
requests, such as two phases, one phase, and single block request.
M900/M1800 BSS supports:
z
Packet uplink resource assignment on PACCH
Packet downlink resource assignment on PACCH
Uplink immediate assignment for TBF establishment on CCCH.
Downlink immediate assignment for TBF establishment on CCCH.
2-156
Feature Description
2.3.9 Supported Paging

In GPRS/GSM system, paging includes packet paging and circuit paging.
I. Packet paging
When there are downlink data that shall be sent to the MS, SGSN needs to initiate a
packet paging call so as to locate MS accurately. The paging request message
originated by the SGSN is sent through Gb interface to PCU, which converts it into the
packet paging request of the air interface (Um interface) before sending. If the PCCCH
channel is configured for the BSS system, the message will be sent on the PPCH directly.
If PCCCH is not configured for the system, PCU will send the message via the Pb
interface to the BSC, which sends it on the PCH.
After receiving packet paging message, MS will initialize the process of uplink TBF
establishment, and then sends the paging response packet in data form to PCU via the
air interface. PCU forwards the packet to SGSN. After receiving the paging response,
SGSN is ready to transmit downlink data.
II. Paging coordination

When a call reaches the MSC where the subscriber is located, the MSC sends a paging
message to all cells in that location area according to the registered location area of MS.
If there is Gs interface between SGSN and MSC, GPRS/GSM system operates in
network operation mode I and the paging service of GSM service can be sent through
GPRS packet channel. In other words, if an MS is GPRS-attached, its circuit paging go
from MSC to SGSN and then to PCU through the Gs and Gb interfaces, and PCU will
determine on which channel to transmit the paging.
In network operation mode I, if this MS has been assign with packet dedicated channel,
then the circuit paging is sent on PACCH; if this MS has not assigned with packet
dedicated channel and the system has not been configured with PCCCH, PCU forwards
the paging message to BSC through Pb interface. Then BSC sends this message on
PCH.
If there is no Gs interface between SGSN and MSC, GPRS/GSM system can operate
only in network operation mode II and mode III. In this case, the system sends circuit
paging on CCCH.
After receiving the circuit paging message, MS accesses the RACH and starts the circuit
connection setup process. If MS is currently handling GPRS service, MS will initiate
GPRS Suspend process to suspend GPRS service and it will not recover GPRS service
until circuit connection is released.
M900/M1800 BSS supports above-mentioned packet paging and paging coordination.
2-157
Feature Description
2.3.10 Timing Advance

Timing advance (TA) procedure is used to extract the correct TA value so that MS can
transmit radio block on uplink. TA includes tow parts:
I. Initial TA estimation
Initial TA estimation is based on a single access burst bearing packet channel. Request,
packet uplink assignment or packet downlink assignment message, estimate TA and
send to MS. MS uses this value for uplink transmission till a new value is provided.
II. Continuous TA update

The MS in packet transmission mode needs continuous TA update. TA update is born by
PTCCH assigned to MS. Uplink packet transmission uses packet uplink assignment
message to assign TA index (TAI) and PTCCH to MS. And downlink packet transmission
uses packet downlink assignment message to assign TA index (TAI) and PTCCH to
MSTAI specifies the PTCCH sub-channel for MS. On uplink, MS sends access burst on
assigned PTCCH. Network obtains TA from the burst.
Then network analyses the received TA and provides new TAs for all MSs that perform
TA update on this PDCH. New TAs is sent through downlink signaling message on
PTCCH/D. Network also can send TA in packet TA/power control message and packet
uplink acknowledged/negative message on PACCH.
Huawei GPRS BSS supports:
z
Continuous TA update procedure
Quick TA initial value
2.3.11 Measurement Report

Network can request MS to send MR. There are two types of MR:
I. Network control (NC) MR

Network carries relative network control parameters carried in PSI5 broadcast on
PBCCH, SI13 on BCCH, and PSI13 on PACCH to control MS.
Under NC1 or NC2 mode, MS should carry out NC measurement and indicate MR
period in PSI5.
II. Extended MR
Network can order MS to send extended MR. MS sending extended MR is controlled by
XT Measurement Order parameter. This parameter is contained in PSI5 or order packet
measurement message. Network broadcasts PSI5 on PBCCH, or sends order packet
2-158
Feature Description
measurement message on PCCCH or PACCH to address a specified MS. The value of

parameter EXT Measurement Order should be EM0, EM1.
When MS is under EM1 mode, it should carry out EM measurement. MR period is
specified in field EXT Reporting Period in PSI5 or in order packet measurement
message. After MS receives order of EM MR, it starts timer T3178 according to the
instructed report period. When T3178 is active, MS can reselect a new cell which is in
EM1 mode. If T3178 timeout duration is greater than the report period indicated in the
new cell, MS should immediately use this period to restart T3178. If timer timeout
duration is less than this period, then T3178 continues working.
Uplink MR is supported. The priority and quality of uplink transmission signal from MS to
site calculated by BTS is sent to PCU through inband signaling of Abis interface TRAU
frame and is used to generate MR.
2.3.12 Supported Flow Control

Gb interface and Um interface have different physical mediums and transfer protocols,
which leads to their different transfer rates. The data transfer rate of Gb interface is
greater than that of Um interface. Moreover, in downlink data transfer, the data transfer
through Um interface is restricted by MS multislot capacity, radio quality, whether there is
radio channel available in the cell. Thus the transfer rate is not constant and it is
necessary to implement flow control for downlink data.
When cell is in normal state, PCU starts flow control procedure: PCU periodically reports
the cell bucket size and the cell bucket rate according to the state of radio packet channel
in the cell, and reports MS bucket size and bucket rate according radio resource
occupation state of MS.
SGSN adjusts the downlink data rate of this cell/MS according to the reported
parameters, which is the purpose of downlink data flow control.
Note:
1). Cell bucket refers to the maximum packet data quantity that allowed being stored. It varies from the
number of packet channels in the cell.
2). MS bucket refers to the maximum packet data quantity that allowed being stored. It varies from the
number of packet channels assigned to MS.
3). Bucket rate is data transfer rater. Huawei PCU system can implement downlink data flow control, report
the bucket size and bucket rate of the current cell/MS to SGSN, and adjust the reported parameters
according to the changes of cell packet resource and MS resource occupation.
Uplink flow control supports refusal of immediate assignment on CCCH.
2-159
Feature Description
z
For downlink flow control, BVC downlink flow control and MS downlink flow control
are supported.
2.3.13 Supported Dynamic Handover between TCH and PDCH

At the early stage of GPRS service, GSM network is usually updated to support GPRS
service due to the shortage of radio frequencies. In order to reduce the effect on original
GSM circuit switched speech services caused by GPRS service, Huawei GPRS BSS
supports the dynamic handover between TCH and PDCH.
1)
Supporting the handover from TCH to PDCH during the establishment of TBF.
Huawei GPRS BSS classifies channel attribute into fixed packet service channel, voice
service channel and dynamic channel. Fixed packet service channel is dedicated for
packet data service, such as PBCCH, PCCCH, and PDCH; voice traffic channel is
dedicated for voice service, such as TCH, BCCH, SDCCH; and the dynamic channel is
voice TCH at its initialization stage. It can be converted between TCH and PDCH.
When there is more packet traffic and the speech channels are relatively idle, PCU will
request the BSC to convert the dynamic channel into the dynamic packet data channel.
Whereas when BSC determines the speech channels are busy, it can also request PCU
to return the converted dynamic channel and use it again as speech channel. In this
process, the speech service is given the priority over the packet service to guarantee the
original speech services.
2)
Supporting inter-cell PDCH sharing on the same RPPU
2.3.14 Supported Packet Access Function

When MS upper layers have data to be transferred, MS RLC/MAC will initiate packet
access. MS packet access types are as follows: Short access, phase I access, phase II
access, single block not establishing TBF access, paging response, cell update, mobility
management.
z
If the data to be transferred is less than 8 RLC blocks, the MS channel request type
is short access. The number of data packets is calculated according to CS-1.
If the data to be transferred is more than 8 RLC blocks and RLC mode is required to
be acknowledged mode, then MS channel request type is phase I access or phase
II access.
If MS MR is to be transferred, then the channel request type is monolith not

establishing TBF access.
For channel request type of paging response, cell update, and mobility
management, they are usually processed as phase I or phase II access.
For short access and phase I access, radio resource is assigned for MS in the first time
(such as TFI, dynamic assignment of USF or list of fixed assignment of radio block
position list)
2-160
Feature Description
For two-phase access channel request, the first request is for assigning a radio block for
MS. MS sends packet resource request message on assigned sigle radio block for
second resource assignment (including TFI, USF or radio block position list). Then MS
begins to transfer data on assigned resource. The packet channel request is an access
burst with 8 bit or 11 bit, so it carries a little of information. While the packet resource
request is an RLC/MAC signaling packet with CS-1, it can carry relatively more
information (including MS TLLI, MS multislot capacity, radio priority). These kinds of
information are helpful in assigning appropriate resource for MS.
M900/M1800 PCU supports all these access types. For access types such as paging
response, cell update, and mobility management, it processes them by regarding them
as two-phase ones.
2-161
Feature Description
Chapter 3 Interface Description

M900/M1800 BSS offers standard external interfaces including Um interface between
MS and BSS, A interface between BSS and MSC and Gb interface between BSS and
SGSN. The interface protocols and interface procedures strictly follow the ETSI
specifications.
They guarantee Huawei BSSs compatibility with the equipment of other
manufacturers. The interfaces between BSS elements (BTS, BSC, and PCU) and
between BSS and OMC are close interfaces. Although ETSI draws specification for
these interfaces, the implementation of these interfaces is manufacturer-specific.
It is the GSM protocol stack. Figure 3-2 illustrates the protocol stack of GPRS.
MS
BSC
BTS
MSC
CM
CM
MM
MM
RR
RR
L3
RR
BSSMAP
BSSMAP
BTSM
BTSM
L2
LAPDm
LAPDm
LAPD
LAPD
L1
Sign.
Layer1
Sign.
Layer1
Sign.
Layer1
Sign.
Layer1
Um
BSC
Abis
SCCP
SCCP
MTP
MTP
MS: Mobile Station

CM: Connection Management
BSC: Base Station Controller
MSC: Mobile services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre
RR: Radio Resource Management BSSMAP: Base Station Subsystem Management Application Part
LAPD: Link Access Procedure on the D channel LAPDm: Link Access Procedure on the Dm channel
BTS: Base Transceiver Station
BTSM: Base Transceiver Station Site Management
Figure 3-1 GSM protocol stack
3-1
Feature Description
GMM/SM
GMM/SM
LLC
LLC
Relay
RLC
RLC
BSSGP
BSSGP
MAC
MAC
Network
Service
Network
Service
GSM RF
GSM RF
L1bis
L1bis
MS
Um
Gb
BSS
SGSN
GMM: GPRS Mobility Management
LLC: Logical Link Control
RLC: Radio Link Control
MAC: Medium Access Control
BSSGP: Base Station Subsystem GPRS Protocol
SM: Session Management
Figure 3-2 GPRS protocol stack
3.1 A Interface
3.1.1 Overview
A-interface is the standard interface between BSS and MSC, so that M900/M1800
BSS can be easily deployed in any network in which the MSC of other vendor is being
used. It is a standard GSM interface specified to achieve the following targets.
The standard interface is adopted so as to:
z
Support BSSs of different vendors in any PLMN
Support MSCs of different vendors in any PLMN
Use different BSSs in any PLMNs.
Use different MSCs in any PLMNs.
Ensure the independent developments of MSC and BSS technologies
Ensure the independent development of O&M functions
Enable lower speech coding rate
Support all GSM Phase II services
The reference model of A-interface signaling protocol in M900/M1800 BSC is shown in

Figure 3-3, which describes the hierarchical structure of A-interface:
3-2
Feature Description
BSS
MSC
BSSAP
BSSAP
DTAP
BSSMAP
BSSMAP
DTAP
Allocation function
Allocation function
SCCP
SCCP
MTP
MTP
Physical layer
A
DTAP: Direct Transfer Application Part

BSSAP: Base Station Subsystem Application Part
BSSMAP: Base Station Subsystem Management Application Part
Figure 3-3 A-interface signaling protocol reference model
3.1.2 Protocols on the A-Interface

I. Physical layer
The physical layer of the A-interface is of 120-ohm symmetrical twisted pair or 75-ohm
coaxial cable whose rate is 2 Mbit/s. The physical layer of A-interface has the following
features:
z
The 2 Mbit/s transfer rate complies with G.703.
Frame structure, synchronization and timing comply with G.705.
Fault management complies with G.732.
CRC4 check complies with G.704.
II. Message Transfer Part (MTP)

The main function of MTP is to ensure reliable signaling message transfer in the
signaling network. In case of system and signaling network faults, it can takes
measures to avoid or reduce the loss.
MTP protocols are defined in ITU-T Q.701~710 Recommendations.
MTP comprises three functional levels: signaling data link function, signaling link
function and signaling network function.
1)
Signaling data link function
Signaling data link (layer 1) is the channel used for signaling transmission. It
comprises two data channels of the same data rate but two opposite working
directions. A semi-permanent path between the signaling processing equipment of
BSS and digital trunk equipment is established via the digital-switching network. The
3-3
Feature Description
former one occupies a timeslot to provide 64 kbit/s. The digital trunk equipment
actually implements the first level function of MTP. The advantage of semi-permanent
connection is, any TS (except synchronous TS) can be used as the signaling data link,
which can be configured through the man-machine commands.
2)
Signaling link function
Signaling link function (layer 2) regulates the functions and procedures to send the
signaling to the data link, and guarantees to provide reliable signaling message
transfer between two directly connected signaling points. Functions of layer 2 include:
signaling unit delimitation, signaling unit alignment, error detection, error correction,
initial alignment, processor fault, level-2 flow control, and signaling link error rate
monitoring.
The BSS signaling processing equipment executes the above functions. In addition,
different error control means can be set for it via the OMC. The basic error correction
method applies to the terrestrial signaling links and the international signaling links
whose unidirectional transmission delay is less than 15ms. The preventive cyclic
retransmission mode applies to the international signaling links with the unidirectional
transmission delay more than or equal to 15ms and to all the signaling links
established through satellites.
3)
Signaling network function
Signaling network functions (level 3) refer to the functions and procedures that transfer
management information between signaling points to guarantee the reliable transfer of
signaling information when the signaling links and signaling transfer points in the
signaling network fail. Signaling network functions include signaling message
processing and signaling network management.
Signaling message processing
Signaling
message
processing
function
sends
signaling
messages
to
the
corresponding signaling links or user parts (such as TUP, ISUP and SCCP) on the
basis of analyzing message flags. Signaling message processing functions comprise
three parts: message routing (MRT), message discrimination (MDC) and message
distribution (MDT), as shown in Figure 3-4.
3-4
Feature Description
MTP user part
Message allocation
Message to local office
Message
discrimination
Message to other SP
Message
routing
MTP L3 signaling message processing
MTPL2 signaling message processing
Figure 3-4 Signaling message processing flow

z
Message Routing
Message Routing function is used at each signaling point to determine the signaling
link group and the signaling link to destination signaling point. The message route
should be identified by the route flag and the service indicator in message signaling
unit. The routing function is fulfilled by message routing part according to the network
indicator in message, DPC and SLS in route flag, as well as the routing data of
relevant destination signaling point.
z
Message Discrimination (MDC)
Message Discrimination (MDC) part is designed to receive the messages from Layer 2
to ascertain whether the destination of the messages is the local signaling point. If the
destination is the local signaling point, the MDC part will send the messages to the
Message Distribution (MDT) part. If the destination is not the local signaling point, the
MDC part will send the messages to the Message Routing (MRT) part.
z
Message Distribution (MDT)
Message Distribution (MDT) part is designed to allocate the messages from the MDC
part to the user part and the signaling network management and test & maintenance
part accordingly.
z
Signaling network management
Signaling network management is to re-construct the signaling network and to keep

and recover the normal transfer ability of the signaling unit when the signaling network
fails. Signaling network management includes three parts: signaling traffic
management, signaling link management and signaling route management.
z
Signaling Traffic Management (STM)
3-5
Feature Description
Signaling Traffic Management (STM) is used to transit the signaling flow from one
link/route to another or multiple available links/routes when the signaling network fails.
It is also used to temporarily reduce signaling traffic in case of congestion at the
signaling point.
z
Signaling link management
Signaling link management is used to recover or startup the signaling link in the
signaling network or to exit from the signaling link, and to ensure the provision of
certain pre-determined link groups. The connection between the signaling data link
and the signaling terminal is normally established by the man-machine commands.
Operations in the signaling system can not automatically change the above connection
relationship.
z
Signaling route management
Signaling route management is used to ensure the reliable exchange of signaling

route availability information between signaling points so as to block or unblock
signaling routes when necessary. It mainly comprises such procedures as transfer
prohibited, transfer allowed, controlled transfer and restricted transfer, signaling route
group test, and signaling route group congestion test. These procedures are used only
when the signaling services from the originating point reach the destination through
the signaling transfer point.
III. Signaling Connection & Control Part (SCCP)

The purpose of SCCP is to provide complete network layer functions with the help of
MTP. According to OSI model, network layer provides connectionless services and
connection-oriented services.
SCCP protocols are defined in ITU-T Q.711~716 Recommendations.
The application of SCCP enables:
z
Interconnection of signaling networks.
New services and functions in mobile communications, e.g., intelligent network

and intelligent management.
ISDN supplementary services.
Data transfer between network management centres
In general, SCCP provides reliable services for any information exchange on the basis
of MTP. SCCP not only provides network service functions, but also has certain routing
functions and network management functions.
The routing function of SCCP is mainly used in addressing with such information as
DPC + SSN (destination signaling point code + subsystem No.) and GT (global title),
etc.
3-6
Feature Description
SCCP network management function mainly executes signaling point state and
subsystem state management, active/standby subsystem switchover, state information
broadcast and subsystem state testing.
1)
Basic services of SCCP
SCCP services can be classified into four classes: Basic connectionless service,
in-sequence delivery connectionless service, basic connection-oriented service and
flow control connection-oriented service. 0 and 1 are connectionless service, while 2
and 3 are connection-oriented.
Various SCCP services are introduced as follows:
-Connectionless service
In connectionless service, users do not establish the signaling connection before data
transfer, but use the routing function of SCCP and MTP to transfer data information
directly in the signaling network. This service is flexible and simple and it applies to the
transfer of a small amount of data. Class-0 service does not guarantee the sequential
transfer of messages. Class-1 service guarantees the sequential transfer of messages
depending on the coordination of SLS (Signaling Link Selection) and MTP.
Connectionless services transfer user data by adopting the Unit Data Message (UDT)
and Extended Unit Data Message (XUDT). UDT messages do not have data
segmentation/concatenation capability and can transfer only a small amount of user
data. XUDT messages have the segmentation/concatenation capability and can
transfer up to 2 kbyte user data.
-Connection-oriented service
Connection-oriented services require the establishment of signaling connection (virtual
connection) via the acknowledged mode between the originating point and the
destination point before the transfer of signaling information. In such cases, there is no
need to select routes by using the SCCP routing function when transferring data.
Instead, the data is transferred through the established signaling connection. When
the transfer of data is finished, the signaling connection need not be released. This
class of service applies to the transfer of large volumes of data because the
destination has confirmed to be able to receive data before the data is transmitted, and
hence the invalid transmission of data batches can be prevented. At the same time,
the pre-established connection results in no SCCP routing for the subsequent data
transfer, so the transfer delay of data batches can be effectively curtailed.
2)
SCCP routing control
The SCCP routing control provides a powerful address translation function, which is
required for connectionless and connection-oriented service.
The following specific address information can be found in SCCP:
z
DPC
3-7
Feature Description
z
DPC + SSN or GT (or both)
GT + (SSN)
DPC is the destination point code used by MTP in addressing. SSN, the subsystem
number, is used to identify different SCCP users in the same node, such as ISUP, MAP,
TCAP, and BSSAP. It eliminates the disadvantages of the small number of MTP
message users, and the addressing range can be expanded to meet the requirements
of future new services.
GT (Global Title) is a dialed number, such as international and national telephone
numbers, ISDN numbers, and E.214 numbers that are unique in GSM. It does not
represent directly routing information in the signaling network, and can be obtained
only through GT code translation. GT codes differ from DPC. DPC is meaningful only
in the designated signaling network while GT is meaningful in the global range. The
address range of GT is far larger than that of DPC, which enables the transfer of
information unrelated to circuits between any two signaling points in the global range.
The powerful addressing capability of GT is an important feature of SCCP.
3)
SCCP management
SCCP management (SCMG) is to keep the network functionality by re-routing or

adjusting traffic in case of network faults or congestion. This function is accomplished
by transferring SCCP management messages and primitives. The management
messages adopt class-0 UDT. SCCP management includes signaling point
management, subsystem management, active/standby subsystem switchover, state
information broadcast, and faulty subsystem state testing.
IV. BSSAP
1)
Protocol overview
The BSSAP protocol, which serves as A-interface specification, describes two kinds of
messages: BSSMAP and DTAP message. The former, which is responsible for traffic
flow control, needs to be handled by the internal functional module of the A-interface
accordingly. For the latter, the A-interface is equivalent to a transmission channel. It is
transported directly to the radio channel at the BSS side while it is transported to the
corresponding functional processing units at the NSS side.
BSSAP protocols are defined in ETSI GSM 08.08 and ETSI GSM 04.08 specifications.
2)
Typical message contents
-DTAP messages
According to the functional units of the NSS that process the DTAP messages, the
DTAP messages can be divided into Mobile Management (MM) messages and Call
Control (CC) messages.
The MM messages consist of messages related to authentication, CM service request,
identification request, IMSI detach, location update, MM state, TMSI re-allocation, etc.
3-8
Feature Description
The call control messages consist of alerting, call proceeding, connection, setup,
modification, release, disconnection, notification, state query, DTMF startup messages,
etc.
-BSSMAP messages
The BSSMAP messages can be divided into connectionless and connection-oriented
messages.
z
The connectionless messages consist of Block/Unblock, Handover, Resource,

Reset, Paging messages, etc.
The Block/Unblock messages include Block & Block ACK messages and Unblock
& Unblock ACK messages. The Circuit Group Block/Unblock messages include
Circuit Group Block message, Circuit Group Block ACK message, Circuit Group
Unblock and Circuit Group Unblock messages.
Handover messages include Handover Candidate Enquire and Handover
Candidate Enquire Response.
The resources messages include Resources Request and Resource Indication
messages.
The Reset messages include Reset and Reset ACK messages.
The connection-oriented messages include Assignment, Handover, Clear and

Cipher messages.
The Assignment messages include Assignment Request, Assignment Complete
and Assignment Error messages.
The Handover messages include Handover Request, Handover Request ACK,
Handover Command, Handover Complete and Handover Error messages.
The Clear messages include Clear Request and Clear Complete messages.
The Cipher messages include Cipher Mode Command and Cipher Mode
Complete messages.
3)
BSSAP protocol functionality
The BSSAP protocol can deliver its own functions in connection-oriented mode and
connectionless mode of SCCP. When MS needs to exchange service-related
messages over radio resources with the network side while there is no MS-related
SCCP connection between MSC and BSS, a new connection will be established. A
new connection shall also be set up for external handover.
There are two kinds of connection setup:
z
While MS sends the Access Request message on the RACH, BSS allocates a
dedicated radio resource (DCCH or TCH) to MS. After the L2 connection is set up
3-9
Feature Description
on the SDCCH (or FACCH) where resources are allocated, BSS starts the
connection setup.
When MSC decides to execute an external handover (the target BSS might be
the original BSS), it must reserve a new DCCH or TCH from the target BSS. In
this scenario, MSC starts the connection setup.
The BSSAP protocol implements the functional flow as shown in Table 4-1 using the
connection and connectionless messages.
Table 3-1 Functions
Serial number
Function
Assign
Block/Unblock
Resource Indication
Reset
Handover Request
Handover Resource
Allocation
Handover Procedure
Description
Assign is to ensure the dedicated radio resources are allocated or
re-allocated properly to the MS. The initial MS random access and
immediate assignment to a DCCH is processed automatically by
BSS but not controlled by MSC.
During circuit assignment, MSC selects an available terrestrial
channel. If this channel is no longer available then BSS notifies it to
MSC. The Block/Unblock procedure can carry out this function.
Resource indication serves to notify MSC:
Amount of the radio resource available for TCH in BSS,
Amount of all available radio resource (i.e. able to provide service or
have been specified)
It is not easy to get this information from the MSC-controlled services.
These must be considered when MSC decides an external handover.
Reset is to initialize the BSS or MSC. For instance, if BSS goes
faulty or loses all the reference messages about processing, BSS
sends a Reset message to MSC, which releases the affected calls,
deletes the affected reference messages and sets all the circuits
related to the BSS to idle.
If MSC or BSS is only locally faulty, the affected parts can be cleared
using the Clear procedure.
BSS may send a handover request to MSC requesting to perform
handover of the MS, to which dedicated resources have been
allocated, for the reasons as listed below:
a) BSS detects a radio cause for handover.
b) MSC starts the Handover Candidate Enquirer procedure. The MS
is waiting for the handover.
Due to congestion, the serving cell needs to be changed during the
call setup such as directed retry.
The Handover Request messages should be re-sent once in a while
till one of the following situations occurs:
Receive the "Handover Command" message from MSC
Reset message is received
All communications with MS will be interrupted and the processing is
aborted
Processing is over, such as call clearing.
Handover Resources Allocation enables MSC to request for
resources from BSS based on the handover request. The target BSS
will reserve resources and wait for an MS to access this channel.
This is the procedure in which MSC instructs MS to access the radio
resources of another cell. When handover is carried out, the original
dedicated radio resources and terrestrial resources are maintained all
the time until MSC sends a Clear Command message or Reset
occurs.
3-10
Feature Description
Serial number
Function
Release of Radio
Resources and
Terrestrial Resources
Paging
10
Flow Control
11
Classmark Update
12
Cipher Mode Control
13
Queuing Indication
14
Load Indication
Description
When processing is done, MSC sends a Clear Command to BSS to
release radio resources. On receiving the command, BSS starts the
Clear procedure at the radio interface, then sets the configured
terrestrial circuit to idle and returns a Clearing Complete message to
MSC, which in turn releases the terrestrial resources of the local end.
If resources need to be released by BSS, BSS will send a Clear
Request to notify MSC to start the release procedure to release the
terrestrial and radio resources concerning MSC and BSS.
The paging to MS is transported with the SCCP connectionless
service via BSSMAP. If BSS receives the Paging Response message
at the radio channel interface, it will establish an SCCP connection to
MSC. The paging response message, which is loaded in the BSSMAP
Full L3 Message, is transported on the signaling connection to MSC.
Flow control can prevent the entities from receiving too much traffic.
Flow control on the A-interface is implemented by controlling the traffic
at the traffic source. Two levels of flow control are available. Flow
control can be implemented based on subscriber classes.
Classmark Update serves to notify the class messages received from
MS to the receiving entities. Generally, BSS notifies MSC after
receiving the class messages from MS. It is also likely that when
handover is complete, MSC sends the corresponding MS Classmark
messages to the new BSS via the A-interface.
The Cipher Mode Control procedure allows MSC to transport the
cipher mode control messages to BSS and start the subscriber
equipment and signaling cipher equipment with a correct Kc.
This procedure is designed to notify MSC that BSS wants to delay the
allocation of necessary radio resources. This procedure is valid only
when the queuing function is introduced for traffic channel assignment
and traffic channel handover in the BSS.
Load indication serves to notify the traffic state of a cell to all the
adjacent BSSs so that an overall control over the handover services in
an MSC can be exercised. In a certain valid period, the traffic state of
the adjacent cells will be taken into account by the adjacent BSS
during handover.
3.1.3 A-Interface Management at BSS Side

An interface management in M900/M1800 BSC includes terrestrial channel
management (or A interface circuit resource management), management of part of the
radio resources, and so on.
I. A interface circuit resource management

The purpose of the terrestrial channel management between BSS and MSC is to keep
the states of terrestrial circuits at both ends consistent. An idle circuit can be found
when the MSC "assigns circuit" in calling and assigns terrestrial circuit during MS
handover to make sure a successful call/handover.
Procedures included in the interface circuit resource management are Circuit
Block/Unblock, Circuit Group Block/Unblock, Unequipped Circuit, and Reset Circuit.
General principles of the circuit control includes:
3-11
Feature Description
The circuit management messages, except Reset Circuit, are initiated by BSC.
The MSC can only block/unblock the local circuits without affecting the circuit
state of the BSS.
The BSS can not change the circuit state that has been changed at the local end
of the MSC. For circuits blocked on the maintenance console at MSC side, the
BSS has no authority to unblock or reset the circuit.
1)
Block Circuit
The process of blocking the circuit is shown in Figure 3-5.

BSC
MSC
Block circuit
Block ackonwledge
Figure 3-5 Process of blocking the circuit

Circuit Block procedure means the circuits corresponding to the BSS and the MSC are
blocked simultaneously. This procedure can be initiated by the maintenance console of
the BSC or by the allocation of circuit during call process or during handover request.
This procedure can be used in Phase I and Phase II.
When there is no "Block ACK" message received by BSC for a certain period of time,
this message will be sent again. Even if BSC does not receive Blocking ACK, the
circuit at BSC side is still in the blocked state. When BSC is sending Block message,
an alarm will generate at BSC. The Circuit Group Block procedure does not affect the
circuits in service, that is, the busy circuit will not be blocked until the communication is
completed.
2)
Unblock the Circuit
The process of unblocking the circuit is shown in Figure 3-6.

BSC
MSC
Unblock circuit
Unblock anknowledged
Figure 3-6 Process of unblocking the circuit
3-12
Feature Description
The purpose of Circuit Unblock is to unblock the circuit blocked by the BSC. This
procedure can be originated by maintenance console or originated during equipment
fault recovery. The Circuit Unblock procedure is generally started by the maintenance
console and can be used by GSM Phase 2 and Phase 1.
When there is no "Unblock ACK" message received by BSC for a period of time, this
message will be sent again. Even if BSC does not receive the Unblock message, the
circuit at BSC side is still in idle state. When BSC is sending the unblocking message,
an alarm will be generated at BSC.
3)
Group-unblock the Circuit
The process of blocking the circuit is shown in Figure 3-7.

BSC
MSC
Group block
Group block acknowledged

The purpose of the Circuit Group Block is to block multiple A-interface circuits
simultaneously. This procedure can be started by the maintenance console or by trunk
equipment itself automatically. This procedure is used for Phase 2 only.
When there is no "Group Block Ack" message received by BSC for a certain period of
time, this message will be sent again. Even if BSC does not receive the message of
Group Block ACK, the circuits at the BSC side are still in the blocked state. When BSC
is sending Group Block message, an alarm will generate at BSC. The Circuit Group
Block procedure does not affect the circuits in service, that is, the busy circuit will not
be blocked until the communication is completed.
4)
Group-unblock the circuit
The process of unblocking the circuit is shown in Figure 3-8.
3-13
Feature Description
BSC
MSC
Group unblock
Group unblock acknowleged

The purpose of the Circuit Group Unblock is to unblock multiple A-interface circuits
simultaneously. This procedure can be started by the maintenance console or by trunk
equipment itself automatically. This procedure is used for Phase 2 only.
When there is no "Group Unblock ACK" message received by BSC for a period of time,
this message will be sent again. Even if BSC does not receive the Group Unblock ACK
message, the circuits at BSC side are still in the idle state. When BSC is sending the
group-unblocking message, an alarm will be generated at BSC.
5)
Unequipped Circuit
The Unequipped Circuit procedure is shown in Figure 3-9.

BSC
MSC
Unequipped circuit
Unequipped circuit
Figure 3-9 Process of unequipped circuit

The Unequipped Circuit procedure is used by BSC or MSC to inform the peer end that
the circuit does not exist and cannot be used. This procedure can be initiated during
any procedures related to circuits. This procedure is used for Phase II only. The
unequipped circuit will not be sent again. When BSS or MSC sends Unequipped
Circuit message, alarms will be generated.
6)
Reset circuit
The Reset Circuit procedure is shown in Figure 3-10.
3-14
Feature Description
BSC
MSC
Reset circuit
Reset circuit acknowledged
Figure 3-10 The process of resetting the circuit

The purpose of Reset Circuit is to recover the system resource information of the MSC
and BSC when the fault (e.g. abnormal release of SCCP) affects only a small part of
the equipment.
Figure 3-10 shows the Reset Circuit procedure initiated by the BSC. When the MSC
receives the Reset Circuit message, it clears the possible calls on the circuit and sets
the circuit to idle state. Then it returns the Reset Circuit ACK message. The Reset
Circuit procedure initiated by MSC is similar to the above figure, the only difference is
the direction of the messages.
If a BSC does not receive Reset Circuit ACK message and time is out, Reset Circuit
message will be sent repeatedly. The repetition times can be set through software.
Even if the BSC does not receive the Reset Circuit ACK message, the circuit at the
BSC side is still in the idle state. When BSC is sending the resetting message, an
alarm will be generated at BSC. Similar procedure is followed by MSC.
The Reset Circuit can also be initiated through maintenance console to be used for
maintenance and testing.
II. A-interface radio resources management

A-interface radio resource management mainly includes Resource Indication and
Clear procedures.
1)
Resource Indication
The Resource Indication procedure is shown in Figure 3-11.

The purpose of the Resource Indication procedure is to inform MSC about the number
of idle radio resources in BSS which can be used as traffic channels, as well as the
total available radio resources (resources able to provide services or already
assigned). The MSC may consider the relevant information when identifying the
external handover.
3-15
Feature Description
BSC
MSC
Resource indication request
Resource indication
Figure 3-11 Resource indication process at A interface

There are four types of resource indications including automatic indication, single
indication, periodic indication and no indication. No indication is the default mode.
In the automatic indication mode, the cell corresponding to the BSS will continuously
send Resource Indication messages to MSC according to the cycle set in the
Resource Indication Request message when resource of the cell satisfies the
conditions.
In the single indication mode, the BSS instantly return a Resource Indication message
about the corresponding cell to MSC.
In the periodic indication mode, the BSS continuously sends Resource Indication
Request message according to the cycle set in Resource Indication Request, until it
receives the new Resource Request message or Reset message. The period shall be
set by the MSC, and the actual period are 100ms multiply the original value.
In the non-indication mode, the BSS immediately returns a single Resource Indication"
message without any resource information, and the procedure is finished.
For each idle channel, the BSS calculate the average value of the interference level
within a period. And the average result shall divide the idle channel into 5 interference
sections according to the interference level.
The Resource Available Information Elements includes two pieces of information for
each of the five interference bands: number of available half-rate traffic channels in the
interference band and number of available full-rate traffic channels in the interference
band.
2)
Clear process
The purpose of the Clear procedure is to release all relative terrestrial circuit resources
and radio resources. This procedure includes two cases: Clear initiated by MSC and
Clear initiated by BSS.
The clear process originated by MSC is illustrated in Figure 3-12.
3-16
Feature Description
BSC
MSC
Clear command
Clear complete
Figure 3-12 Clear procedure initiated by MSC

The clear process originated by BSS is illustrated in Figure 3-13.
BSC
MSC
Clear request
Clear command
Clear complete
Figure 3-13 Clear procedure initiated by BSS
III. Other A-interface management procedures

There are some other A-interface management procedures, which are Classmark
Update, Reset, Flow Control, Queuing, Error Handling, SCCP Link Control and Load
Indication.
1)
Classmark update
The purpose of Classmark update is to notify MSC about the class information
received from MS. This process is applied when the power Classmark of a dedicated
resource occupied by MS is changed. See Figure 3-14.
3-17
Feature Description
BSC
MSC
Classmark update
Figure 3-14 Process of Classmark update
2)
Reset process
Reset procedure is to initialize the BSS or MSC in the event of failure so that all
resources can be released.
Reset at BSS: BSS releases all resources and sends the Reset message to the MSC,
which will release all calls and connection resources and set all circuits related to BSS
as idle. After guard period T2 seconds, the MSC returns the Reset ACK message to
the BSS, indicating that the reset is successful. See Figure 3-15.
MSC
BSC
Reset
Reset acknowledged
Figure 3-15 BSS reset process

Reset at MSC: MSC releases all resources and sends the Reset message to the BSC,
which will release all calls and connection resources upon the receipt of the message.
After guard period T13 seconds, a Reset ACK message is returned to the MSC,
indicating that the reset is successful. See Figure 3-16.
3-18
Feature Description
MSC
BSC
Reset
Reset acknowledged
Figure 3-16 MSC reset process
3)
Flow Control Process
The purpose of Flow Control at the BSC side is, when the MSC is overloaded, the
BSC can control the flows from MS. System malfunction or congestion will not be
caused, and the flow of calls can be controlled within a reasonable range.
When the MSC is overloaded, A-interface at the MSC side will generate the Overload
message to inform the BSC to control the traffic flow. The control algorithm used is the
flow control algorithm stipulated by the GSM specifications, which is executed by using
the specific design developed by Huawei. That is, a dynamic sliding window is
adopted, which is started in overloading, and the size of the window can be modified
according to the size of the traffic so as to control the traffic. The window is invalid
when the MSC is no longer overloaded. See Figure 3-17.
BSC
MSC
Overload
Overload
Overload
Figure 3-17 Flow Control Process
Note:
When BSC is overloaded, BSC will send "Overload" message to MSC. MSC implements flow control.
BSC side also has the corresponding flow control measure.
3-19
Feature Description
4)
Load Indication
Load Indication procedure informs the traffic condition of a cell to all neighboring BSS.
This procedure is used to control the handovers.
After the MSC receives the Load Indication message, it forwards the information to the
BSS, which contains this cell, according to the cell list attached to the message.
5)
SCCP Link Control
In case of the abnormal disconnection on the SS7 link, A-interface will stop sending
control messages through software. When the SS7 link recovers, A-interface
continues sending control messages. Due to the long-time disconnection, A-interface
shall start clearing the resources as soon as the link is recovered to prevent the
hang-up of resources.
6)
Error handling
As errors may occur on the transmission links, messages transferred may not be
understandable. Therefore, A-interface shall omit the error messages and send
selectively "confusion" messages (these messages are used in GSM Phase 2+).
3.2 Um Interface
Um interface (air interface or radio interface) is defined as the communication interface
between MS and BSS. It is for the communication between MS and the fixed part of
GSM. Its physical link is the radio link. The information transmitted via this interface
include
radio
resource
management,
mobility
management
and
connection
management.
3.2.1 Overview
In a GSM/GPRS network, MS is connected through radio channels to the fixed
network so that a call can be routed to the specific destination. To realize the
inter-working between MS and BSS, it is necessary to standardize the transmission
of the signals on the radio channel. The norm concerning the signal transmission on
the radio channel is the radio interface, or Um interface.
The Um interface is the most important interface in the GSM system. It is necessary to
follow a standard interface so that a complete compatibility can be achieved between
different of different manufactures, which is the basic condition for global roaming.
The Um interface is specified by the following features:
z
Channel structure and access capability
MS-BSS protocols
Maintenance and operation characteristics
Performance characteristics
3-20
Feature Description
z
Service characteristics.
The Um interface can be divided into 3 layers, as shown in Figure 3-18.
L3
L2
L1
Figure 3-18 Layered structure of Um interface
The first layer is the physical layer at the bottom. It includes various channels, and
provides basic radio channels for information transfer on higher layer.
The layer 2 is the data link layer using the LAPDm protocol. It includes various data
transmission structures, and controls data transmission.
The layer 3 is the highest layer. It includes various messages and programs, and
controls services. It includes 3 sub-layers, which are Radio Resources management
(RR), Mobility Management (MM), and Connection Management (CM).
3.2.2 Layer 1 - Physical Layer

I. Physical layer interface and services
The interfaces between the physical layer (L1) and data link layer (L2), the physical
layer (L1) and radio resources management sublayer (RR) of L3, the physical layer
(L1) and other functional unit, are shown in Figure 3-19.
Radio resource
management
L3
Data link
Other functional unit
MPH Primitive
PH Primitive
Physical layer
Figure 3-19 Physical layer interface

The physical layer provides the following services:
3-21
TCH
Feature Description
z
Access capability: the physical layer provides a series of limited logical channels
for transmission service. The logical channel is multiplexed on the physical
channel.
Error code detection: Physical layer provides error protection transmission,

including error detection and correction.
Ciphering:
II. Multiple access scheme

Both FDMA and TDMA techniques are used by Um interface, along with frequency
hopping.
The transmission unit on Um interface is the burst consisting of about 100 modulated
bits. It is called "BP (Burst Pulse). Each BP is of 200kHz wide with duration of 0.577ms
(15/26ms) as shown in Figure 3-20. The time and frequency window it occupies is
called slot. The duration of the slot is the timeslot. Frequency width occupied by the
slot is called frequency slot. The frequency slot here is the RF channel in GSM
specification.
Frame consists of n consecutive timeslots. In GSM system, "n" is 8. The frame in this
format is called a TDMA frame. A TDMA frame consists of 8 consecutive timeslots.
Frequency
200
kHz
2
1
BP
Time
Slot
15/26ms
Figure 3-20 Concept of timeslot

A physical channel is the burst sequence transported in the timeslots that occur at
specific and periodic intervals. In the GSM system, the period is 8, namely, one TDMA
frame. In other words, one RF channel contains 8 physical channels, which can be
differentiated by serial numbers. This serial number is called time slot number.
If a RF channel is not Frequency Hopping, it follows that its central frequency is
constant, otherwise its central frequency changes in a unit of 200kHz.
Figure 3-21 illustrated the complete TDMA frame.
3-22
Feature Description
1 Hyper Frame=2048Super Frame=2715648TDMA Frame (3h28m53s760ms)

0
TCH
SACCH/T
FACCH
2044
2045
2046
2047
BCCH
CCCH
SDCCH
1 Super Frame=1326TDMA Frame (6.12s)

0
47
48
24
50
25
1 Multiframe=51TDMA Frame(3060/13ms)
1 Multiframe= 26TDMA Frame(120ms)

0
49
24
25
49
50
1TDMA Frame=8 Timeslot (120/26=4.615ms)

2
Figure 3-21 Frame structure of channel

One TDMA frame has a duration of 4.615ms (120/26ms), consisting of 8 timeslots.
Multiframe consists of 26 or 51 frames. Multiframe of 26 frames has duration of 120
ms and carries traffic channel, slow associated control channel and fast associated
control channel. A Multiframe of 51 frames has duration of 235.365 ms and be used as
control channel.
One superframe consists of 51 traffic multiframes or 26 control multiframes and
consists of 5126 TDMA frames with a total duration of 6.12 seconds. The period of
superframe is 6.12 s.
A hyperframe contains 2048 superframes. Its period is 12533.76 s, i.e.
3h28m53s760ms. Each period of the hyper frame contains 2715648 TDMA frames,
which are numbered from 0 to 2715647.
III. Physical channel and logical channel

1)
Physical channel
The physical channel is the combination of FDM and TDM and is composed of the slot
stream between BTS and MS. The physical channel is a combination of frequency
division and time division, so a physical channel must be described from two
perspectives:
z
Frequency band description
Table 3-2 GSM/GPRS frequency bands

Item
Working frequency band
900 band
Uplink (MS to BTS): 890~915 MHz
Down (BTS to MS): 935~960 MHz
3-23
1800 band
Uplink: 1710~1785 MHz
Downlink: 1805~1880 MHz
Feature Description
Duplexing interval
Carrier interval

45MHz
200kHz
95MHz
200kHz
Time description
TN: Timeslot No.

FN: TDMA Frame No.
2)
Logical channel
The logical channel is obtained by multiplexing the physical channel in TDM. Different
logical channels serve to transport different types of messages between BSS and MS.
The logical channel is mapped to the physical channel as per certain rules.
Different logical channels have different frame structure, but whatever the
arrangement is, the frame structure of the logical channels are always periodic in time.
Great effort has been made to design the frame structure of the logical channels in
order to build a high-performance system in the GSM specifications. This results in a
complicated frame structure system in the GSM system. The relation between logical
channel and physical channel is detailed described in ETSI GSM 05.02 specification.
z
Among all carriers of a cell, there is only one supporting BCCH (and CCCH). The
cell is uniquely identified through this carrier. This carrier is defined as C0 in the
protocol.
Carrier C0 must be transmitted on the same frequency with constant power. The
frequency used by the C0 is called nominal frequency.
IV. The timing advance of uplink, downlink and MS

In GSM/GPRS system, uplink refers to the link from MS to BTS, and downlink from
BTS to MS.
The size of the MS can be greatly reduced if the transmission and receiving can be
completed in different time. To realize this, in the GSM system, the TDMA frame on the
uplink always lags behind the TDMA frame on the downlink by 3 BP. For BTS, this
delay is fixed, but to MS, it is a different issue. There is always some transmission
delay during its passage to the BTS (serving cell) due to the mobility of MS and the
transmission delay is generally not fixed. To make up the transmission delay between
MS and BTS, the transmitting at MS side should be in advance. This is the timing
advance. The range of timing advance is 0 ~ 233s (corresponding TA: 0 ~ 63).
Therefore, the precision deviation of the uplink and downlink is 3BP minus the timing
advance with respect to MS.
The MS under the dedicated mode must do the transmission at any time in proper
timing advance, or it will lose synchronization with BTS. In the GSM system, the
Adaptive Timing Adjustment approach is introduced to ensure the MS in a dedicated
mode uses proper timing advance.
3-24
Feature Description
V. Procedure from source data to radio wave

The radio channel bears features totally different from the wireline channel. First, the
radio channel exhibits remarkable time-varying features. Impacted by interference,
multipath fading and shadow fading, the signals are characterized by high error codes.
To address the problems brought about by radio channel transmission, a series of
conversions and inverse conversions are needed to give necessary protection for the
transmitted signals. These include the conversion from the primitive user data or
signaling data to the messages carried by the radio wave, and that vise versa. These
conversions
mainly
include
channel
encoding/decoding,
interleaving
and
de-interleaving, burst formatting, encryption and decryption, modulation and

demodulation. For voices, the transformation procedure is shown in Figure 3-22. (This
procedure is the same for other user data or signaling).
Voice
Voice
Digitalization and
source coding
Source coding
Channel coding
Channel decoding
Interleaving
De-interleaving
Burst formatting
Burst formatting
Ciphering
De-ciphering
Modulation
Demodulation
Receiver
Transmitter
Figure 3-22 Procedure from source data to radio wave
1)
The operation process at the transmitting side
Channel coding
Redundancy is introduced to the message flow to detect and rectify errors in the
transmission process. The result of channel encoding is a data block. The length of
voice data is 456 bit.
3-25
Feature Description
z
Interleaving
Interleaving means mixing several data blocks so that the neighboring bits in the
modulated signals can be extended into these data blocks. In the message flow, the
consecutive errors are correlated. If the correlation between the errors is eliminated,
the channel encoding performance can be improved. The purpose of interleaving is to
eliminate the correlating error and the location correlation in the data block. After
interleaving, the message flow becomes the sequence of message block. Each
channel burst pulse has a message block.
The interleaving and encoding schemes of various transmission modes are listed in
Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Interleaving and encoding under various transmission mode
Input rate
Channel and
transmission mode
kbit/s
Output
block
Code
TCH/F9.6
TCH/F4.8
12
6
240
TCH/F4,8
120
TCH/F2,4
3.6
72
Odd-even code (3bit)

1/2 convolutional code
None
Subtracting 1 bit from
each 15 bit
Add 32 "0" bits
1/3 convolutional codes
TCH/F2,4
3.6
144
Ia
TCH/FS
50
Ib
II
13
SCH
132
78

25
RACH
(+ Handover access)
Fast Associated Control
Signaling on TCH/F and
TCH/H
TCH/8SACCHBCCH
PAGCH
Input
block
184
224/184 Fire code

Interleaving
456
On 8.5 burst pulse
456
Combined on 22
uneven burst pulse.
456
Same as the above
456
On 8.5 burst pulses

Combined on 22
uneven burst pulses
456
78
On 1 S burst pulse
36
On 1 access burst
pulse
On 8 burst pulses
456
On 4 burst pulses
Format burst pulse
Add the training sequence to the message bit flow so that the receiving end can
estimate the transmission feature of the channel, so as to restore the received signal.
An ordinary burst contains two groups of 58bit, which are separated with a 26 bit
training sequence. Three ends are all 0. They are added to the head and end of the
burst. For the content of the ordinary burst, see Table 3-4.
Table 3-4 Content of an ordinary burst
Head
Information
Training sequence
Information
End
58
26
58
3-26
Feature Description
The access burst is the only short burst in GSM. It contains a 41 bit training burst, 36
bit information, 7 bit at the head and 3 bit at end. The content of the access burst is
listed in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5 Content of an access burst
Head
Training sequence
Information
End
41
36
S burst is applicable to downlink SCH. Its length is the same as other ordinary bursts
(142 bit). For its content, see Table 3-6.
Table 3-6 Content of an ordinary burst
Head
Information
Training sequence
Information
End
39
64
39
F burst is a long burst. Its only purpose is to enable the MS to find and modulate the S
burst in the same cell. Its length is 148 bit, all 0.
z
Ciphering
Modify the message flow with the ciphering mode recognizable to both MS and BTS to
ensure the safety of the subscriber data.
z
Modulate
Convert the burst sequence into RF analog signal so that it can be transmitted on the
RF channel in the form of radio wave. The modulation adopts GMSK. BT = 0.3, the
modulation rate is 2705/6 kbit/s.
2)
The operation process at the receiving end
Demodulate
When antenna receive radio signal, selects the useful signal according to multi
address rule. Then it demodulates the signal and output binary bit stream.
z
Decipher
Modify the received message bit flow by reversing the process of ciphering.
z
Format burst pulse
Remove the training sequence in the message flow.

z
De-interleaving
Restore the original locations of various bursts and reestablish the codes.
z
Channel decoding
3-27
Feature Description
Use the attached redundancy information to check and correct the errors in the
message flow as much as possible.
3.2.3 Layer 2 - Data Link Layer

Data link layer is the second layer of the OSI model. It receives the service from the
physical layer and provides service to L3. The data link Service Access Point (SAP) is
the node that provides services for layer 3. SAP is identified through SAPI. Each SAP
is associated with one or multiple Data Link Connection End Points (DLCEP). Viewed
from layer 3, DLCEP is identified by Data Link Connection End Point Identifier
(DLCEPI). Viewed from layer 2, it is identified by the Data Link Connection Identifier
(DLCI).
The communication between data link layer entities is governed by a peer-to-peer
protocol specific to the layer. For information exchange between two or more layer 3
entities, an association must be established between the layer 3 entities in the data
link layer using a data link layer protocol. This association is called a data link
connection. (DLC).
Messages at the data link layer are transferred between entities at layer 2 of the
physical layer. Layer 3 request services from the data link layer via service primitives.
The same applies for the interaction between the data link layer and the physical layer.
The link layer protocol used by the GSM system at the radio interface is the LAPDm
protocol, which evolves from the LAPD protocol. Currently, two SAPI values are
defined in the LAPDm protocol: 0 (main signaling) and 3 (short messages).
I. LAPDm
1)
Function
LAPDm transfers information between layer 3 entities through the radio interface on
the Dm channel. LAPDm supports multiple layer 3 entities and physical layer entities,
and signaling of BCCH, PCH, AGCH and DCCH.
Note:
The Dm channel is a generic term for all the signaling channels at the Um interface in the GSM system.
For instance, the Dm channel can either be PCH or BCCH.
LAPDm includes functions for:

z
The provision of one or more data link connections on a Dm channel.

Discrimination between the data link connections is by means of a data link
connection identifier (DLCI).
3-28
Feature Description
Allows for frame type identification.
Allows L3 message units to be transmitted transparently between L3s.
Exercises sequence control to maintain the order of frames that pass DLC.
Check on the format and operation errors on the data links.
Flow control.
Contention resolution when establishing a data link after an access request has
been made on the RACH.
2)
Operation types
Two types of operation of the data link layer are defined for layer 3 information transfer:
unacknowledged operation and acknowledged (multiple frame) operation. They may
co-exist on a Dm channel.
z
Unacknowledged operation:
In unacknowledged operation, layer 3 information is transmitted in Unnumbered

Information (UI) frames. At the data link layer, the UI frames are not acknowledged.
Flow control mechanisms and error recovery mechanisms are not defined.
Unacknowledged operation is applicable to different types of control channels except
for RACH.
z
Acknowledged operation:
In unacknowledged operation, layer 3 information is transmitted in Unnumbered

Information (UI) frames. The data link layer acknowledges the transmitted I frame.
Error recovery procedures based on retransmission of unacknowledged frames are
specified. In case of errors, which cannot be corrected by the data link layer, a report is
issued to the layer 3 entity. Flow control procedures are also defined. Acknowledged
operation is applicable to DCCH.
3)
Information transfer mode:
On different channels, information transfer modes are different.

z
Information transfer on the BCCH: The BCCH exists only in the network to MS
direction and is used for broadcasting radio sub-system information to MSs. Only
UI frames are sent on the BCCH.
Information transfer on the PCH + AGCH: These channels exist only in the
network to MS direction. On the PCH + AGCH only unacknowledged operation is
possible.
Information transfer on the DCCHs: On the DCCHs both unacknowledged

operation and multiple frame operation are possible. The type of operation
required at any time is determined by layer 3.
4)
Release of data links:
Multiple frame operation may be released in the following ways:

z
Normal release by exchange of commands/responses.
Local end release, i.e. without exchange of commands/responses, initiated and

controlled by layer 3.
3-29
Feature Description
This type of release is initiated by layer 3.
II. Service characteristics.

The data link layer provides services to layer 3 and uses the services provided by the
physical layer. Interaction among them is accomplished by primitives. The primitive
format between layer 2 and layer 3 is DL_XX_XXX. The primitive format between layer
2 and the management layer is MDL_XX_XXX. And the primitive format between layer
2 and physical layer is PH_XX_XXX.
1)
Services provided to layer 3
Unacknowledged information transfer service

The characteristics of the unacknowledged information transfer service are
summarized in the following:
z
Provision of a data link connection between layer 3 entities for unacknowledged

information transfer of layer 3 message units;
Identification of data link connection endpoints to permit a layer 3 entity to identify

another layer 3 entity.
Sending of frames in accordance with priority given to the message.
No verification of message arrival within the data link layer.
The primitives associated with the unacknowledged information transfer service are:
DL-UNIT DATA-REQUEST/INDICATION
The DL-UNIT DATA-REQUEST primitive is used to request that a message unit be
sent using the procedures for unacknowledged information transfer service; DL-UNIT
DATA-INDICATION indicates the arrival of a message unit received by means of
unacknowledged information transfer.
Acknowledged information transfer service
One mode of acknowledged operation is defined, i.e. multiple frame operation. The
characteristics of this service are summarized in the following:
z
Provision of a data link connection between layer 3 entities for acknowledged

information transfer of layer 3 message units.
Identification of data link connection endpoints to permit a layer 3 entity to identify

another layer 3 entity.
Sequence integrity of data link layer message units in the absence of machine
malfunctions.
Notification to the peer entity in the case of errors, for example, loss of sequence.
Notification to the layer 3 entity of unrecoverable errors detected by the data link
layer.
Flow control.
Sending of frames in accordance with the indicated SAPI value.
Segmentation and concatenation control functions.

3-30
Feature Description
Primitives used for multiframe acknowledged information transfer include:

DL_DATA_REQUEST/INDICATION: used to request that a message unit be sent
using the procedures for multiframe acknowledged information transfer and the arrival
of message units received by means of acknowledged information transfer.
DL_ESTABLISH_REQUEST/INDICATION/CONFIRM: These primitives are used to
request, indicate and confirm the establishment of multiple frame operation between
two data link layer entities.
DL_RELEASE_REQUEST/INDICATION/CONFIRM: used for the termination of the
multiframe mode.
Random access procedure
The
primitive
used
by
the
random
access
process
is
DL_RANDOM
ACCESS_INDICATION, which is used in the MS to request the transmission of a

random access burst.
2)
Services required from the physical layer
The services provided by the physical layer are summarized in the following:
z
Physical layer connection for transparent transmission of frames.
Indication of physical state of the Dm channel.
Transmission of data link layer message units in the same order as they were
issued by the data link layer.
Provision of frame synchronization.
Provision of error protection to ensure a low residual bit error rate at the data link
layer.
Transmission (in the MS) and reception (in the network) of random access bursts.
3)
Administrative services
Primitives used by management layer services:

MDL_ERROR_INDICATION, used by the data link layer to indicate that there is an
error in the data link layer procedures that cannot be resolved by normal exception
handling procedures.
MDL_RELEASE_REQUEST, used by the layer 3 entity to initiate abnormal local end
release of a data link.
3.2.4 L3
I. Introduction
The signaling layer 3 provides the functions to establish, maintain and terminate
circuit-switched connections across a GSM PLMN and other networks to which the
GSM PLMN is connected. It provides the necessary supporting functions related to
3-31
Feature Description
supplementary services control and short messages service control. Furthermore it

includes the functions necessary for mobility management and radio resource
management.
The layer 3 body consists of many functional program blocks. These program blocks
transfer message units carrying various kinds of information among all layer 3 entities
and between layer 3 and neighboring layers. The objectives of the layer 3 are to
provide the means for:
z
The establishment, operation and release of a dedicated radio channel

connection (RR).
For location updating, authentication and TMSI reallocation (MM).
For establishment, maintaining and termination of circuit-switched calls (CC).
Supplementary services support (SS).
Short messages service support (SMS).
Layer 3 consists of 3 sub-layers including Connection Management (CM), Mobility

Management (MM) and Radio Resource management (RR).
The functions of the signaling layer 3 are performed by means of the signaling layer 3
protocols between two systems which represent the Mobile Station side and the
Network side of the radio interface as viewed by the Mobile Station. GSM 04.07 does
not consider the distribution of signaling functions among the different network
equipment. The functions of layer 3 and its supporting lower layers, therefore, provide
the Mobile Network Signaling (MNS) Service to the upper layers..
Interaction between layer 3 and higher layers and between services interfaces of layer
2 as well as that between neighboring sub-layers in layer 3 can be described in
primitives and parameters. Exchange of information between two peers of the
signaling layer 3 is performed by means of the three sublayer protocols.
II. L3 Structure
As have already introduced, the 3 sub-layers of layer 3 are further discussed here:
Among them, the highest sub-layer is composed of three functional entities: Call
Control (CC), Short Message Service support (SMS) and Supplementary Service
support (SS). In total, there are five functional entities consisted in the layer 3 radio
interface. Below is the brief introduction to these entities:
z
Radio Resources (RR) management handles the establishment, maintenance,

and release of physical channels and logical channels, as well as cross-cell
transfer on the request of CM sub-layer.
Mobility Management (MM) deals with the all necessary functions of mobile
features to support mobile subscribers. It notifies the network when the mobile
station is activated and deactivated, or the location area is changed. It is also
responsible for the security of activated radio channels.
3-32
Feature Description
z
CC deals with all necessary functions to establish or release the circuit-switched

connections.
SS deals with all necessary functions to support GSM supplementary services.
SMS performs all necessary functions to support point-to-point short message

services.
In addition, other functions are contained in layer 3 which are related to the transport
of messages, e.g. multiplexing and splitting. Those functions are defined in the Radio
Resource Management and Mobility Management. They have the task to route the
messages according to the protocol discriminator (PD) and transaction identifier (TI)
which are part of the message header.
The MM routing function route the messages of the CM entities and the messages of
the MM entity of its own sublayer towards the service access point of RR, and
multiplex them in case of parallel transactions. The routing function of Radio Resource
Management shall distribute the messages to be sent according to their protocol
discriminator (PD) and the actual channel configuration.
The messages provided at the different service access points of layer 2 are split by the
RR routing function according to the protocol discriminator (PD). If PD equals to RR,
this message will be transferred to RR at the local sub-layer. Other messages are
provided to MM via the access point RR-SAP. The routing function of MM passes the
messages according to the protocol discriminator (PD) and the transaction identifier
(TI) towards the MM entity or towards the CM entities via the various MM-SAP's.
Figure 3-23 illustrates the protocol model of L3 signaling.
The RR sub-layer at the bottom receives services provided by layer 2 through various
service access points (i.e., various types of channels) of layer 2, and provides services
via RR-SAP to the MM sub-layer. The MM sub-layer provides services to the three
entities (CC, SS and SMS) on the CM sub-layer through different service access
points MMCC-SAP, MMSS-SAP and MMSMS-SAP respectively. The 3 independent
entities on the CM sub-layer provide services to higher layers through MNCC-SAP,
MNSS-SAP and MNSMS-SAP respectively.
3-33
Feature Description
Mobile Service
MNCC-SAP
MNSS-SAP
MNSMS-SAP
CC
SS
SMS
MMSS-SAP
MMCC-SAP
MMSMSSAP
MMREG -SAP
MM
CC
Layer 3 Signaling
MM
SS
SMS
RR-SAP
..RR
RR
PD
RR
SDCCH
SACCH
RACH
SAPI 3
BCCH
AGCH+PCH
SDCCH
SACCH
FACCH
SAPI 0
Figure 3-23 Um interface L3 protocol model
III. Service characteristics.

1)
Services provided by layer 3 on the MS side
Registration services, i.e., IMSI attach and detach operations.
Call Control services for normal and emergency calls including call related
Supplementary Services Support services.
Call independent Supplementary Services Support.
Short Message Services Support.
Services provided by layer 3 on the network side

z
Call Control Services, including call establishment, call maintaining, call

termination and call related supplementary service support.
Call independent Supplementary Services Support.
Short Message Services Support.
2)
Inter-layer services between the mobile station and network side
3-34
Feature Description
Services provided by Radio Resource Management entity. These services are
provided to MM via RR-SAP. They are used for establishing control channel
connections, establishing traffic channel connections, ciphering mode indication,
releasing control channel connections, and control-data transfer.
Services provided by mobility management entities (MM). These services support
call control, supplementary services and short messages services of connection

management entities.
MS
Network Side
MM
RR - Primitive
RR
SAP
corresponding layer protocol

RR
Figure 3-24 Communication at RR
MS
CC
SS
Network Side
SM
CC
SS
Corresponding layer protocol

MM
MM
Figure 3-25 Communication at MM
3-35
SM
Feature Description
3.3 Abis interface

3.3.1 Overview
The Abis interface is the interface between Base Station Controller (BSC) and Base
Transceiver Station (BTS). It is an internal interface of the BSS. At the beginning, ETSI
hope to realize the complete standardization of Abis interface, so that the BTS can
connect to the BSC of different supplier. However, the complete standardization of
Abis interface has not been turned into reality. As a result ETSI only strictly define the
service part of Abis interface in 08.52, 08.54, 08.56 and 08.58 of the GSM
specification, and didn't define the O&M part. Therefore, the Abis interface can only be
regarded as an internal interface. The interworking between different vendors' BTS
and BSC has not been realized.
The terrestrial traffic channels on the Abis interface and the radio traffic channels on
the Um interface are in one-to-one correspondence with one another.
I. Protocol Model
1)
Protocol Model
The protocol model of the Abis interface is shown in Figure 3-26.

BSC
BTS
RR
BTSM
RR
LAPDm
LAPD
Sign
Layer1
Layer1
BSSAP
BTSM
SCCP
LAPD
MTP
Layer1
Abis
BTSM: Base Transceiver Station Management LAPD: Link Access Procedure on the D Channel
RR: Radio Resource
LAPDm: Link Access Procedure on the Dm Channel
MTP: Message Transfer Part
SCCPSignaling Connection Control Part
BSSAPBase Station Subsystem Application Part
Figure 3-26 Protocol model of Abis interface

z
Layer 1 of the Abis interface is hardware-based and responsible for receiving and
transmitting data to the physical link.
The layer 2 protocol of the Abis interface is based on the LAPD. LAPD addresses
TRX (or BCF) through TEI. Different logical links are used for traffic management
message (RSL, Radio Signaling Link), network management message (OML,
3-36
Feature Description
Operation & Maintenance Link), and L2 management messages (L2ML, Layer 2

Management Link).
z
RR (Radio Resource Management) messages are mapped onto the BSSAP

(BSS Application Part) in BSC. In BTS, most of RR messages are handled as
transparent messages. However, some of them have to be interpreted and
executed by BTS (for example, cipher, random access, paging and assignment),
these messages are processed by the BTSM (BTS Management) entities in BSC
and by BTS.
BSC and BTS do not interpret CM (Connection Management) and MM (Mobility

Management) messages. These messages are transferred over the A-interface
by DTAP (Direct Transfer Application Part). At the Abis interface, DTAP
messages are transferred as transparent messages.
2)
Abis interface related protocols:
GSM 08.52 defines the basic principles for the Abis interface specifications, and
the traffic function division between BSC and BTS.
GSM 08.54 defines the physical structure of Abis interface.
GSM 08.56 defines the data link protocol of Abis interface.
GSM 08.58 defines the layer 3 procedures.
GSM 12.21 defines the transmission mechanism of the OM message on the Abis
interface.
GSM 08.60 defines the in-band control protocol of the remote transcoder and rate
adapters.
II. Structure of Abis interface

The Abis interface can support three different internal BTS configurations (as
illustrated in Figure 3-27):
z
Single TRX.
Multiple TRXs are connected with the BSC via a common physical connection.
Multiple TRXs are connected with the BSC via different physical connections.
3-37
Feature Description

BSS
Abis
TRX
BTS1
BCF
TRX
TRX
A
MSC
Abis
BTS2
TRX
BSC
BCF
Abis
TRX
TRX
BTS3
TRX
TRX
BCF
Figure 3-27 Struction of Abis interface

In Figure 3-27:
z
TRX is the functional entity that supports 8 physical channels that belong to the
same TDMA frame, which is defined in the PLMN.
The BCF (Base Control Function) is the functional entity that performs common
control functions including BTS initialization, software loading, channel
configuration, operation and maintenance.
There are two types of channels at the Abis interface, which are:
z
Traffic channels with the rates of 8kbit/s, 16kbit/s and 64kbit/s respectively,
carrying speech or data from radio channels.
Signaling channels with rates of 16kbit/s, 32kbit/s or 64kbit/s respectively,

carrying signaling between BSC and MS, and between BSC and BTS.
Different Terminal Equipment Identifiers (TEI) are assigned to get unique addresses of
TRXs. Three separate logical links are defined with each TEI (as shown in
Figure 3-28):
z
RSL: Radio Signaling Link used to support traffic management procedures, one
for each TRX.
OML: Operation & Maintenance Link used to support network management

procedures, one for each SITE.
L2ML, L2 management link, for transferring the management messages at L2.
3-38
Feature Description
BSC
BTS
RSL SAPI=0
OML SAPI=62
L2ML SAPI=63
TRX
TEI1
BCF
LAYER 2
TEI
MANAGE-
RSL SAPI=0
OML SAPI=62
L2ML SAPI=63
TRX
TEI2
BCF
RSL SAPI=0
OML SAPI=62
L2ML SAPI=63
MENT
TRX
TEI3
BCF
OML SAPI=62
L2ML SAPI=63
BCF
TEI4
BCF
Figure 3-28 Abis interface layer 2 logical links
III. Functional division between BSC and BTS

The BSS is composed of two functional entities, i.e. BSC and BTS. BTS is the radio
part of the BSS under the control of the BSC, providing services for a specific cell. The
BTS fulfills the interworking and mapping of the terrestrial channels and the radio
channels, as well as the interworking of the MS and the network via the radio interface
(Um interface). The BSC is the controlling part of the BSS, which manages the
external and the internal interfaces, as well as the radio resource and radio interface
parameters.
The specific function division between the BTS and the BSC is shown in Table 3-7.
3-39
Feature Description
Table 3-7 Distribution of services and functions between BTS and BSC
Location
Function
BTS
MSC-BSC channel
Terrestrial channel
management
BSC-BTS channel
Channel
allocation
Blocking
indication
Channel
allocation
Blocking
indication
BSC/MSC
Channel
configuration
management
Frequency hopping
DCH management
Radio channel
management
Remark
BCCH/CCCH
management
Management
Execution
Channel
allocation
Link
monitoring
Channel
release
Idle channel
observation
Power
control
decision
System
information
management
System
information
broadcast
Random
access
check
Immediate
assignment
DTX paging
management
DTX paging
execution
Channel
coding/decoding
Transcoding/rate
adaptation
Note 1
Uplink
measuremen
t
Processing
measuremen
t report
Traffic
measuremen
t
Calculation
Measurement
Timing advance
3-40
Note 2
Feature Description

Location
Function
BTS
Indication to
MS during
random
access
Indication to
MS during
handover
Indication to
MS during
session
Timing advance
Radio channel
management
LAPDm function
Remark
BSC/MSC
Management
Ciphering
Execution
Management
Handover
access
check
Handover
Mobility Management
Calling Control
Note 1: The support of power control in BTS is optional

Note 2: The initial measurement data is reported by BTS to BSC through Abis
interface. As an option, the BSC/BTS may support preprocessing of the initial data in
BTS, which reduces the load of BSC.
3.3.2 Protocols on the Abis Interface

I. Physical layer
Abis interface physical layer adopts the PCM link with the working rate at 2048 kbit/s
to provide 32 channels at 64kbit/s. The electro-technicial parameter at the physical
layer conforms to the CCITT G.703 recommendations.
BSS is the connection point of the radio channel and terrestrial channel. Both kinds of
channels have different transfer patterns and coding rates. In the radio channel of BSS,
the transfer rate is 16kbit/s while it is 64kbit/s in the terrestrial channel. Therefore
transcoding and rate adaptation is needed. This function is realized at the physical
layer of Abis interface by the Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit (TRAU). TRAU can be
located at BTS side, BSC side or MSC side. Given to the channel utilization at the Abis
interface, M900/M1800 BTS does not support TRAU at BTS side, but the BSC or MSC
instead.
Data coding is described in GSM 08.20. The in-band control protocol of TRAU is
stipulated in GSM 08.60.
3-41
Feature Description
II. Data link layer

1)
Overview
The data link layer of Abis uses LAPD protocol. It utilizes the service on the physical
layer, and provides connection-oriented or connectionless services for layer 3. The
data link Service Access Point (SAP) is the point that provides services for layer 3.
SAP is identified by Service Access Point Identifier (SAPI). A data link connection
endpoint is identified by a data link connection endpoint identifier as seen from layer 3
and by a data link connection identifier (DLCI) as seen from the data link layer.
For information exchange between two or more layer 3 entities, an association must
be established between the layer 3 entities in the data link layer using a data link layer
protocol.
The communication between data link layer entities is governed by a peer-to-peer
protocol specific to the layer. Messages at the data link layer are transferred between
entities at layer 2 through physical layer. Inter-layer service request is implemented
with service primitive.
2)
Function
The purpose of LAPD is to realize reliable end-to-end information transfer between

layer 3 entities through the user-network interface by using the D-channel. To be
specific, LAPD supports:
z
Multiple terminal equipment between subscriber and interface,
Multiple L3 entities.
Functions of LAPD includes:

z
Establishes one or several data links on the D channel.
Delimits, locates and transmits transparently frames so that a string of bits

transmitted on the D channel in the form of frames can be identified.
Implements sequence control to keep the order of the frames that pass the data
link connections.
Checks the transmission errors, format errors and operation errors in the data link
connections.
Makes recovery based on the detected transmission errors, format errors and
operation errors.
Notifies the management layer entities of the unrecoverable errors.
Flow control.
Data link layer provides the means for information transfer between multiple
combinations of data link connection points. The information may be transferred
through point-to-point data link connections or via broadcast data link connections.
3-42
Feature Description
III. Traffic management of Layer 3

The traffic management part of the Abis interface layer 3 is mainly described in GSM
08.58 specifications. The procedures defined in this specifications has two major
functions:
z
Realizing the interworking of the MS and BSS/NSS on the Um interface.
Implementing part of the radio resource management functions under the control
of BSC.
The traffic management message is divided into the transparent and non-transparent
messages, as shown in Figure 3-29.
z
The transparent message refers to the messages forwarded without interpretation

or being processed by the BTS.
The non-transparent message refers to the messages processed and structured

by the BTS.
The traffic management messages can also be divided into four groups in terms of
functions, which are:
z
Radio link layer management message, used for the management of the data link
layer on the radio channel.
Dedicated channel management message used for the management of dedicated

channels (SDCCH and TCH).
Common control channel management message used for the management of

common control channels.
TRX management message used for TRX management.
Transparency and group of the message is determined by the message discriminator

at the header of the message.
1)
Radio link layer management procedures
Radio link layer management procedures include:

z
Link establishment indication procedure: BTS uses this procedure to indicate to

BSC the success of setting up multi-frame link originated by the subscriber. BSC
establishes a link from MSC to SCCP through the indication.
Link establishment request procedure: This procedure is used by BSC to request

the establishment of a link layer connection in multi-frame mode on the radio
channel.
Link release indication procedure: This procedure is used by BTS to indicate to

BSC that a link layer connection on the radio channel has been released at the
initiative of an MS.
Link release request procedure: This procedure is used by BSC to request the
release of a link layer connection on the radio channel.
3-43
Feature Description
z
Transmission of a transparent L3-message on the Um interface in acknowledged

mode: This procedure is used by BSC to request the sending of a transparent L3
message to MS on the Um interface in acknowledged mode.
Reception of a transparent L3-message on the Um interface in acknowledged

mode: This procedure is used by BTS to indicate the reception of a transparent
L3 message on the Um interface in acknowledged mode.
Transmission
of
transparent
L3-message
on
the
Um
interface
in
unacknowledged mode: This procedure is used by BSC to request the sending of

a transparent L3 message to MS on the Um interface in unacknowledged mode.
z
Reception of a transparent L3-message on the Um interface in unacknowledged

mode: This procedure is used by BTS to indicate the reception of a transparent
L3 message in unacknowledged mode.
Link error indication procedure: Through this procedure BTS indicates BSC
incase of any abnormality in the radio link layer.
2)
Dedicated channel management procedures
The dedicated channel management principles includes:

z
Channel activation procedure: This procedure is used to activate a channel at

BTS for an MS which later will be commanded to this channel by an Immediate
Assignment, an Assignment Command, an Additional Assignment or a Handover
Command message.
Channel mode modification procedure: This procedure is used by BSC to request

a change of the channel mode of an active channel.
Handover detection procedure: This procedure is used between the target BTS
and BSC to detect the accessing of the MS being handed over.
Start of encryption procedure: This procedure is used to start encryption

according to the procedure defined in Technical Specification GSM 04.08.
Measurement report procedure: It includes the necessary basic measurement

report procedure and measurement report preprocessing procedure. BTS reports
all parameters related to handover decision to the BSC through this procedure.
Deactivate SACCH procedure: This procedure is used by BSC to deactivate the

SACCH at BTS according to the Channel Release procedure defined in Technical
Specification GSM 04.08.
Radio channel release procedure: This procedure is used by BSC to release a

radio channel that is no longer needed.
MS power control procedure: This procedure is used by BSS to set the MS power
level or the parameters required by TRX. MS power control decision must be
implemented in BSC, and as an optional procedure in BTS.
BTS Transmission power control procedure: This procedure used between BSC
and BTS to set the TRX transmission power level or the parameters required by
TRX. The BTS transmission power control decision should be implemented in
BSC, or in BTS.
3-44
Feature Description
z
Connection failure procedure: This procedure is used by BTS to indicate to BSC

that an active connection has been broken.
Physical context request procedure: This is an optional procedure which allows

the BSC to obtain information on the "physical context" of a radio channel just
prior to a channel change.
SACCH information modification procedure: BSC uses this procedure to instruct

BTS to change the information (system information) filled in a specific SACCH
channel.
3)
Common channel management procedures
Common channel management regulations include:

z
Channel request by MS procedure: The procedure is initiated by TRX upon

detection of a random access from an MS (Channel Request message from MS).
Paging principle procedure: It is used to page an MS on the specified paging

sub-channel. The paging of an MS is initiated by BSC sending a Paging
Command message to BTS. BSC determines the paging group to be used
according to the IMSI of the called MS. The value of this paging group together
with the identity of the mobile station is sent to BTS.
Immediate assignment procedure: When a mobile station accesses BTS, BSC

uses this procedure to assign a dedicated channel for the mobile station
immediately.
Delete indication procedure: This procedure is used by BTS to indicate that due
to overload on the AGCH, an Immediate Assign Command has been deleted.
CCCH load indication procedure: This procedure is used by BTS to inform BSC
the load on a designate CCCH. Indication period is also set by OM.
Broadcast information modification procedure: This procedure is used by BSC to

indicate to BTS the new information to be broadcast on BCCH.
Short message cell broadcast procedure: Short Message Service Cell Broadcast
messages are sent to BTS as SMS Broadcast Request messages.
4)
TRX management procedures
This type of procedure is used for TRX management. There are:

z
SACCH filling information modify procedure: This procedure is used by BSC to

indicate to BTS the new information to be used as filling information on SACCHs.
Radio resources indication procedure: This procedure is used to inform BSC on

the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX.
Flow control procedure: This procedure is defined to give some degree of flow
control. It can be used for TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload and
ACCH overload.
Error reporting procedure: This procedure is used by BTS to report detected

downlink message errors, which cannot be reported by any other procedure.
3-45
Feature Description
IV. Operation and maintenance part of Layer 3

1)
Operation and maintenance information model
Managed objects
There are four types of management objects: site, cell, carrier and channel. The basic
structure is illustrated in Figure 3-29.
SITE
CELL 0
CELL 1
CELL n
TRX0
TRX1
TRXm
TRX
CH0
CH1
CH7
Figure 3-29 Basic structure of management object

z
Object addressing
Addressing of network management messages is realized by means of managed

object types and cases. For each object case in BTS there is a complete L2
connection description. The setup of the first connection uses one (semi-) permanent
default TEI. Subsequent connections use the TEIs provided when setting up TEI
procedures. Object cases can also use layer 3 addresses. The mixed use of layer 2
and layer 3 addressing enables one BTS site have one or multiple physical links.
z
Managed object state
Management status include management status, operation status and availability

status. See Table 3-8, Table 3-9 and Table 3-10. The management state of managed
objects is only controlled by BSC, and available state is the specific explanation of
operative state.
Table 3-8 Management status
State
Locked
Shut down
Unlocked
Description
BSC has disconnected all calls through this managed object, and no new calls can be
connected to this object.
New services can not be connected to this managed object, but those existing calls will be
maintained.
New calls can be connected to this managed object.
3-46
Feature Description
Table 3-9 Operation status

State
Disabled
Enabled
Description
Resources are completely unavailable, and can no longer provide services to the users.
All or part of resources are available and can be used.
Table 3-10 Availability status

State
ln test
Failed
Power off
Off line
Dependency
Degraded
Not Installed
2)
Description
The resource is being tested. Its operational state is disabled.
The source/object is not working due to some internal error. Its operational state is disabled.
The resource needs power supply. Its operational state is disabled.
The resource needs manual or automatic operations. Its operational state is disabled.
Services provided by this resource are degraded in a certain sense, such as rate or
operational capacity. Its operational state is disabled.
Services provided by this resource are degraded in a certain sense, such as rate or
operational capacity. Its operational state is disabled.
Hardware or software of the managed objects is not installed. Its operational state is disabled.
Basic procedures
All procedures are based on formatted O&M messages. Most formatted O&M
messages initiated by BSC or BTS require the peer layer 3 endpoint to give response
or acknowledgment in the form of formatted O&M messages. Single formatted O&M
messages that need not be responded are called a basic procedure. All formatted
O&M messages are sent on layer 2 in the form of I frames. A group of procedures,
called as structured procedures, are based on the combination of some basic
procedures.
For a specific object, if a certain basic procedure is not completed, the system will not
start its subsequent basic procedures. When there is no response to the formatted
operation and maintenance message from the peer layer 3 before L3 timeout, the
basic procedure is regarded as not completed. When the previous basic procedure
has not received any response (ACK or NACK) before layer 3 timeout, then no
subsequent basic procedure is sent to this object case. The default timeout for layer 3
is 10s. If part of an original message is not understood or supported, the whole
message is discarded. A ACK message returned by the object indicates affirm
response, it is used to notify the message sender that the command has been
executed or will be executed. A NACK message returned by the object indicates
disaffirm response, it is used to notify the message sender that the command
executed unsuccessfully and the corresponding failure cause.
There are mainly the following types of basic procedures:
z
Software loading management procedure
Abis interface management procedure
Transmission management procedure
Air interface management procedure

3-47
Feature Description
Test management procedure
State management and event reporting procedure
Equipment state management procedure
Other procedure
3.3.3 Characteristics of Abis Interface

Huawei's Abis interface supports various services. It also supports the control over
BTS and the allocation of frequency. Abis interface has the following characteristics:
z
Supporting all the services as stipulated in the GSM 02 series.
Supporting smooth expansion of BTS capacity.
There are three types of multiplexing modes on Abis interface: 10:1, 12:1 and
15:1, meaning the ability to simultaniously transmit 10, 12 or 15 TRX data on the
same E1 respectively.
The transmission modes on the Abis interface can be terrestrial, satellite,

microwave or optical fiber.
I. Transmission Modes on the Abis Interface

The transmission modes on the Abis interface can be terrestrial or satellite. These two
types of transmission mode are selected in the BSC data configuration. For thinly
populated and scattered areas where ordinary transmission technology is expensive
and difficult to implement, Huawei offers connectivity through satellite. Figure 3-30
shows a typical example of networking through satellite.
Satelite
Earth Station
MSC
Earth Receiving E1
Station
BTS
BSC
BTS
SDH/PDH
/HDSL/Microware
/E1
BTS
Earth Receiving E1
BTS
Station
Figure 3-30 Networking of satellite transmission
3-48
Feature Description
The networking implementation through satellite transmission is different from the land
transmission due to long transmission delay. To get good quality transmission,
following measures are taken:
z
LAPD protocol is modified to overcome the impact of delay.
The adjustment algorithm of the TRAU frame is modified from fixed cycle
adjustment to self-adaptive adjustment.
The BTS clock works in internal clock mode.
II. Abis interface channel assignment

Abis interface has three types of channels, including Traffic Channel (TCH), Radio
Signaling Link (RSL) and Operation & Maintenance Link (OML). Each site
corresponds to an OML, each TRX corresponds to an RSL, and a radio traffic channel
corresponds to the traffic channel at the Abis interface.
There are three multiplexing modes for Abis interface: 10:1, 12:1 or 15:1, respectively
meaning that the data of 10, 12 or 15 TRXs can be simultaneously transmitted on one
E1.
In the following description, the row is the timeslot No., and the column is the
sub-timeslot No. Which is calculated by 8kbit/s rate. Ti.j refers to the No. j sub-timeslot
of the No. i TRX which occupys a 16kbit/s sub-timeslot on E1.
1)
Timeslot distribution of E1 in 10:1 multiplexing
Table 3-11 Sequence table under 10:1 mode

Sub-TS
Sub-TS 0
Sub-TS1
Sub-TS2
Sub-TS3
TS
0
Synchronization
T0.0
T0.1
T0.2
T0.3
T0.4
T0.5
T0.6
T0.7
RSL0
T1.0
T1.1
T1.2
T1.3
T1.4
T1.5
T1.6
T1.7
RSL1
T2.0
T2.1
T2.2
T2.3
T2.4
T2.5
T2.6
T2.7
RSL2
10
T3.0
T3.1
T3.2
T3.3
11
T3.4
T3.5
T3.6
T3.7
12
RSL3
13
T4.0
T4.1
T4.2
T4.3
14
T4.4
T4.5
T4.6
T4.7
3-49
Feature Description
Sub-TS
Sub-TS 0
Sub-TS1
Sub-TS2
Sub-TS3
TS
15
RSL4
16
T5.0
T5.1
T5.2
T5.3
17
T5.4
T5.5
T5.6
T5.7
18
RSL5
19
T6.0
T6.1
T6.2
T6.3
20
T6.4
T6.5
T6.6
T6.7
21
RSL6
22
T7.0
T7.1
T7.2
T7.3
23
T7.4
T7.5
T7.6
T7.7
24
RSL7
25
T8.0
T8.1
T8.2
T8.3
26
T8.4
T8.5
T8.6
T8.7
27
RSL8
28
T9.0
T9.1
T9.2
T9.3
29
T9.4
T9.5
T9.6
T9.7
30
RSL9
31
OML
In 10:1 multiplexing, each E1 carries 10 TRXs. Each signaling link occupies a 64kbit/s
timeslot on the E1. If some sites cascad on one E1, , the E1 can carry 4 sites/9 TRXs
or 7 sites/8 TRXs.
2)
Table 3-12 Sequence table under 12:1 mode

Sub-TS
Sub-TS 0
Sub-TS1
Sub-TS2
Sub-TS3
TS
0
Synchronization
T0.0
T0.1
T0.2
T0.3
T0.4
T0.5
T0.6
T0.7
RSL0, RSL1
T1.0
T1.1
T1.2
T1.3
T1.4
T1.5
T1.6
T1.7
T2.0
T2.1
T2.2
T2.3
T2.4
T2.5
T2.6
T2.7
T3.2
T3.3
8
9
RSL2, RSL3
T3.0
T3.1
3-50
Feature Description
Sub-TS
Sub-TS 0
Sub-TS1
Sub-TS2
Sub-TS3
10
T3.4
T3.5
T3.6
T3.7
11
T4.0
T4.1
T4.2
T4.3
12
T4.4
T4.5
T4.6
T4.7
TS
13
RSL4, RSL5
14
T5.0
T5.1
T5.2
T5.3
15
T5.4
T5.5
T5.6
T5.7
16
T6.0
T6.1
T6.2
T6.3
17
T6.4
T6.5
T6.6
T6.7
18
RSL6, RSL7
19
T7.0
T7.1
T7.2
T7.3
20
T7.4
T7.5
T7.6
T7.7
21
T8.0
T8.1
T8.2
T8.3
22
T8.4
T8.5
T8.6
T8.7
23
RSL8, RSL9
24
T9.0
T9.1
T9.2
T9.3
25
T9.4
T9.5
T9.6
T9.7
26
T10.0
T10.1
T10.2
T10.3
27
T10.4
T10.5
T10.6
T10.7
28
RSL10, RSL11
29
T11.0
T11.1
T11.2
T11.3
30
T11.4
T11.5
T11.6
T11.7
31
OML
In 12:1 mode, each E1 carries 12 TRXs, and every two RSLs share a 64kbit/s timeslot
of E1. If some site cascaded on one E1, then the E1 can carry 3 sites/11 TRXs or 6
sites/10 TRXs.
3)
Table 3-13 Sequence under 15:1 mode

Sub-TS
Sub-TS 0
Sub-TS1
Sub-TS2
Sub-TS3
TS
0
Synchronization
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
V8
V9
V10
V11
V12
V13
V14
V15
V16
3-51
Feature Description
Sub-TS
Sub-TS 0
Sub-TS1
Sub-TS2
Sub-TS3
V17
V18
V19
V20
V21
V22
V23
V24
V25
V26
V27
V28
V29
V30
V31
V32
V33
V34
V35
V36
10
V37
V38
V39
V40
11
V41
V42
V43
V44
12
V45
V46
V47
V48
13
V49
V50
V51
V52
14
V53
V54
V55
V56
15
V57
V58
V59
V60
16
V61
V62
V63
V64
17
V65
V66
V67
V68
18
V69
V70
V71
V72
19
V73
V74
V75
V76
20
V77
V78
V79
V80
21
V81
V82
V83
V84
22
V85
V86
V87
V88
23
V89
V90
V91
V92
24
V93
V94
V95
V96
25
V97
V98
V99
V100
26
V101
V102
V103
V104
27
V105
V106
V107
V108
TS
28
RSL11, 12, 13, 14
29
RSL7, 8, 9, 10
30
RSL3, 4, 5, 6
31
OML+RSL0, 1, 2
In 15:1 mode, each E1 carries 15 TRXs, and timeslots 1 to 27 contain 108

sub-timeslots of 16kbit/s for the use by traffic channels of 15 TRXs. Vi refers to the ith
traffic channel of the site. The E1 can be configured with 16 signaling links, every 4 of
which share a 64kbit/s timeslot. If all cascaded sites have the same 15:1 configuration,
then a single E1 can carry 2 sites/14 TRXs or 4 sites/12 TRXs.
3-52
Feature Description
3.4 Gb interface
3.4.1 Overview
The Gb interface is the standard open interface between BSS and SGSN.
M900/M1800 BSS, which includes the PCU, can be connected with the SGSN from
any other vendor. Through this interface SGSN communicates with BSS to implement
such functions as packet data transfer, flow control, mobility management, etc. This is
a mandatory interface in GPRS network.
The location of Gb interface in GPRS system is similar to that of the A interface in
GSM system. A interface is between BSS and MSC, while Gb interface is between
BSS and SGSN. Their difference is that Gb interface is more suitable to provide
packet service.
I. Layered Model of the Gb interface protocol

Figure 3-31 describes the location of the Gb interface and the main structure of the
interface protocol stack.
LLC
RLC
RELAY
BSSGP
BSSGP
MAC
NS
NS
L1
L1
L1
BSS
Gb
SGSN
Figure 3-31 Protocol stack at Gb interface

z
The L1 physical layer of the Gb interface, which is based on the Frame Relay (FR)
protocol, can be actually implemented by means of point-to-point frame relay
network connection or multipoint-to-multipoint frame relay network connection.
The Network Service (NS) L2 protocol of the Gb interface implements the

transmission function of the NS SDUs at the Gb interface as well as configuration
and state management of NS-VS, etc.
The BSSGP L3 protocol of the Gb interface is designed mainly to carry out such
operation & maintenance functions as uplink and downlink transmission of the
upper layer (LLC layer) signaling and data, downlink data flow control, and
blocking/unblocking and restarting of BVC (BSSGP Virtual Connection).
3-53
Feature Description
II. Related protocols of the Gb interface

Like the A interface, the Gb interface is also an open interface so it is strictly designed
according to GSM specifications to ensure good interworking between the GPRS BSS
and the GPRS core network of different manufacturers. The related protocols of the
Gb interface include:
GSM 03.60, which specifies the location definition and the protocol stack
structure of the Gb interface.

GSM 08.14, which specifies that physical layer of the Gb interface between BSS
and SGSN should use the FR protocol.

GSM 08.16, which specifies the details of the L2 protocol NS of the Gb interface
between BSS and SGSN.

GSM 08.18, which specifies the details of the L3 protocol BSSGP of the Gb
interface between BSS and SGSN.
3.4.2 Protocols on the Gb Interface

I. FR
Frame Relay protocol introduced for the physical layer of the Gb interface and E1 or
T1 is imported for the physical media. The frame relay module enables the
interworking between sub-networks so that the two ends (PCU and SGSN) can
connect with each other directly through dedicated link (in point-to-point mode) or
through frame relay network (in an intermediate network mode). As shown in Figure
3-32 and Figure 3-33.
Gb
BSS
(user)
SGSN
(network)
Figure 3-32 Point to Point mode
BSS
(user)
Gb
Gb
Frame Relay
network
SGSN
(user)
Figure 3-33 Intermediate network mode

The Frame Relay is a mature and universal physical layer protocol, not limited to the
GPRS Gb interface only.
3-54
Feature Description
II. NS
Distributed over the two sides of the Gb interface, the NS protocol layer has
symmetrical functions on both sides of the Gb interface. But as a whole it provides
simple and clear interface services to the upper-level BSSGP. It delivers mainly three
service functions as follows:
z
Upper Layer SDU transfers: All messages transported in the BSSGP layer are
transferred in the NS layer in the form of NS SDU. The normal operation of the
NS layer affords a reliable channel and protection for the normal operation of the
upper layer protocol.
Network congestion indication: When the NS layer detects congestion or

congestion removed on the bottom layer link, it will notify the upper layer through
the congestion indication message so that the latter can handle it accordingly.
Network state indication: When the NS layer finds the bottom layer link is faulty
and it cannot transmit data or the bottom layer link fault has recovered, it will
notify the specific faulty point (recovery point) message to the upper layer so that
the latter can handle it accordingly.
III. BSSGP L3 protocol

Distributed over the two sides of the Gb interface, the NS protocol layer has
symmetrical functions on both sides of the Gb interface. Figure 3-34 describes the
service model implemented by the BSSGP protocol at both ends i.e. BSS and SGSN.
Service model in a BSS
RELAY
GSM 03.64
RLC/MAC
GMM
RL
Service model in an SGSN
NM
GMM
LLC
NM
GMM
BSSGP
BSSGP
NM
GMM
NM
BSSGP
GSM 08.16
Netw ork service
GSM 08.16
Netw ork service
Figure 3-34 BSSGP service model

It can be seen from the protocol service model that the functions offered by BSSGP to
the upper layer fall into three major parts:
z
NM BSSGP: This part performs the network management function at the Gb

interface, involving downlink data flow control, blocking, unblocking and resetting
of BVC (BSSGP Virtual Connection), and MS tracing.
3-55
Feature Description
z
GMM BSSGP: This part performs the GPRS mobility management function at the
Gb interface, including network paging to MS, MS radio access capability, and
suspending and resuming of the GPRS service.
Uplink and Downlink Data Transfer: Gb interface delivers the data transmission
service at BSS and SGSN. Although they differ in their names (it is called RL
BSSGP service at the BSS side and LLC BSSGP service at the SGSN side), they
are fully identical in their function implementation. It also carries out transparent
transmission of the uplink and downlink upper-layer data.
3.4.3 Characteristics of Gb Interface

1)
Flexible physical interface and LMI support
M900/M1800 PCU supports ITU-T standard E1 interface.

The Local Management Interface (LMI) supports Annex A of ITUT Q933 as stipulated
in the GSM protocol as well as Annex D of CISCO LMI and ANSI T1-617, making it
easy to interwork with the equipment of other manufacturers in the network.
2)
Flexible FR BC bandwidth and NS-VC bandwidth
The bandwidth of the physical carrier channel of the FR layer of M900/M1800 PCU
can be configured flexibly between 64x1kbit/s~64x31kbit/s. The bandwidth of NS-VC
in the NS layer can be configured flexibly between 1kbit/s~1984kbit/s. This measure
greatly facilitates the network planning.
3)
Load sharing on the NS layer
M900/M1800 PCU supports full load sharing between NS-VSs of an NSE. NS-VSs
can be located on different boards. This is crucial in enhancing the transmission
reliability and utilization of the Gb interface.
4)
BSSGP layer entity switchover
M900/M1800 PCU supports full switchover between BSSGP PTP entities and
between BSSGP SIG entities. When a PTP entity is somehow unavailable, the
services in the entity can be switched over automatically to another available PTP
entity, regardless of whether or not the available PTP entity is in the same physical
board as the faulty PTP entity. When a SIG entity is somehow unavailable, the
services in the entity can be switched over automatically to another available SIG
entity, regardless of whether or not the available SIG entity is in the same physical
board as the faulty SIG entity. The entity switchover function in the BSSGP layer is
vital in boosting the reliability of the BSSGP layer.
3-56
Feature Description
3.5 G-Abis Interface

3.5.1 Overview
G-Abis interface is an internal interface between PCU and BTS in Huaweis GPRS
BSS. Through this interface, PCU fulfils communication with BTS and handles packet
signaling transfer, packet data transfer, in-band signaling transfer and block
synchronization, etc. It is similar to the Abis interface between BSC and BTS. The
difference lies in that G-Abis interface provides functions and features more suitable
for packet switching service.
3.5.2 Interface Features

A PCU can be located at three positions. But there is no substantial specification of the
interface between BTS and PCU in the GSM/GPRS specifications, so the G-Abis
interfaces of different manufacturers are implemented in different ways. Huaweis
G-Abis interface has maximum transmission bandwidth utilization and effectively
supports the processing of packet data and signaling. The G-Abis interface has the
following features:
z
Packet switching services, data and signaling are transferred by G-TRAU frame.
Provide 16kbit/s band width to transmit packet data of CS-1/CS-2 code and
32kbit/s band width to transmit packet data of CS-3/CS-4 code.
G-TRAU frame format transfer is adopted, with abundant in-band signaling

contents including a series of mechanisms such as BTS measurement, BTS
power control, RLC/MAC block coding scheme indication, air interface block
synchronization, etc.
The transmission parameter of GPRS encoding mode is listed in Figure 3-10.

Table 3-14 Transfer parameters of coding schemes
Coding scheme
Coding rate
CS-1
CS-2
CS-3
1/2
2/3
3/4
CS-4
Code bits
456
588
676
Rate kbit/s
9.05
13.4
15.6
21.4
When CS-1/2 encoding mode is supported, the rate of G-Abis interface should be less
than 16kbit/s. When CS-3/4 encoding mode is supported, G-Abis interface should be
able to provide the rate of 32 kbit/s.
3-57
Feature Description
BTS measures the strength and quality of the uplink radio signals and reports via the
G-Abis interface the measurement results to PCU, which controls the uplink power
based on the results.
PCU sends the BTS control parameters to BTS through G-Abis and provides control
over the downlink power based on the parameters.
The RLC/MAC block coding scheme is sent by PCU via G-Abis to BTS, which makes
radio block coding for the downlink data and the uplink radio blocks based on the
code.
All the packet data channels (PDCH) used by GPRS take the structure of 52
multiframes and maintain a strict mapping relationship with the G-TRAU frames of the
G-Abis interface. The frame number message of the air interface is transported
between PCU and BTS via the in-band signaling. After a synchronization process, the
data blocks sent by PCU to BTS can establish a precise time sequence relationship
with the TDMA frame numbers of BTS, so that there is minimum time delay when the
uplink and downlink data blocks are processed in BTS.
3.5.3 Physical Layer/Transmission Media

Like the Abis interface, the G-Abis interface counts physically on the 2Mbit/s E1, which
reaches BTS through BSC relay. The BSC functions only as a physical relay for the
data of the G-Abis interface.
There are packet traffic channel of the G-Abis interface and LAPD channel of the Pb
interface in the E1 from PCU to BSC, as shown in Table 4-8. There are packet traffic
channel of the G-Abis interface, circuit traffic channel of the Abis interface, RSL
(circuit-switched radio signaling link) and OML (circuit-switched operation &
maintenance link) link in the E1 from BSC to BTS. Depending on the usage of channel
resources, the G-Abis interface and the Abis interface may share one E1. The
sub-TSs in E1 occupied by the G-Abis interface and the Abis interface are shown in
Table 4-9.
Table 3-15 Sample of G-Abis interface TS configuration (in PCU-BSC section)
TS
Sub-TS 0
Sub-TS1
Sub-TS2
Sub-TS3
0
1
n
0
4
4n
1
5
4n+1
2
6
4n+2
3
7
4n+3
4m
4m+1
4m+2
4m+3
31
124
125
126
127
3-58
Usage
E1 synchronization TS
Packet data channel
Packet data channel
Dynamic additional sub-TS, supporting
additionally CS-3/CS-4 packet traffic
channel
LAPD channel
Feature Description
Table 3-16 Sample of G-Abis interface configuration (in BSC-BTS section)

TS
Sub-TS 0
Sub-TS1
Sub-TS2
Sub-TS3
4n
4n+1
4n+2
4n+3
m
31
4m
124
4m+1
125
4m+2
126
4m+3
127
Usage
E1 synchronization TS
Circuit traffic channel or packet data
channel
Dynamic additional sub-TS, supporting
additionally CS-3/CS-4 packet traffic
channel
RSL
OML
The radio channel on the air interface can be dynamically allocated as TCH or PDCH
to supports GPRS services. The sub-TSs at the E1 can be allocated dynamically to
the Abis interface or the G-Abis interface. The sub-TSs for the Abis interface transport
speech data with E-TRAU frames (GSM 08.60) and the sub-TSs for the G-Abis
interface transport packet data with G-TRAU frames.
In CS-1/CS-2, the PDCH with the rate of 16kbit/s can be carried by one sub-TS. Two
type sub-TSs can convert each other. In CS-3/CS-4, the bandwidth of the PDCH
exceeds 16kbit/s, so one sub-TS is not enough to carry the PDCH. This issue can be
resolved with the additional sub-TS. This is made up of 16kbit/s main TSs configured
for TCH by Abis interface, and the dynamic additional Sub-TS pool consisting of
16kbit/s idle TSs. When the data blocks of CS-3/CS-4 need to be transported between
PCU and BTS, additional Sub-TS will be taken from the additional Sub-TS pool and
attached to the main TS. After the data to be transmitted are decomposed by BTS,
they are transmitted simultaneously in the main and additional Sub-TS. PCU is
responsible for restoring the messages.
3.5.4 G-TRAU Frame Structure

It transports a bi-directional G-TRAU frame between BTS and PCU in every 20ms for
one PDCH. Each G-TRAU frame has the following fields as listed in Table 4-10.
Table 3-17 G-TRAU structure
G-TRAU frame field
Frame Header
Data Domain
In-band signaling
Description
Serves to synchronize G-TRAU frames between BTS and PCU. It is a group of
special bit sequences designed to define G-TRAU frames.
RLC/MAC data blocks generated during BTS decoding, or RLC/MAC data blocks
sent by PCU to BTS after being encoded.
Performs signaling interworking between PCU and BTS.
The signaling between PCU and BTS is in-band signaling.
3-59
Feature Description
The G-TRAU frame in-band signaling contains a large variety of complicated

mechanisms including BTS measurement, BTS power control, RLC/MAC block coding
scheme indication, synchronization of air interface blocks between BTS and PCU.
3.5.5 G-Abis Characteristics

1)
Half Standalone PCU and Flexible Physical Location
In GSM/GPRS specification, there is no concrete definition about the interface

between PCU and BTS (G-Abis interface). Despite the fact that PCU is part of GPRS
BSC, it can either be an embedded device or half stand-alone device. The
M900/M1800 PCU, a half stand-alone device can be located in BSC or SGSN (or in
MSC in a special networking mode) flexibly.
The addition of PCU makes the smallest impact on the existing GSM circuit switching
system. It makes possible for the existing BTS and BSC to support GPRS without
hardware upgrading. It can meet the processing capacity requirements posed by
packet-switched services to the greatest extent and cut the impact on the processing
capacity of the already-planned BSS to the minimum.
2)
Dynamic Additional Sub-TS Technology
Abis interface is based on the 16kbit/s links (or called 16kbit/s sub-TS). M900/M1800
GPRS BSS is also based on the 16kbit/s link at the G-Abis interface. When CS-3 and
CS-4 encoding mode is adopted, the rate of a PDCH is 15.6 kbit/s and 21.4 kbit/s,
therefore, when mapping the radio channels to the terristrial channels, a PDCH is
mapped to two 16 kbit/s links. However, the encoding mode adopted by PDCH is
adjusted according to the change of the radio transmission environment of the MS that
occupies it. Mapping a PDCH permanently onto two 16kbit/s links will greatly
decreases the multiplexing ratio of the G-Abis interface, and thus greatly reduce the
utilization ratio of the G-Abis interface transmission equipment.
With dynamic allocation, M900/M1800 GPRS BSS can resolve the transmission issue
of CS-3 and CS-4 on the G-Abis interface perfectly. The dynamic attached sub-slot
technology is to statically allocate a main 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot at the G-Abis interface
for the CS-3/CS-4 PDCH. With the dynamic additional sub-TS technology, it is not
necessary for GPRS BSS to upgrade the hardware of BTS, BSC or PCU for
supporting CS-3 and CS-4. In addition, in its support for CS-3 and CS-4, the
multiplexing ratio of the G-Abis interface is greatly improved, thus saving investments
on the G-Abis interface transmission equipment.
The dynamic additional sub-TS technology used by M900/M1800 GPRS BSS displays
the following features:
z
Any idle Sub-TS of the G-Abis interface can be used as additional sub-TS, so that
each has maximum utilization.
3-60
Feature Description
z
Within a same site address, the additional sub-TSs can be dynamically attached
to various main TSs to enhance the utilization ratio of this sub-TSs according to
statistical multiplexing rules.
The locations of the additional 16kbit/s sub-TS are relatively flexible. They do not
have to be adjacent to the main 16kbit/s sub-TS.
It packs and unpacks the data packets through software to avoid hardware
upgrading.
3)
Fast and stable time synchronization mechanism for the air interface blocks
With advanced synchronization mechanism and algorithm, PCU can stably

synchronize CCU within one TDMA multiframe duration (240ms) in terms of cell-based
air interface block after system initialization.
The stable air interface block synchronization between PCU and CCU is of great
significance for ensuring normal packet system information broadcast and
high-efficiency radio transmission in GPRS cells.
4)
Scalable G-TRAU Frames
The issue of forward and backward compatibility is taken into full account in the
definition of the structure of the G-TRAU frames, so it features good scalability.
Three-bit version number is defined in the header of the G-TRAU frame so that it can
support 8 different G-TRAU frames. M900/M1800 BSS, which features good forward
and backward compatibility on the G-Abis interface, can smoothly evolve to next
generation through the G-TRAU version mechanism.
3.6 Pb Interface
3.6.1 Overview
Pb interface is the interface between PCU and BSC. Like other BSS systems available
in market, Huaweis own proprietary Pb interface is efficiently designed and
implemented.
3-61
Feature Description

MSC
BTS
BSC
A
Um
PCU
Pb
BSS
Gb
SGSN
Figure 3-35 Position of PCU

PCU can be co-located with BSC or MSC or SGSN sites, even though it serves as
part of BSS. Huawei-developed Pb interface satisfies all the requirements of
BSC-PCU interface. It implements management functions between PCU and BSC for
various kinds of shared resources such as cell, packet channel, E1 trunk and system
information.
Besides, it supports dynamic channel conversion, MS access to CCCH, etc.
Figure 3-35 Location plan of PCU In actual practice, one PCU frame (with a maximum
of 12 Radio Packet Processing Units RPPUs) can connect with several BSCs through
E1, while one BSC can only connect with one PCU frame (or with several RPPUs
concurrently).
3.6.2 Internal Structure of Pb Interface

The Pb interface, as an internal protocol, has three layers.
z
Layer 1 (physical layer) adopts sub-TS of the E1 line. In fact, the Pb interface and
the G-Abis interface share the same physical link. One E1 is divided into 128 sub
TSs of 16kbit/s where 4 sub-TSs serve for synchronization. Some of these
sub-TSs are used for the physical link of the G-Abis interface, some for the
physical link of the Pb interface and the rest might serve as idle sub-TSs or be
multiplexed.
Layer 2 (link layer) is based on the LAPD protocol, which is a general data link
layer protocol. It receives the data transfer service from the physical layer and
delivers the connection-oriented or connectionless service to L3. LAPD aims to
implement peer-to-peer reliable message transfer between L3 entities.
Layer 3 protocol consists of a series of self-defined signaling messages. It is the

core of the Pb interface. It mainly manages of the messages regarding
3-62
Feature Description
GPRS-related resources between PCU and BSC, supports conversion of

dynamic channels between the packet service, speech service, and provides
functions of MS access to CCCH and speech paging message transmission.
As the bottom layer is based on the standard LAPD protocol, the Pb interface protocol
also refers specifically to its L3 signaling procedure.
3.6.3 Pb Interface Management

The Pb interface management includes: management of the trunk circuits between the
BSC and PCU, management of packet radio resources, packet service access support,
transmission management, PbSL link management, etc.
I. Management of the trunk circuits on the Pb interface

Management of the trunk circuits on the Pb interface helps to monitor the trunk circuits
between BSC and PCU for smooth system running, so that the PCU can be assigned
with an idle circuit when requesting the PDCH or dynamically modifying channel
coding to ensure the data services.
The procedures of Pb interface circuit resources management include Circuit
Block/Unblock, Unequipped Circuit, and Reset Circuit. The causes that initiate the
procedures include the OMC maintenance or change of the Pb interface equipment
state.
To simplify the design, the following rules are employed for Pb interface circuit
management:
z
A BSC only records the maintenance state of the circuit, not the usage of the
circuit.
Circuit management messages are activated by the BSC.
The PCU can block/unblock and reset circuits at the local end, without affecting
the circuit state at the BSC side.
The BSC can not change the state of the circuit determined by the maintenance
console at the PCU side, i.e. BSC has no authority to unblock a circuit that is
blocked at the maintenance console (PCU side).
The procedures of Circuit Block/Unblock, Unequipped Circuit, and Reset Circuit are
almost the same as those on the A-interface. The only difference is that MSC is
changed to the PCU and the trunk CIC (Circuit Identification Code) at the A-interface is
changed to the trunk circuit PCIC at the Pb interface. For example, the Circuit Block
procedure at the Pb interface is shown in Figure 3-37.
3-63
Feature Description

PCU
BSC
Block circuit
Block circuit acknowledgement
Figure 3-36 Process of group blocking the circuit
II. Packet radio resource management

Radio resource management on the Pb interface refers to the management of radio
resources related to the packet service. It has the following characteristics:
1)
All the radio resource information is configured at the data configuration console.
The radio resource information of PCU is obtained from the BSC.
Pb interface cell initialization process corresponds to this principle. It includes the
cell resetting at both BSC and PCU sides, notification by BSC to PCU of the
packet radio resource configuration of the cell, and start of packet system
information broadcast.
2)
Circuit service and packet service shares the radio resources, which are allocated
on demand. The circuit-based service will have the priority to be allocated.
Dynamic allocation of resources on demand requires that the BSC allocate the
radio resources in real-time to the circuit-based service or packet-based service
according to the current application. This means a dynamic conversion between
the TCH and PDCH. There are three channel conversion processes at Pb
interface:
When there is more data traffic demand for more channel resources, PCU
requests BSC to convert TCH into the PDCH. BSC decides the conversion
according to the available resources. If there are many TCHs idle, then BSC will
allow to converting TCHs into PDCHs and send the related information to the
BTS.
When the BSC discovers TCHs are insufficient, it requires the PCU to hand over
some PDCHs, which will be converted into TCHs. This requirement is mandatory
according to the rule of circuit-based service having the priority.
When the PCU discovers there are too many PDCHs idle, it will automatically
hand back some PDCHs, which will be converted into TCHs again. This is the
rule of circuit-based service having the priority.
3)
The BSC is responsible for assigning TCH, and the PCU is responsible for
assigning PDCH.
3-64
Feature Description
After PCU has been assigned with a PDCH, the allocation and release of this PDCH is
decided by PCU. Similar to GSM network, BSC is responsible for the allocation and
release of TCH.
4)
The states of the radio resources at the BSC and PCU sides must be kept
consistent.
To achieve the consistency between the states at both sides, the BSC need to notify
the PCU of the impact of the change on the BTS and OMC operations on the radio
resources. For example when the OMC blocks a certain packet channel, the BSC
needs to notify the PCU to update the channel state.
III. Packet service access

To support GPRS, it is necessary to broadcast system information type 13 on the
BCCH, and at the same time modify system information type 3, system information
type 7, etc, so that they include GPRS messages as GPRS Indicator. Based on these
messages, MS decides whether it should access the current serving cell for data
services or not.
When no PCCCH is configured in the local cell, the MS will access the packet service
through the CCCH. This mainly involves three procedures: packet call access initiated
by the MS, packet call access terminated by the MS, packet service suspension and
recovery for the Class-B MS.
IV. Other management procedures on the Pb interface

1)
Transmission management
In the TCH-to-PDCH conversion, the BSC needs to connect the trunk circuit on the
Abis interface and that on the Pb interface. During the process of packet data
transmission, the BSC needs to forward packet data among BTS-BSC-PCU. In the
PDCH to TCH conversion, the BSC needs to release the original connection.
In general, each PDCH corresponds to a 16kbit/s data channel. But if the transmission
quality proves to be satisfactory by PCU, it can activate a more efficient channel
coding method, like CS-3 or CS-4. At this time, the BSC needs to dynamically allocate
one more 16kbit/s timeslot to the PDCH, that is, the 32kbit/s data channel corresponds
to the PDCH.
2)
PbSL management
The Pb interface signaling link (PbSL) is a LAPD link. And PbSL management involves
the transmission and reception of Pb interface message packets, link load sharing, link
mutual-assistance function, etc.
If there is no PCCCH in a certain cell, the disconnection of all the PbSLs will lead to
the release of the resources of the cell at both sides of the Pb interface.
3)
Error handling
3-65
Feature Description
There may be errors during the process of transmission, so the Pb interface has the
error handling function. By this function, error messages will be omitted and some
"confusion" messages will be transmitted selectively.
3.6.4 Characteristics of Huawei Pb Interface

I. Supporting dynamic conversion between packet traffic and the speech
traffic channels
In practice, the channels are classicified into three types according to their properties:
fixed packet traffic channel, voice traffic channel and dynamic channel. The fixed
packet channel is dedicated for packet service, such as PDTCH, PBCCH and PCCCH.
Voice traffic channel is dedicated for voice service, such as TCH, BCCH and SDCCH.
The dynamic channel is the voice TCH at the initialization stage. It can be converted
between the former two types of channels.
When there is more packet traffic and the speech channels are relatively idle, PCU will
request the BSC to convert the dynamic channel into the dynamic packet traffic
channel. Whereas when BSC determines the speech channels are busy, it can also
request PCU to return the converted dynamic channel and use it again as speech
channel. In this process, the speech service is given the priority over the packet
service to guarantee the original speech services.
II. Supporting MS channel access request for CCCH

As BTS cannot identify the access request message sent by an MS on the CCCH, it
can make out that it is a packet access request only after the BSC analyzes the MS
request and then transfers it to PCU. Accordingly, the immediate assignment message
of PCU needs to be processed by BSC before it is sent to BTS. It can be seen from
here that when a MS accesses the CCCH and the PCCCH, it is processed differently
in the BSS.
The MSs that support access to the CCCH are not complex, so they are also low in
costs. Whereas the design of Huawei-developed Pb interface can enable PCU to
support two kinds of access concurrently, thus enhancing tremendously the
adaptability of the system.
III. Maintaining the consistency of resource data between BSC and PCU.
PCU and BSC are located in two places, so the message data of all the shared
resources (such as cells, channels, PCIC trunks and system information parameters)
should be consistent. This is also the major function of the Pb interface. The functions
of the Pb interface involve the management & maintenance of some resources, such
as cell parameter configuration, cell restarting, channel blocking/unblocking, PCIC
3-66
Feature Description
blocking/unblocking,
PCIC
restarting,
packet
system
information
parameter
configuration and regular check of all the resources data.
IV. Sending speech paging messages.

When the network operation mode is Mode 1, and there is no PCCCH. MSC sends
the voice paging message via Gs interface (MSC-SGSN) and Gb interface
(SGSN-PCU), and PCU transfers the message via Pb interface to BSC, which will
transmit the message on CCCH. For details of network operation mode, refer to other
relative chapters.
V. Supporting GPRS suspension and resume messages sent by Class-B MSs.

Class-B MS cannot implement CS service and PS service simultaneously. Therefore,
when the MS in packet transmission mode is engaged in traffic service, it will send the
GPRS suspension request to BSC. BSC will transfer this message to PCU via Pb
interface. When the circuit service of an MS is over, BSC will send a GPRS service
recovery request to PCU again via the Pb interface. The capability of supporting the
Class-B MSs by the system is enhanced while the Pb interface processes this kind of
messages.
3.7 Operation & Maintenance Interface

3.7.1 Overview
The operation & maintenance interface is an interface between the BSS and the
Operation & Maintenance System. A subscriber can perform the maintenance and
management over the BSS system through OMC console or the Telnet terminal, as
3-67
Feature Description

Telnet
MSC
BSC
O Interface
DCN
OMC Server
PCU
...
SGSN
OMC Workstation
OMC Workstation
Figure 3-37 GPRS/GSM operation & maintenance interface

Of the GSM equipment such as MSC, BSC, HLR, there is a BAM designed specifically
as a bridge between the equipment and the OMC. It collects the equipment
information and communicates with the OMC to implement the functions of the O
interface. In the GPRS equipment such as PCU, SGSN, etc., no BAM exists due to
variations in hardware implementation, so OAM module (OMC Agent Module) in the
POMU serves as a bridge between the system equipment and the OMC. For different
equipment, the OMC WSs are similar in interface, but are different in such
implementation as message interpretation.
3.7.2 Feature
Unlike the network bottom layer interfaces like Gb and Pb, the operation &
maintenance interface is an application layer interface in nature, thus relatively simple
in message structure and protocol layer. The lower layer of the operation &
maintenance interface is based on the TCP/IP protocol, which enables the OMC
system to acquire a very strong remote networking capability. As regards the system
composition, the software system sturcture of the O&M interface is arranged as shown
in Figure 3-38.
3-68
Feature Description
OMA
BAM
...
PCU
BSC
LAN/WAN
TCP/IP
OMC SHELL
Communication Server
Traffic Statistic
...
Alarm
Tracing
Database Server
...
OMC Sercer/DB
WorkStation
Figure 3-38 Structural diagram of the O interface software system

The O&M interface programs include OAM/BAM program, OMC Server/DB, OMC
Shell and OMC application console. Below is the brief introduction to the function and
feature:
z
OAM and BAM differ in hardware and software implementation. Although different
equipment manages different messages and information, they are the same in
basic functions.
The functionality of the OAM is mainly two-fold: first, it serves as a
communication bridge between the OMC system and the network equipment,
forwards the maintenance & operation command from the OMC to the FAM board
and orients the response from the AM to the OMC terminals accordingly. On the
other hand, it acts as a server in Client/Server models. Apart from the
management of the database as well as the test task and traffic statistic task, the
OAM also stores and forwards the charging messages, alarm messages and
traffic statistic data. It stores all the vital data on the hard disk and dumps them to
the CDs or OMC server if necessary.
OMC server is for running various service processes, such as communication

server and database server, etc. Communication server is the core of the whole
system, it connects other parts through application agents. The communication
server assigns an ID to each application part that connects directly to it. In the
process of message transmission, the communication server receives the
messages from all parts, determines the destination for these messages and
forwards the messages to the destination or makes proper processing. On the
other hand, all the database servers interact with the database management
system (DBMS) and manage all the data by answering the requests from the
3-69
Feature Description
OAM/BAM or SPOS. Moreover, there are also some other application servers
and management modules on the OMC server.
z
OMC Shell is a user interface that manages, operates and maintains the GSM
objects as well as a communication interface with all the SPOS programs. OMC
Shell is used for visual management of NEs of the entire Huawei GSM system
through WS.
OMC Shell program consists of user interface module and communication
module. User interface module provides visual operating interfaces such as
tree-like list and map windows. On the interface, a user can view the state of the
GSM objects or performs directly the operation, maintenance and management
over the GSM objects. The communication module is mainly responsible for
communication management.
OMC application console is a classified set of some service functions. For

different equipment, the functions implemented in their application consoles will
also change. The OMC application console of PCU mainly includes traffic
statistics management console, alarm console and message tracing console.
Since the overall system design is modularized by functions, it is possible to
adjust the function of the application console according to the carrier's
requirement.
3-70
Feature Description
Appendix A Abbreviations
A
AC
AC
ACELP
AGCH
AM/CM
ANSI
APL
ARFCN
ASIC
AUC
B
BA
BAM
BCC
BCCH
BCF
BCH
BER
BHCA
BIE
BM
BP
BQ
BSC
BSIC
BSS
BSSAP
BSSMAP
BTS
BTSM
BVC
C
CA
CAMEL
CBA
CBC
CBCH
CBQ
CC
CC
CCBS
CCCH
CD
CDB
CDU
CELP
CGI
CI
CIC
CIR
CKSN
CM
CPU
CR
CRC
CRO
Access Class (C0 to C15)

Alternating Current
Algebraic code excitation linear prediction
Access Grant Channel
Administration Module/ Communication Module
American National Standard Institute
Advanced Phase Locking
Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
Authentication Centre
BCCH Allocation
Back Administration Module
BTS Color Code
Broadcast Control Channel
Base Control Function
Broadcast Channel
Bit Error Rate
Busy Hour Call Attempts
Base station Interface Equipment
Basic Module
Burst Pulse
Bad Quality
Base Station Controller
Base Station Identity Code
Base Station System
Base Station Subsystem Application Part
Base Station Subsystem Management Application Part
Base Transceiver Station
Base Transceiver Station Management
BSSGP Virtual Connection
Cell Allocation
Customized Applications for Mobile network Enhanced Logic
Cell Bar Access
Cell Broadcast Center
Cell Broadcast Channel
Cell Bar Qualify
Connection Confirm
Call Control
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers
Common Control Channel
Call Deflection
Cell Broadcast Database
Combining and Distribution Unit
Code Excited Linear Prediction
Cell Global Identity
Cell Identity
Circuit Identification Code
Carrier to Interference Ratio
Ciphering Key Sequence Number
Connection Management
Central Processing Unit
Connection Request
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Cell Reselect Offset
A-1
Feature Description
CS
D
DBMS
DC
DCCH
DCL
DDN
DL
DLC
DLCEP
DLCEPI
DLCI
DNS
DPC
DRX
DSC
DTAP
DTMF
DTX
E
EA
E-Abis
EC
ECSC
ECT
EFR
EIR
EM
ETSI
F
FACCH
FCCH
FDMA
FH
FIR
FN
FR
FTC
FUC
G
G-Abis
GGSN
GLAP
GMM
GMPU
GMSC
GMSK
GPRS
GSM
GSM900
GSM1800
GSN
GT
H
HCS
HDLC
HDSL
HLR
HSC
HSN
HW
I
IEC
IMEI
Coding Scheme
Database Management System
Direct Current
Dedicated Control Channel
Diagnostic Control Link
Digital Data Network
Downlink
Data Link Connection
Data Link Connection End Point
Data Link Connection End Point Identifier
Data Link Connection Identifier
Domain Name Server
Destination (Signaling) Point Code
Discontinuous Reception (mechanism)
Downlink Signaling fault Count
Direct Transfer Application Part
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
Discontinuous transmission (mechanism)
Early Allocation
Enhanced Abis
Emergency Call
Early Classmark Send Control
Explicit Call Transfer
Enhanced full rate speech code
Equipment Identify Register
Extended Measurement
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
Fast Associated Control Channel
Frequency Correction Channel
Frequency Division Multiple Access
Frequency Hopping
Finity Impulsion Response
Frame Number
Frame Relay
Full Rate Transcoder
Frame Unit Controller
GPRS Abis
Gateway GPRS Support Node
LAPD Protocol Process board
GPRS Mobility Management
Main Process Unit
Gateway Mobile Switching Center
Gaussian Minimum Shift-frequency Keying
General Packet Radio Service
Global System for Mobile communications
GPRS Support Node
Global Title
Hierarchical Cell Structure
High level Data Link Control
High speed Digital Subscriber Line
Home Location Register
Hot Swap Controller
Hopping Sequence Number
Highway
International Electrotechnical Commission
International Mobile Equipment Identity
A-2
Feature Description
IMSI
IP
ISDN
ISUP
ITU-T
L
L2ML
LA
LAC
LAI
LAPD
LAPDm
LLC
LMT
LNA
M
MA
MAC
MAIO
MAP
MBR
MCC
MDC
MDT
ME
MM
MNC
MNS
MDSL
MR
MRP
MRT
MS
MSC
MSISDN
MT
MTP
N
NC
NCC
NCH
NM
NS
NSE
NSS
O
OAM
OMC
OML
OSI
P
PACCH
PAGCH
PBGT
PBCCH
PbSL
PCCCH
PCU
PD
PDP
PDCH
PDH
PDTCH
PIN
International Mobile Subscriber Identity

Internet Protocol
Integrated Services Digital Network
Integrated Services Digital Network User Part/ISDN User Part
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Layer 2 Management Link
Location Area
Location Area Code
Location Area Identity
Link Access Protocol on the D channel
Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel
Logical Link Control
Local Maintenance Terminal
Low Noise Amplifier
Mobile Allocation
Media Access Control
Mobile Allocation Index Offset
Mobile Application Part
Multiband Report
Mobile Country Code
Message Discrimination
Message Distribution
Mobile Equipment
Mobility Management
Mobile Network Code
Mobile Network Signaling
Medium Bit-rate Digital Subscriber Loop
Measurement Result
Multiple Reuse Pattern
Message Routing
Mobile Station
Mobile Switching Centre
Mobile Station International ISDN Number
Mobile Terminal
Message Transfer Part
Network Control
Network Color Code
Notification Channel
Network Management
Network Service
Network Service Entity
Network Sub System
Operation Administration and Maintenance
Operations & Maintenance Centre
Operation and Maintenance Link
Open Systems Interconnection
Packet Associated Control Channel
Packet Access Grant Channel
Power Budget
Packet Broadcast Control Channel
PCU-BSC Signaling Link
Packet Common Control Channel
Packet Control Unit
Protocol Discrimination
Packet Data Protocol
Packet Data Channel
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Packet Data Traffic Channel
Personal Identity Number
A-3
Feature Description
Phase I
Phase II
PLMN
PNCH
POMU
PON
PPCH
PRACH
PSI
PSK
PSTN
PT
PTCCH
PTM-M
PTP
Q
QoS
R
RACH
RE
RF
RLC
RPE-LTP
RPPU
RR
RSL
S
SABM
SACCH
SAP
SAPI
SCCP
SCH
SCU
SCMG
SDCCH
SDH
SDU
SGSN
SID
SIG
SIM
SLM
SLS
SMC
SMS
SMSCB
SMUX
SOR
SRM
SS
SSN
STM
T
TA
TAI
TBF
TCH
TDMA
TCSM
TE
TEI
TFI
TLLI
Personal Identity Number

Public Land Mobile Network
Packet Notification Channel
Packet Operation & Maintenance Unit
Passive Optical Network
Packet Random Access Channel
Packet System Information
Phase Shift Keying
Public Switched Telephone Network
Penalty Time
Packet Timing advanced Control Channel
Point To Multipoint Multicast
Point To Point
Quality of Service
Random Access Channel
Reestablishment
Radio Frequency
Radio Link Control
Regular Pulse Excitation-Long Term Prediction
Radio Packet Process Unit
Radio Resource
Radio Signaling Link
Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode
Slow Associated Control Channel
Service Access Point
Service Access Point Identifier
Signaling Connection Control Part
Synchronization Channel
Simple combining Unit
SCCP Management
Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Service Data Unit
Serving GPRS Support Node
Silence Descriptor
Signaling
Subscriber Identity Module
Signaling Link Management
Signaling Link Selection
Short Message Center
Short Message Service support
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast
Sub-Multiplexer
Support Optimization Routing
Signaling Route Management
Supplementary Service support
SubSystem Number
Signaling Traffic Management
Timing Advance
Timing Advance Index
Temporary Block Flow
Traffic Channel
Time Division Multiple Access
TransCode & Sub-Multiplexer
Terminal Equipment
Terminal Equipment Identifier
Transport Format Indicator
Temporary Link Level Identity
A-4
Feature Description
TMSC
TMSI
TN
TO
TRX
TRAU
TSC
TUP
U
UA
UDT
UI
USF
USSD
V
VAD
VBS
VEA
VGCS
VLR
VM
VSAT
W
WS
X
xDSL
Tandem Mobile Switching Centre

Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identifier
Timeslot Number
Temporary Offset
Transceiver
Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit
Training Sequence Code
Telephone User Part
Unnumbered Acknowledge
Unit Data
Unnumbered Information (frame)
Uplink State Flag
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
Voice Activity Detection
Voice Broadcast Service
Very Early Allocation
Voice Group Call Service
Visitor Location Register
Voice Mailbox
Very Small Aperture Terminal
Workstation
x Digital Subscriber Line
A-5

BSS Feature Description

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BSS Feature Description

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Chapter 1 BSS Solution .................................................................

1.1 GSM/GPRS System ...............................................................................

Chapter 2 BSS Functions ..............................................................

2.1 Basic Functions ......................................................................................

2.1.14 DTX ..............................................................................................

Chapter 3 Interface Description ....................................................

3.1 A Interface ..............................................................................................

3.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................

Appendix A Abbreviations ............................................................

M900/M1800 Base Station Subsystem

M900/M1800 Base Station Subsystem

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2002 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, SBS,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

TELESIGHT, Quidview, NETENGINE, Musa, OptiX, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia,

About This Manual

BSS, the network element of BSS, the characteristic of BSS.

feature, and GPRS feature.

Installation engineers & technicians

Operation & maintenance personnel

Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Warnings, cautions, notes and tips are in Arial Narrow.

Terminal Display is in Courier New; message input by the user

via the terminal is in boldface.

II. Command conventions

Command arguments for which you supply values are in italics.

Elements in square brackets [ ] are optional.

Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the

2.2 Extended Functions..........................................................................................................................................2-59

3.5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................3-57

Chapter 1 BSS Solution

Chapter 1 BSS Solution

OMC Server OMC W S

Figure 1-1 Huawei GSM/GPRS network

1.1.1 GSM System

Chapter 1 BSS Solution

CAMEL Phase 2 mobile intelligent service combines the technologies of GSM

Other new services, such as Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers (CCBS),

1.1.2 GPRS System

Chapter 1 BSS Solution

1.2 BSS System features

Figure 1-2 Huawei BSS solution

Chapter 1 BSS Solution

I. Serial BTSs which support seamless coverage

Supporting 900MHz, 1800MHz and mixed 900MHz/1800MHz GSM frequency

II. Flexible networking

The tree networking between PCU and BSC is supported.

III. Multiple services supported

A variety of services is provided: point-to-point short message service, cell

Chapter 1 BSS Solution

IV. Powerful and easy maintenance function:

Development-oriented architecture is adopted. All entities support downloading

The OMC provides friendly user interface for easier operation.

V. Stable and reliable performance

Self-check and switchover features enhances the system performance.

High availability of the system is ensured by using the excellent overload /

The leading-edge handover, power control and channel allocation algorithms

BCCH carrier frequency mutual-assistance, baseband frequency hopping &

Supporting 120 km extended cell.

Chapter 1 BSS Solution

I. Administration Module/ Communication Module

II. Basic Module